Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 1.
Define chemistry.
Answer:
Chemistry is the study of matter, its physical and chemical properties, and the physical and chemical changes it undergoes under different conditions.

Question 2.
Why is chemistry called a central science?
Answer:

  1. Knowledge of chemistry is required in the studies of physics, biological sciences, applied sciences, and earth and space sciences.
  2. Chemistry is involved in every aspect of day-to-day life, i.e. the air we breathe, the food we eat, the fluids we drink, our clothing, transportation and fuel supplies, etc.

Hence, chemistry is called a central science.

Question 3.
Give reason: Although chemistry has ancient roots, it has developed as modern science.
Answer:
Technological development in sophisticated instruments has expanded knowledge of chemistry which, now, has been used in applied sciences such as medicine, dentistry, engineering, agriculture, and daily home use products. Hence, due to development and advancement in science and technology, chemistry has developed as modem science.

Question 4.
How is chemistry traditionally classified?
Answer:
Chemistry is traditionally classified into five branches:

  • Organic chemistry
  • Inorganic chemistry
  • Physical chemistry
  • Biochemistry
  • Analytical chemistry

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 5.
Explain the following terms:
i. Organic chemistry
ii. Inorganic chemistry
iii. Physical chemistry
Answer:
i. Organic chemistry: It deals with properties and reactions of compounds of carbon.
ii. Inorganic chemistry: It deals with the study of all the compounds which are not organic.
iii. Physical chemistry: It deals with the study of properties of matter, the energy changes and the theories, laws and principles that explain the transformation of matter from one form to another. It also provides basic framework for all the other branches of chemistry.

Question 6.
Distinguish between
i. Mixtures and pure substances
ii. Mixtures and compounds
Answer:
i.

Mixtures Pure substances
a. Mixtures have no definite chemical composition. Pure substances have a definite chemical composition.
b. Mixtures have no definite properties. Pure substances always have the same properties regardless of their origin.
e.g. Paint (mixture of oils, pigment, additive), concrete (a mixture of sand, cement, water), etc. Pure metal, distilled water, etc.

ii.

Mixtures Compounds
a. Mixtures have no definite chemical composition. Compounds are made up of two or more elements in fixed proportion.
b. The constituents of a mixture can be easily separated by physical method. The constituents of a compound cannot be easily separated by physical method.
e.g. Paint (mixture of oils, pigment, additive), concrete (a mixture of sand, cement, water), etc. Water, table salt, sugar, etc.

Question 7.
What is the difference between element and compound?
Answer:
Elements cannot be broken down into simpler substances while compounds can be broken down into simpler substances by chemical changes.

Question 8.
Explain: States of matter
Answer:
There are three different states of matter as follows:

  1. Solid: Particles are held tightly in perfect order. They have definite shape and volume.
  2. Liquid: Particles are close to each other but can move around within the liquid.
  3. Gas: Particles are far apart as compared to that of solid and liquid.

These three states of matter can be interconverted by changing the conditions of temperature and pressure.

Question 9.
Explain: Physical and chemical properties
Answer:
i. Physical properties: These are properties which can be measured or observed without changing the identity or the composition of the substance. e.g. Colour, odour, melting point, boiling point, density, etc.

ii. Chemical properties: These are properties in which substances undergo change in chemical composition. e.g. Coal bums in air to produce carbon dioxide, magnesium wire bums in air in the presence of oxygen to form magnesium oxide, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 10.
How are properties of matter measured?
Answer:

  • Measurement involves comparing a property of matter with some fixed standard which is reproducible and unchanging.
  • Properties such as mass, length, area, volume, time, etc. are quantitative in nature and can be measured.
  • A quantitative measurement is represented by a number followed by units in which it is measured.
  • These units are arbitrarily chosen on the basis of universally accepted standards. e.g. Length of class room can be expressed as 10 m. Here, 10 is the number and ‘m’ is the unit ‘metre’ in which the length is measured.

Question 11.
Define: Units
Answer:
The arbitrarily decided and universally accepted standards are called units.
e.g. Metre (m), kilogram (kg).

Question 12.
What are the various systems in which units are expressed?
Answer:
Units are expressed in various systems like CGS (centimetre for length, gram for mass and second for time), FPS (foot, pound, second) and MKS (metre, kilogram, second) systems, etc.

Question 13.
What are SI units? Name the fundamental SI units.
Answer:
SI Units: In 1960, the general conference of weights and measures proposed revised metric system, called International system of Units i.e. SI system (abbreviated from its French name).
The seven fundamental SI units are as given below:

No. Base physical quantity SI unit Symbol
i. Length Metre k
ii. Mass Kilogram kg
iii. Time Second s
iv. Temperature Kelvin K
v. Amount of substance Mole mol
vi. Electric current Ampere A
vii. Luminous intensity Candela cd

[Note: Units for other quantities such as speed, volume, density, etc. can be derived from fundamental SI units.]

Question 14.
What is the basic unit of mass in the SI system?
Answer:
The basic unit of mass in the SI system is kilogram (kg).

Question 15.
Name the following:
i. Full form of CGS unit system
ii. Full form of FPS unit system
iii. The SI unit of length
iv. Symbol used for Candela unit
v. SI unit of electric current
vi. SI unit of electric current
Answer:
i. Centimetre Gram Second
ii. Foot Pound Second
iii. Metre (m)
iv. Cd
v. Kelvin (K)
vi. Ampere (A)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 16.
Give reason: The mass of a body is more fundamental property than its weight.
Answer:

  • Mass is an inherent property of matter and is the measure of the quantity of matter of a body.
  • The mass of a body does not vary with respect to its position.
  • On the other hand, the weight of a body is a result of the mass and gravitational attraction
  • Weight varies because the gravitational attraction of the earth for a body varies with the distance from the centre of the earth.

Hence, the mass of a body is more fundamental property than its weight.

Question 17.
How is gram related to the SI unit kilogram?
Answer:
The SI unit kilogram (kg) is related to gram (g) as 1 kg = 1000 g= 103 g.
[Note: ‘Gram’ is used for weighing small quantities of chemicals in the laboratories.
Other commonly used quantity is ‘milligram’. 1 kg = 1000 g = 106 mg]

Question 18.
Why are fractional units of the SI units of length often used? Give two examples of the fractional units of length. How are they related to the SI unit of length?
Answer:
i. Some properties such as the atomic radius, bond length, wavelength of electromagnetic radiation, etc. are very small and therefore, fractional units of the SI unit of length are often used to express these properties.
ii. Fractional units of length: Nanometre (nm), picometre (pm), etc.
iii. Nanometre (nm) and picometre (pm) are related to the SI unit of length (m) as follows:
1 nm = 10-9 m, 1 pm = 10-12 m

Question 19.
Define: Volume
Answer:
Volume is the amount of space occupied by a three-dimensional object. It does not depend on shape.

Question 20.
State the common unit used for the measurement of volume of liquids and gases.
Answer:
The common unit used for the measurement of volume of liquids and gases is litre (L).

Question 21.
How is the SI unit of volume expressed?
Answer:
The SI unit of volume is expressed as (metre)3 or m3.

Question 22.
Name some glassware that are used to measure the volume of liquids and solutions.
Answer:

  • Graduated cylinder
  • Burette
  • Pipette

Question 23.
What is a volumetric flask used for in laboratory?
Answer:
A volumetric flask is used to prepare a known volume of a solution in laboratory.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 24.
What is density of a substance? How is it measured?
Answer:
Density:

  • Density of a substance is its mass per unit volume. It is the characteristic property of any substance.
  • It is determined in the laboratory by measuring both the mass and the volume of a sample.
  • The density is calculated by dividing mass by volume.

Question 25.
How is the SI unit of density derived? State CGS unit of density.
Answer:
i. The SI unit of density is derived as follows:
Density = \(\frac{\text { SI unit mass }}{\text { SI unit volume }}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{kg}}{\mathrm{m}^{3}}\)
= kg m-3

ii. CGS unit of density: g cm-3
[Note: The CGS unit, g cm-3 is equivalent to \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{mL}}\) or g mL-1.]

Question 26.
State three common scales of temperature measurement.
Answer:

  1. Degree Celsius (°C)
  2. Degree Fahrenheit (°F)
  3. Kelvin (K)

Question 27.
State the temperatures in Fahrenheit scale that corresponds to 0 °C and 100 °C.
Answer:
The temperature that corresponds to 0 °C is 32 °F and the temperature that corresponds to 100 °C is 212 °F.

Question 28.
Write the expression showing the relationship between:
i. Degree Fahrenheit and Degree Celsius
ii. Kelvin and Degree Celsius
Answer:
i. The relationship between degree Fahrenheit and degree Celsius is expressed as,
°F = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
ii. The relationship between Kelvin and degree Celsius is expressed as,
K = °C + 273.15

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 29.
Convert the following degree Fahrenheit temperature to degree Celsius.
i. 50 °F ii. 10 °F
Answer:
Given: Temperature in degree Fahrenheit = 50 °F
To find: Temperature in degree Celsius
Formula: °F = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
Calculation: Substituting 50 °F in the formula,
°F = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
50 = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
°C = \(\frac{(50-32) \times 5}{9}\)
= 10 °C

ii. Given: Temperature in degree Fahrenheit = 10 °F
To find: Temperature in degree Celsius
Formula: °F = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
Calculation: Substituting 10 °F in the formula,
°F = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
10 = \(\frac {9}{5}\) (°C) + 32
°C = \(\frac{(10-32) \times 5}{9}\)
= -12.2 °C
Ans: i. The temperature 50 °F corresponds to 10 °C.
ii. The temperature 10 °F corresponds to -12.2 °C.

Question 30.
What is a chemical combination?
Answer:

  • The process in which the elements combine with each other to form compounds is called chemical combination.
  • The process of chemical combination is governed by five basic laws which were discovered before the knowledge of molecular formulae.

Question 31.
State and explain the law of definite proportions.
Answer:
Law of definite proportions:
i. The law states that “A given compound always contains exactly the same proportion of elements by weight”.
ii. French chemist, Joseph Proust worked with two samples of cupric carbonate; one of which was naturally occurring cupric carbonate and other was synthetic sample. He found the composition of elements present in both the samples was same as shown below:

Cupric carbonate % of copper % of carbon % of oxygen
Natural sample 51.35 9.74 38.91
Synthetic sample 51.35 9.74 38.91

iii. Thus, irrespective of the source, a given compound always contains same elements in the same proportion.

Question 32.
State and explain the law of multiple proportions.
Answer:
Law of multiple proportions:
i. John Dalton (British scientist) proposed the law of multiple proportions in 1803.
ii. It has been observed that two or more elements may combine to form more than one compound.
iii. The law states that, “ When two elements A and B form more than one compounds, the masses of element B that combine with a given mass of A are always in the ratio of small whole numbers”.
e.g. Hydrogen and oxygen combine to form two compounds, water and hydrogen peroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 1
Here, the two masses of oxygen (16 g and 32 g) which combine with the fixed mass of hydrogen (2 g) in these two compounds bear a simple ratio of small whole numbers, i.e. 16 : 32 or 1 : 2.

Question 33.
Show that NO and NO2 satisfy the law of multiple proportions.
Answer:
Nitrogen and oxygen combine to form two compounds, nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 2
Here, the two masses of oxygen (16 g and 32 g) which combine with the fixed mass of nitrogen (14 g) in these two compounds bear a simple ratio of small whole numbers, i.e. 16 : 32 or 1 : 2.
This is in accordance with the law of multiple proportions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 34.
Show that carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide satisfy the law of multiple proportions.
Answer:
Chemical reaction of carbon with oxygen gives two compounds, carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 3
Here, the two masses of oxygen (16 g and 32 g) which combine with the fixed mass of carbon (12 g) in these two compounds bear a simple ratio of small whole numbers, i.e. 16 : 32 or 1 : 2.
This is in accordance with the law of multiple proportions.

Question 35.
Show that SO2 and SO3 satisfy the law of multiple proportions.
Answer:
Chemical reaction of sulphur with oxygen gives two compounds, sulphur dioxide (SO2) and sulphur trioxide (SO3).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 4
Here, the two masses of oxygen (32 g and 48 g) which combine with the fixed mass of sulphur (32 g) in these two compounds bear a simple ratio of small whole numbers, i.e. 32 : 48 or 2 : 3.
This is in accordance with the law of multiple proportions.

Question 36.
State and explain Gay Lussac’s law of gaseous volume with two examples.
Answer:
Gay Lussac’s law:
i. Gay Lussac proposed the law of gaseous volume in 1808.
ii. Gay Lussac’s law states that, “ When gases combine or are produced in a chemical reaction, they do so in a simple ratio by volume, provided all gases are at same temperature and pressure
e.g. a. Under identical conditions of temperature and pressure, 100 mL of hydrogen gas combine with 50 mL of oxygen gas to produce 100 mL of water vapour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 5
Thus, the simple ratio of volumes is 2 : 1 : 2.

b. Under identical conditions of temperature and pressure, 1 L of nitrogen gas combine with 3 L of hydrogen gas to produce 2 L of ammonia gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 6
Thus, the simple ratio of volumes is 1 : 3 : 2.

Question 37.
Give two examples which support the Gay Lussac’s law of gaseous volume.
Answer:
i. Under identical conditions of temperature and pressure, 1 L of hydrogen gas reacts with 1 L of chlorine gas to produce 2 L of hydrogen chloride gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 7
Thus, the ratio of volumes is 1 : 1 : 2
This is in accordance with Gay Lussac’s law.

ii. Under identical conditions of temperature and pressure, 200 mL sulphur dioxide combine with 100 mL oxygen to form 200 mL sulphur trioxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 8
Thus, the ratio of volumes is 2 : 1 : 2.
This is in accordance with Gay Lussac’s law.

Question 38.
Match the following:

Law Statement
i. Law of definite proportions a. When two elements A and B form more than one compounds, the masses of element B that combine with a given mass of A are always in the ratio of small whole numbers
ii. Gay Lussac’s law b. Equal volumes of all gases at the same temperature and pressure contain equal number of molecules
iii. Law of multiple proportions c. When gases combine or are produced in a chemical reaction they do so in a simple ratio by volume, provided all gases are at same temperature and pressure
iv. Avogadro’s law d. A given compound always contains exactly the same proportion of elements by weight

Answer:
i – d,
ii – c,
iii – a,
iv – b

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 39.
32 g of oxygen reacts with some carbon to make 56 grams of carbon monoxide. Find out how much mass must have been used.
Answer:
Given: Mass of oxygen (reactant) = 32 g, mass of carbon monoxide (product) = 56 g
To find: Mass of oxygen (reactant)
Calculation: 12 g of carbon combine with 16 g oxygen to form 28 g of carbon monoxide as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 9
Hence, (2 × 12 = 24 g) of carbon will combine with (2 × 16 = 32 g) of oxygen to give (2 × 28 = 56 g) carbon monoxide.
Ans: Mass of carbon used = 24 g

Question 40.
Calculate the mass of sulphur trioxide produced by burning 64 g of sulphur in excess of oxygen. (Average atomic mass: S = 32 u, O = 16 u).
Solution:
Given: Mass of sulphur (reactant) = 64 g
To find: Mass of sulphur dioxide (product)
Calculation: 32 g of sulphur combine with 48 g oxygen to form 80 g of sulphur trioxide as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 10
Hence, (2 × 32 = 64 g) of sulphur will combine with (2 × 48 = 96 g) of oxygen to give (2 × 80 = 160 g) sulphur trioxide.
Ans: Mass of sulphur trioxide produced = 160 g

Question 41.
Explain Dalton’s atomic theory.
Answer:
John Dalton published “A New System of chemical philosophy” in the year of 1808. He proposed the following features, which later became famous as Dalton’s atomic theory.

  • Matter consists of tiny, indivisible particles called atoms.
  • All the atoms of a given elements have identical properties including mass. Atoms of different elements differ in mass.
  • Compounds are formed when atoms of different elements combine in a fixed ratio.
  • Chemical reactions involve only the reorganization of atoms. Atoms are neither created nor destroyed in a chemical reaction.

Dalton’s atomic theory could explain all the laws of chemical combination.

Question 42.
Give reason: Dalton’s atomic theory explains the law of conservation of mass.
Answer:

  • The law of conservation of mass states that, “Mass can neither be created nor destroyed” during chemical combination of matter.
  • According to Dalton’s atomic theory, chemical reactions involve only the reorganization of atoms. Therefore, the total number of atoms in the reactants and products should be same and mass is conserved during a reaction.

Hence, Dalton’s atomic theory explains the law of conservation of mass.

Question 43.
Give reason: Dalton’s atomic theory explains the law of multiple proportion.
Answer:

  • The law of multiple proportion states that, “When two elements A and B form more than one compounds, the masses of element B that combine with a given mass of A are always in the ratio of small whole numbers
  • According to Dalton’s atomic theory, compounds are formed when atoms of different elements combine in fixed ratio.

Hence, Dalton’s atomic theory explains the law of multiple proportion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 44.
Define: Atomic mass unit (amu).
Answer:
Atomic mass unit or amu is defined as a mass exactly equal to one twelth of the mass of one carbon-12 atom.

Question 45.
How is relative atomic mass of an atom measured?
Answer:

  • The mass of a single atom is extremely small, i.e. the mass of a hydrogen atom is 1.6736 × 10-24 g. Hence, it is not possible to weigh a single atom.
  • In the present system, mass of an atom is determined relative to the mass of an atom of carbon-12 as the standard. This was decided in 1961 by international agreement.
  • The atomic mass of carbon-12 is assigned as 12.00000 atomic mass unit (amu).
  • The masses of all other elements are determined relative to the mass of an atom of carbon-12 (C-12).
  • The atomic masses are expressed in amu which is exactly equal to one twelth of the mass of one carbon-12 atom.
  • The value of 1 amu is equal to 1.6605 × 10-24 g.

Question 46.
What is meant by Unified Mass unit?
Answer:

  • Presently, instead of amu, Unified Mass has now been accepted as the unit of atomic mass.
  • It is called Dalton and its symbol is ‘u’ or ‘Da’.

Question 47.
What is average atomic mass?
Answer:
The atomic mass of an element which exists as mixture of two or more isotopes is the average of atomic masses of its isotopes. This is called average atomic mass.

Question 48.
Define: Molecular mass
Answer:
Molecular mass of a substance is the sum of average atomic masses of the atoms of the elements which constitute the molecule.
OR
Molecular mass of a substance is the mass of one molecule of that substance relative to the mass of one carbon-12 atom.

Question 49.
How is molecular mass of a substance calculated? Give example.
Answer:
Molecular mass is calculated by multiplying average atomic mass of each element by the number of its atoms and adding them together.
e.g. Molecular mass of carbon dioxide (CO2) is calculated as follows:
Molecular mass of CO2 = (1 × average atomic mass of C) + (2 × average atomic mass of O)
= (1 × 12.0 u) + (2 × 16.0 u)
= 44.0 u

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 50.
Mass of an atom of hydrogen in gram is 1.6736 × 10-24 g. What is the atomic mass of hydrogen in u?
Solution:
Given: Mass of an atom of hydrogen in gram is 1.6736 × 10-24 g.
To find: Atomic mass of hydrogen in u
Calculation: 1.66056 × 10-24 g = 1 u
∴ 1.6736 × 10-24 g = x
x = \(\frac{1.6736 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~g}}{1.66056 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{~g} / \mathrm{u}}\) = 1.008u
Ans: The atomic mass of hydrogen in u = 1.008 u

Question 51.
The mass of an atom of one carbon atom is 12.011 u. What is the mass of 20 atoms of the same isotope?
Solution:
Mass of l atom of carbon = 12.011 u
∴ Mass of 20 atoms of same carbon isotope = 20 × 12.011 u = 240.220 u
Ans: The mass of 20 atoms of same carbon isotope = 240.220 u

Question 52.
Calculate the average atomic mass of neon using the following data:

Isotope Atomic mass Natural Abundance
20Ne 19.9924 u 90.92%
21Ne 20.9940 u 0.26 %
22Ne 21.9914 u 8.82 %

Solution:
Average atomic mass of Neon (Ne)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 11
Ans: Average atomic mass of neon = 20.1707 u

Question 53.
Calculate the average atomic mass of argon from the following data:

Isotope Isotopic mass (g mol-1) Abundance
36Ar 35.96755 0.337%
38Ar 37.96272 0.063%
40Ar 39.9624 99.600%

Solution:
Average atomic mass of argon (Ar)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry 12
Ans: Average atomic mass of argon = 39.974 g mol-1

Question 54.
Calculate the molecular mass of the following in u:
i. H2O ii. C6H5Cl iii. H2SO4
Solution:
i. Molecular mass of H2O = (2 × Average atomic mass of H) + (1 × Average atomic mass of O)
= (2 × 1.0u) + (1 × 16.0 u)
= 18 u

ii. Molecular mass of C6H5Cl = (6 × Average atomic mass of C) + (5 × Average atomic mass of H) + (1 × Average atomic mass of Cl)
= (6 × 12.0 u) + (5 × 1.0 u) + (1 × 35.5 u)
= 112.5 u

iii. Molecular mass of H2SO4 = (2 × Average atomic mass of H) + (1 × Average atomic mass of S) + (4 × Average atomic mass of O)
= (2 × 1.0 u) + (1 × 32.0 u) + (1 × 16.0 u)
= 98 u
Ans: i. The molecular mass of H2O = 18 u
ii. The molecular mass of C6H5Cl = 112.5 u
iii. The molecular mass of H2SO4 = 98 u

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 55.
Find the mass of 1 molecule of oxygen (O2) in amu (u) and in grams.
Solution:
Molecular mass of O2 = 2 × 16 u
∴ Mass of 1 molecule = 32 u
∴ Mass of 1 molecule of O2= 32 × 1.66056 × 10-24 g = 53.1379 × 10-24 g
Ans: Mass of 1 molecule in amu = 32 u
Mass of 1 molecule in grams = 53.1379 × 10-24 g

Question 56.
Find the formula mass of
i. NaCl ii. Cu(NO3)2
Solution:
i. Formula mass of NaCl
= Average atomic mass of Na + Average atomic mass of Cl
= 23.0 u + 35.5 u = 58.5 u

ii. Formula mass of Cu(NO3)2
= Average atomic mass of Cu + 2 × (Average atomic mass of N + Average atomic mass of three O)
= 63.5 + 2 × [14 + (3 × 16)] = 187.5 u
Ans: i. Formula mass of NaCl = 58.5 u
ii. Formula mass of Cu(NO3)2 = 187.5 u

Question 57.
Find the formula mass of
i. KCl
ii. AgCl
Atomic mass of K = 39 u, Ag =108 u and Cl = 35.5 u.
Solution:
i. Formula mass of KCl
= Average atomic mass of K + Average atomic mass of Cl
= 39 u + 35.5 u = 74.5 u

ii. Formula mass of AgCl
= Average atomic mass of Ag + Average atomic mass of Cl
= 108 + 35.5 = 143.5 u
Ans: i. Formula mass of KCl = 74.5 u
ii. Formula mass of AgCl = 143.5 u

Question 58.
Calculate the number of moles and molecules of urea present in 5.6 g of urea.
Solution:
Given: Mass of urea = 5.6 g
To find: The number of moles and molecules of urea
Formulae: i. Number of moles = \(\frac{\text { Mass of a substance }}{\text { Molar mass of a substance }}\)
ii. Number of molecules = Number of moles × Avogadro’s constant
Mass of urea = 5.6 g
Molecular mass of urea, NH2CONH2
= (2 × Average atomic mass of N) + (4 × Average atomic mass of H) + (1 × Average atomic mass of C) + (1 × average atomic mass of O)
= (2 × 14 u) + (4 × 1 u) + (1 × 12 u) + (1 × 16 u) = 60 u
∴ Molar mass of urea = 60 g mol-1
∴ Number of moles = \(\frac{\text { Mass of a substance }}{\text { Molar mass of a substance }}\)
= \(\frac{5.6 \mathrm{~g}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.09333 mol

[Calculation using log table:
\(\frac{5.6}{60}\)
= Antilog10 [log10 (5.6) – log10 (60)]
= Antilog10 [0.7482 – 1.7782]
= Antilog10 [latex]\overline{2} .9700[/latex]
= 0.09333]

Now,
Number of molecules of urea
= Number of moles × Avogadro’s constant
= 0.09333 mol × 6.022 × 1023 molecules/mol
= 0.5616 × 1023 molecules (by using log table)
= 5.616 × 1022 molecules
Ans: Number of moles of urea = 0.0933 mol
Number of molecules of urea = 5.616 × 1022 molecules

[Calculation using log table:
0.09333 × 6.022
= Antilog10 [log10 (0.09333) + log10 (6.022)]
= Antilog10 [\(\overline{2} .9698\) + 0.7797]
= Antilog10 [latex]\overline{1} .7495[/latex]
= 0.5616]

Question 59.
Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following:
i. 64 u of oxygen (O)
ii. 42 g of nitrogen (N)
Solution:
i. 64 u of oxygen (O) = x atoms
Atomic mass of oxygen (O) = 16 u
∴ Mass of one oxygen atom = 16 u
∴ x = \(\frac{64 \mathrm{u}}{16 \mathrm{u}}\) = 4 atoms

ii. 42 g of nitrogen (N)
Atomic mass of nitrogen = 14 u
∴ Molar mass of nitrogen = 14 g mol-1
Now,
Number of moles = \(\frac{\text { Mass of a substance }}{\text { Molar mass of a substance }}\)
= \(\frac{42 \mathrm{~g}}{14 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 3 mol
Now,
Number of atoms = Number of moles × Avogadro’s constant
= 3 mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 18.07 × 1023 atoms
= 1.807 × 1024 atoms
Ans: i. Number of oxygen atoms in 64 u = 4 atoms
ii. Number of nitrogen atoms in 42 g = 1.807 × 1024 atoms

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Question 60.
Calculate the number of atoms in each of the following.
i. 52 moles of Argon (Ar)
ii. 52 u of Helium (He)
iii. 52 g of Helium (He)
Solution:
i. 52 moles of Argon
1 mole Argon atoms = 6.022 × 1023 atoms of Ar
∴ Number of atoms = 52 mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 313.144 × 1023 atoms of Argon

ii. 52 g of He
Molar mass of He = mass of 1 atom of He = 4.0 u
4.0 u = 1 He
∴ 52 u = x
∴ x = 52 u × \(\frac{1 \text { atom of He }}{4.0 \mathrm{u}}\) = 13 atoms of He

iii. 52 g of He
Molar mass of He = 4.0 g mol-1
Number of moles = \(\frac{\text { Mass of a substance }}{\text { Molar mass of a substance }}\)
= \(\frac{52 \mathrm{~g}}{4.0 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 13 mol
Number of atoms of He = Number of moles × Avogadro’s constant
= 13 mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 78.286 × 1023 atoms of He
Ans. i. Number of argon atoms in 52 moles = 313.144 × 1023 atoms of Argon
ii. Number of helium atoms in 52 u = 13 atoms of He
iii. Number of helium atoms in 52 g = 78.286 × 1023 atoms of He

Question 61.
Calculate the number of atoms of ‘C’, ‘H’ and ‘O’ in 72.5 g of isopropanol, C3H7OH (molar mass 60 g mol-1).
Solution:
Mass of isopropanol(C3H7OH) = 72.5 g
The number of atoms of C, H, O
Calculation: Molecular formula of isopropanol, is C3H7OH.
Molar mass of C3H7OH = 60 g mol-1
Number of moles = \(\frac{\text { Mass of a substance }}{\text { Molar mass of a substance }}\)
= \(\frac{72.5 \mathrm{~g}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 1.208 mol
∴ Moles of isopropanol = 1.21 mol
Number of atoms = Number of moles × Avogadro’s constant
Now, 1 molecule of isopropanol has total 12 atoms, out of which 8 atoms are of H, 3 of C and 1 of O.
∴ Number of C atoms in 72.5 g isopropanol = (3 × 1.208) mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 2.182 × 1024 atoms of carbon
∴ Number of ‘H’ atoms in 72.5 g isopropanol = (8 × 1.208) mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 5.819 × 1024 atoms of hydrogen
∴ Number of ‘O’ atoms in 72.5 g isopropanol = (1 × 1.208) mol × 6.022 × 1023 atoms/mol
= 7.274 × 1023 atoms of oxygen
Ans. 72.5g of isopropanol contain 2.182 ×1024 atoms of H and 7.274 × 1023 atoms of O.

Question 62.
Calculate the number of moles and molecules of ammonia (NH3) gas in a volume 67.2 dm3 of it measured at STP.
Solution:
Given: Volume of ammonia at STP = 67.2 dm3
To find: Number of moles and molecules of ammonia
Formulae: i. Number of moles of a gas (n) = \(\frac{\text { Volume of a gas at STP }}{\text { Molar volume of a gas }}\)
ii. Number of molecules = Number of moles × 6.022 × 1023 molecules mol-1
Calculation: Molar volume of a gas = 22.4 dm3 mol-1 at STP.
Number of moles (n) = \(\frac{\text { Volume of a gas at STP }}{\text { Molar volume of a gas }}\)
Number of moles of NH3 = \(\frac{67.2 \mathrm{dm}^{3}}{22.4 \mathrm{dm}^{3} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
Number of molecules = Number of moles × 6.022 × 1023 molecules mol-1
3.0 mol × 6022 × 1023 molecules mol-1
= 18.066 × 1023 molecules
Ans: Number of moles of ammonia = 3.0 mol
Number of molecules of ammonia = 18.066 × 1023 molecules

Question 63.
3.40 g of ammonia at STP occupies volume of 4.48 dm3. Calculate molar mass of ammonia.
Solution:
Given: Mass of ammonia = 3.40 g
Volume at STP = 4.48 dm3
To Find: Molar mass of ammonia
Calculation: Let ‘x’ grams be the molar mass of NH3.
Molar volume of a gas = 22.4 dm3 mol-1 at STP.
Volume occupied by 3.40 g of NH3 at S.T.P = 4.48 dm3
Volume occupied by ‘x’ g of NH3 at S.T.P = 22.4 dm3
∴ x = \(\frac{22.4 \times 3.40}{4.48}\) = 17.0 g mol-1
Ans: Molar mass of ammonia is 17.0 g mol-1.

Question 64.
Veg puffs from a particular bakery have an average mass of 27.0 g, whereas egg puffs from the same bakery have an average mass of 40 g.
i. Suppose a person buys 1 kg of veg puff from the bakery. Calculate the number of veg puffs he receives.
ii. Determine the mass of egg puffs (in kg) that will contain the same number of eggs puffs as in one kilogram of veg puffs.
Solution:
i. Mass of a veg puff = 27.0 g = 0.027 kg
∴ Number of veg puffs in 1 kg = 1 / 0.027 = 37
ii. One kilogram of veg puffs contains 37 veg puffs.
Mass of 37 egg puffs = 37 × 0.040 = 1.48 kg
Ans: i. 37 veg puffs in 1 kg of puff.
ii. Mass of 37 egg puffs is 1.48 kg

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. The branch of chemistry which deals with carbon compounds is called ……………. chemistry.
(A) organic
(B) inorganic
(C) carbon
(D) bio
Answer:
(A) organic

2. A/an is a simple combination of two or more substances in which the constituent substances retain their separate identities.
(A) compound
(B) mixture
(C) element
(D) All of these
Answer:
(B) mixture

3. Which one of the following is NOT a mixture?
(A) Paint
(B) Gasoline
(C) Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
(D) Distilled water
Answer:
(D) Distilled water

4. The sum of the masses of reactants and products is equal in any physical or chemical reaction. This is in accordance with ………………
(A) law of multiple proportion
(B) law of definite composition
(C) law of conservation of mass
(D) law of reciprocal proportion
Answer:
(C) law of conservation of mass

5. A sample of calcium carbonate (CaCO3) has the following percentage composition: Ca = 40 %; C = 12 %; O = 48 %. If the law of definite proportions is true, then the weight of calcium in 4 g of a sample of calcium
carbonate from another source will be ……………..
(A) 0.016 g
(B) 0.16 g
(C) 1.6 g
(D) 16 g
Answer:
(C) 1.6 g

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

6. Two elements, A and B, combine to form two compounds in which ‘a’ g of A combines with ‘b1’ and ‘b2’g of B respectively. According to law of multiple proportion ………………
(A) b1 = b2
(B) b1 and b2 bear a simple whole number ratio
(C) a and b1 bear a whole number ratio
(D) no relation exists between b1 and b2
Answer:
(B) b1 and b2 bear a simple whole number ratio

7. At constant temperature and pressure, two litres of hydrogen gas react with one litre of oxygen gas to produce two litres of water vapour. This is in accordance with ……………….
(A) law of multiple proportion
(B) law of definite composition
(C) law of conservation of mass
(D) law of gaseous volumes
Answer:
(D) law of gaseous volumes

8. One mole of oxygen molecule weighs …………….
(A) 8 g
(B) 32 g
(C) 16 g
(D) 6.022 × 1023 g
Answer:
(B) 32 g

9. The mass of 0.002 mol of glucose (C6H12O6) is ………………
(A) 0.20 g
(B) 0.36 g
(C) 0.50 g
(D) 1.80 g
Answer:
(B) 0.36 g

10. Which of the following is CORRECT?
(A) 1 mole of oxygen atoms contains 6.0221367 × 1023 atoms of oxygen.
(B) 1 mole of water molecules contains 6.0221367 × 1023 molecules of water.
(C) 1 mole of sodium chloride contains 6.0221367 × 1023 formula units of NaCl.
(D) All of these
Answer:
(D) All of these

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Some Basic Concepts of Chemistry

11. 180 g of glucose (C6H12O6) contains ……………. carbon atoms.
(A) 1.8 × 1023
(B) 1.8 × 1024
(C) 3.6 × 1023
(D) 3.6 × 1024
Answer:
(C) 3.6 × 1023

12. The number of molecules present in 8 g of oxygen gas is …………….
(A) 6.022 × 1023
(B) 3.011 × 1023
(C) 12.044 × 1023
(D) 1.505 × 1023
Answer:
(D) 1.505 × 1023

13. The number of molecules in 22.4 cm3of ozone gas at STP is ……………….
(A) 6.022 × 1020
(B) 6.022 × 1023
(C) 22.4 × 1020
(D) 22.4 × 1023
Answer:
(A) 6.022 × 1020

14. 11.2 cm3 of hydrogen gas at STP, contains …………….. moles.
(A) 0.0005
(B) 0.01
(C) 0.029
(D) 0.5
Answer:
(A) 0.0005

15. The mass of 224 mL of hydrogen gas at STP is
(A) 0.02 g
(B) 0.224 g
(C) 2.24 g
(D) 20.0 g
Answer:
(A) 0.02 g

16. 4.4 g of an unknown gas occupies 2.24 L of volume under STP conditions. The gas may be ………………
(A) CO2
(B) CO
(C) O2
(D) SO2
Answer:
(A) CO2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 1.
Express the speed of EM waves in terms of permittivity and permeability of the medium.
Answer:
In a material medium, the speed of EM waves is given by, c = \(\sqrt{\frac {1}{εµ}}\)
Where, ε = Permittivity and µ = permeability.
These constants depend on the electric and magnetic properties of the medium.

Question 2.
How can one classify commonly observed phenomena of light on the basis of the nature of light?
Answer:
Commonly observed phenomena concerning light can be broadly split into three categories:

  1. Ray optics or geometrical optics: Ray optics can be used for understanding phenomena like reflection, refraction, double refraction, total internal reflection, etc.
  2. Wave optics or physical optics: Wave optics explains the phenomena of light such as, interference, diffraction, polarisation, Doppler effect etc.
  3. Particle nature of light: Particle nature of light can be used to explain phenomena like photoelectric effect, emission of spectral lines, Compton effect etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 3.
State the fundamental laws on which ray optics is based.
Answer:
Ray optics is based on the following fundamental laws:
i. Light travels in a straight line in a homogeneous and isotropic medium.

ii. Two or more rays can intersect at a point without affecting their paths beyond that point.

iii. Laws of reflection:
a. Reflected ray lies in the plane formed by incident ray and the normal drawn at the point of incidence and the two rays are on either side of the normal.
b. Angles of incidence and reflection are equal (i = r).

iv. Laws of refraction:
a. Refracted ray lies in the plane formed by incident ray and the normal drawn at the point of incidence; and the two rays are on either side of the normal.

b. Angle of incidence (90 and angle of refraction (62) are related by Snell’s law, given by,
n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2
where, n1, n2 = refractive indices of medium 1 and medium 2 respectively.

Question 4.
Explain Cartesian sign conventions using a graph.
Answer:
According to Cartesian sign conventions:
i. All distances are measured from the optical centre or pole.

ii. Figures should be drawn in such a way that the incident rays travel from left to right. Thus, a real object should be shown to the left and virtual object or image to the right of pole (or optical centre).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 1

iii. X-axis can be conveniently chosen as the principal axis with origin at the pole.

iv. Distances to the left of the pole are negative and those to the right of the pole are positive.

v. Distances above the principal axis (X-axis) are positive while those below it are negative.

Question 5.
Define and represent in a neat diagram the following terms:
i. Diverging beam
ii. Converging beam
Answer:
i. A diverging beam of light corresponds to rays of light coming from real point object.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 2

ii. A converging beam corresponds to rays of light directed to a virtual point object or image.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 3

Question 6.
Thickness of the glass of a spectacle is 2 mm and refractive index of its glass is 1.5. Calculate time taken by light to cross this thickness. Express your answer with most convenient prefix attached to the unit ‘second’.
Answer:
Speed of light in vacuum, c = 3 × 108 m/s
Given that:
Refractive index, (nglass) = 1.5
Thickness of the glass = 2 mm
= 2 × 10sup>-3 m
∵ Re fractive index (nglass) = \(\frac{\text { speed of light in vacuum }(\mathrm{c})}{\text { speed of light in glass (v) }}\)
∵ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{c}}{\mathrm{n}_{\text {glass }}}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{1.5}\) = 2 × 108 m/s
As v = \(\frac {s}{t}\)
time taken (t) to cross the thickness (s),
t = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{v}}=\frac{2 \times 10^{-3}}{2 \times 10^{8}}\) = 1 × 10-11 s
Most convenient unit to express this small time is nano second. (1 ns = 10-9 s)
∴ t = 0.01 × 10-9 s = 0.01 ns

Question 7.
Explain the properties of the image formed after reflection of light from a plane surface.
Answer:

  1. The image of an object kept in front of a plane reflecting surface is virtual and laterally inverted.
  2. Image is of the same size as that of the object.
  3. It is situated at the same distance as that of object but on the other side of the reflecting surface.

Question 8.
Explain the formula to find the number of images formed when an object is placed in between two plane mirrors inclined at an angle θ.
Answer:

  1. If an object is kept between two plane mirrors inclined at an angle θ, multiple images (N) are formed due to multiple reflections from both the mirrors.
  2. The number of images can be calculated using formula n = \(\frac {360}{θ}\)
  3. Exact number of images seen (N) depends upon the angle between the mirrors and position of the object.
  4. When n is an even integer, for all positions of the object the number of images formed are N = n – 1.
  5. When n is an odd integer:
    a. For an object placed at the angle bisector of the mirrors: N = n- 1
    b. For an object placed off the angle bisector of the mirrors: N = n
  6. If n is not an integer, N = m, where m is integral part of n.

Question 9.
Define radius of curvature of a spherical mirror.
Answer:
Radius of the sphere of which a mirror is a part is called as radius of curvature of the mirror.

Question 10.
What is the focal length of a spherical mirror? Give its relation with the radius of curvature.
Answer:
i. For a concave mirror focal length is the distance at which parallel incident rays converge. For a convex mirror, it is the distance from where parallel rays appear to be diverging after reflection.

ii. In case of spherical mirrors, half of radius of curvature is focal length of the mirror,
f = \(\frac {R}{2}\)

Question 11.
Show with the help of a ray diagram that focal length of convex mirror is positive while that of concave mirror is negative.
Answer:
i. According to sign conventions, the incident rays are drawn from left of the mirror to the right as shown in the ray diagrams below.

ii. As the rays incident on convex mirror appear to converge at a point on the positive side of the origin, the focal length of the convex mirror is positive.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 4

iii. However, in case of concave mirror, the rays converge at a point on negative side of the origin, the focal length of the concave mirror is negative.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 5

Question 12.
Give relation between focal length, object distance and image distance for a small spherical mirror.
Answer:
For a point object or for a small finite object, the focal length of a small spherical mirror is related to object distance and image distance as,
\(\frac {1}{f}\) = \(\frac {1}{v}\) + \(\frac {1}{u}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 13.
What is lateral magnification? How does it vary in different types of spherical mirrors?
Answer:
i. Ratio of linear size of image to that of the object, measured perpendicular to the principal axis, is defined as the lateral magnification.
∴ m = \(\frac {h_2}{h_1}\) = \(\frac {v}{u}\) (for spherical lenses)
m = –\(\frac {v}{u}\) (for spherical mirrors)

ii. For any position of the object, a convex mirror always forms virtual, erect and diminished image. Thus, lateral magnification for convex lens is always m < 1.

iii. In the case of a concave mirror, it depends upon the position of the object.

Question 14.
Complete the following table for a concave mirror?

Position of object Position of image Lateral magnification
U = ∞ v = f m = 0
u > 2f ……………. m < 1
u = f V = ∞ ………………
…………… |v| > |u| m > 1
2f > u > f ……………… m > 1

Answer:

Position of object Position of image Lateral magnification
U = ∞ v = f m = 0
u > 2f 2f > v > f m < 1
u = f V = ∞ m = ∞
u < f |v| > |u| m > 1
2f > u > f v > 2f m > 1

Question 15.
Explain with proper diagram why parabolic mirrors are preferred over spherical one.
Answer:
i. Unlike spherical shape, every point on a parabola is equidistant from a straight line and a point.

ii. Consider given parabola having RS as directrix and F as the focus. Points A, B, C on it are equidistant from line RS and point F.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 6

iii. Hence A’A = AF, B’B = BF, C’C = CF, and so on.

iv. If rays of equal optical path converge at a point, that point is the location of real image corresponding to that beam of rays.

v. From figure, the paths A”AA’, B”BB’. C”CC’, etc., are equal paths when mirror is neglected.

vi. If the parabola ABC is a mirror then by definition of parabola the respective optical paths,
A”AF = B”BF = C”CF

vii. Thus, F is the single point focus for entire beam of rays parallel to the axis and there is no spherical aberration.
Hence, parabolic mirrors are preferred over spherical one as there is no spherical aberration.

Question 16.
A small object is kept symmetrically between two plane mirrors inclined at 38°. This angle is now gradually increased to 41°, the object being symmetrical all the time. Determine the number of images visible during the process.
Answer:
The object is kept symmetrically between two plane mirrors. This implies the object is placed at angle bisector.
Thus, for θ = 38°,
n = \(\frac {360}{38}\) = 9.47
As it is not integral, N = 9 (the integral part of n)
∴ For going from 38° to 41°, the mirrors go through angles 39° and 40°. Number of images formed will remain 9 for all angles between 38° and 40°.
For angles > 40°, the n goes on decreasing and when θ = 41°,
n = \(\frac {360}{41}\) = 8.78 i.e., N = 8

Question 17.
A thin pencil of length 20 cm is kept along the principal axis of a concave mirror of curvature 30 cm. Nearest end of the pencil is 20 cm from the pole of the mirror. What will be the size of image of the pencil?
Answer:
For the pencil kept along the principal axis and the end of the pencil closest to pole is at 20 cm,
say, u1 = -20 cm
Flence, the other end of the stick is at distance, u2 = (u1 + 20) = -40 cm from pole of the mirror.
As R = -30 cm, F = \(\frac {R}{2}\) = -15 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 7
∴ v2 = -24 cm
Here, negative signs indicate that images are formed on the left of the mirror.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 8
The length of the image formed is given by,
v = v2 – v1 = -24 – (-60) = 36 cm.

Question 18.
An object is placed at 15 cm from a convex mirror having radius of curvature 20 cm. Find the position and kind of image formed by it.
Answer:
Given: u = – 15 cm,
f = \(\frac {R}{2}\) = + \(\frac {20}{2}\) = + 10cm
To find: Nature and position of image (v)
Formula: \(\frac {1}{v}\) + \(\frac {1}{u}\) = \(\frac {1}{f}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
∴ \(\frac {1}{v}\) = \(\frac {1}{f}\) – \(\frac {1}{u}\)
= \(\frac {1}{+10}\) – \(\frac {1}{-15}\) = \(\frac {1}{10}\) + \(\frac {1}{15}\)
= \(\frac {2+3}{30}\) = \(\frac {5}{30}\) = \(\frac {1}{6}\)
∴ v = 6 cm

Question 19.
Prove that refractive index of a glass slab is given by the formula,
n = \(\frac {Real depth}{Apparent depth}\)
Answer:
i. Consider a plane parallel slab of a transparent medium of refractive index n.

ii. A point object O at real depth R appears to be at I at apparent depth A, when seen from outside (air).

iii. Consider incident ray OA and OB as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 9

iv. Assuming i and r to be very small, we can write,
tan r = \(\frac {x}{A}\) ≈ sin r and tan i = \(\frac {x}{R}\) ≈ sin i

v. According to Snell’s law, for a ray travelling from denser medium to rarer medium,
n = \(\frac{\sin \mathrm{r}}{\sin \mathrm{i}} \approx \frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{A}}\right)}{\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{D}}\right)}=\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{\text { Real depth }}{\text { Apparent depth }}\)

Question 20.
The depth of a pond is 10 m. What is the apparent depth for a person looking normally to the water surface? nwater = 4/3.
Answer:
Given: Real depth of pond, dreal = 10 m,
nw = \(\frac {4}{3}\)
To find: Apparent depth
Formula: n = \(\frac {Realdepth}{Apparent depth}\)
Calculation: From formula,
∴ Apparent depth = \(\frac {Realdepth}{n}\) = \(\frac {10}{(\frac{4}{3})}\)
= \(\frac {10×3}{4}\) = 7.5 m

Question 21.
A crane flying 6 m above a still, clear water lake sees a fish underwater. For the crane, the fish appears to be 6 cm below the water surface. How much deep should the crane immerse its beak to pick that fish?
For the fish, how much above the water surface does the crane appear? Refractive index of water = 4/3.
Answer:
For crane, apparent depth of fish = 6 cm,
Given that refractive index (nw) = \(\frac {4}{3}\)
nw = \(\frac {Realdepth}{Apparent depth}\)
∴ Apparent depth = \(\frac {4}{3}\) × 6 = 8 cm
Similarly, for fish, real height of crane = 6 m and
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{air}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{w}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{w}}}=\frac{\text { Real height }}{\text { Apparent height }}\)
\(\frac {3}{4}\) = \(\frac {6}{Apparent height}\)
i.e., Apparent height = \(\frac {4×6}{3}\) = 8 m

Question 22.
Write a short note on Periscope.
Answer:
i. Instrument used to see the objects on the surface of a water body from inside of water is called periscope.
ii. It consists of two right angled prisms. The incident rays of light are reflected twice through these prisms.
iii. Total internal reflections occur inside these prisms and a clear view of the surface of water is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 10

Question 23.
A ray of light passes from glass (ng = 1.52) to water (nw = 1.33). What is the critical angle of incidence?
Answer:
Given: ng = 1.52, nw = 1.33
To find: Critical angle (ic)
formula: sin ic = \(\frac {n_2}{n_1}\) = \(\frac {n_w}{n_g}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
ic = sin-1 (\(\frac {1.33}{1.52}\)) = sin-1 (0.875) = 61°2′

Question 24.
There is a tiny LED bulb at the center of the bottom of a cylindrical vessel of diameter 6 cm. Height of the vessel is 4 cm. The beaker is filled completely with an optically dense liquid. The bulb is visible from any inclined position but just visible if seen along the edge of the beaker. Determine refractive index of the liquid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 11
As the bulb is just visible from the edge, the angle of incidence formed by ray OP must be equal to critical angle.
∴ refractive index (n) = \(\frac {1}{sin i_c}\)
From Figure,
tan ic = \(\frac {PQ}{OQ}\) = \(\frac {4}{3}\)
∴ sin ic = \(\frac {OQ}{OP}\) = \(\frac {3}{5}\)
∴ nliquid = \(\frac {5}{3}\)

Question 25.
What are convex and concave lenses? For which condition, convex lens will have negative focal length?
Answer:

  1. A lens is said to be convex if it is thicker in the middle and narrowing towards the periphery. According to Cartesian sign convention, its focal length is positive.
  2. Convex lens is visualized to be internal cross section of two spheres (or one sphere or a plane surface).
  3. A lens is concave if it is thicker at periphery and narrows down towards centre and has negative focal length.
  4. Concave lens is visualized to be external cross section of two spheres.
  5. For lenses of material optically rarer than the medium in which those are kept, convex lenses will have negative focal length and they will diverge the incident rays.

Question 26.
Which lenses can be considered as thin lenses?
Answer:
Lenses for which the maximum thickness is at least 50 times smaller than all the other distances are considered as thin lenses.

Question 27.
Give the expression for the focal length of combination of lenses when
i. Lenses are kept in contact with each other
ii. Two lenses kept at a distance d apart from each other.
Answer:
i. For thin lenses kept in contact:
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{1}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{2}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}_{3}}\) + ………

ii. For two lenses kept distance d apart:
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}-\frac{d}{f_{1} f_{2}}\)

Question 28.
An object is placed infront of a convex surface separating two media of refractive index 1.1 and 1.5. The radius of curvature is 40 cm. Where is the image formed when an object is placed at 220 cm from the refracting surface?
Solution:
Given: n1 = 1.1, n2 = 1.5, R = + 40 cm,
u = -220 cm
To find: Position of image (v)
Formula: \(\frac{n_{2}}{v}-\frac{n_{1}}{u}=\frac{\left(n_{2}-n_{1}\right)}{R}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 12

Question 29.
A glass paper-weight (n = 1.5) of radius 3 cm has a tiny air bubble trapped inside it. Closest distance of the bubble from the surface is 2 cm. Where will it appear when seen from the other end (from where it is farthest)?
Answer:
From figure, distance OR = 2 cm
∴ Distance OP = 4 cm
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 13
According to sign conventions,
OP = u = -4 cm and CP = R = -3 cm
For refraction at curved surface,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 14

Question 30.
Double-convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if the focal length is to be 20 cm?
Answer:
Given: n = 1.55, f = 20 cm,
R1 = R and R2 = – R
(By sign convention)
To Find: Radius of curvature (R)
Formula: \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=(\mathrm{n}-1)\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}\right)\)
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac {1}{20}\) = (1.55 – 1) \(\left[\frac{1}{R}-\left(-\frac{1}{R}\right)\right]=0.55 \times \frac{2}{R}\)
∴ R = \(\frac {1.10}{1}\) × 20 = 22 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 31.
A dense glass double convex lens (n = 2) designed to reduce spherical aberration has |R1| : |R2| = 1:5. If a point object is kept 15 cm in front of this lens, it produces its real image at 7.5 cm. Determine R1 and R2.
Answer:
Given: |R1| : |R2| = 1 : 5, u = -15 cm,
v = +7.5 cm, n = 2
To Find: Radii of curvature of double convex lens (R1) and (R2)
Formula:
i. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)
ii. \(\frac {1}{f}\) = (n – 1) \(\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}\right)\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{7.5}-\frac{1}{(-15)}=\frac{1}{5}\)
∴ f = +5 cm
Substituting this value in formula (ii), we get,
\(\frac{1}{5}=(2-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)
∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{2}}=\frac{1}{5}\)
By sign conventions,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}_{1}}-\frac{1}{\left(-\mathrm{R}_{2}\right)}=\frac{1}{5}\) ………….. (1)
Also \(\frac{\left|R_{1}\right|}{\left|R_{2}\right|}=\frac{1}{5}\)
∴ |R2| = 5 |R1| …………… (2)
Substituting in equation (1),
∴ \(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{\left(-5 R_{1}\right)}=\frac{1}{5}\)
∴ \(\frac {6}{5R_1}\) = \(\frac {1}{5}\)
∴ R1 = 6 cm
Using in equation (2),
R2 = 5 × 6 = 30 cm

Question 32.
Why are prism preferred for dispersion over two parallel surfaces? Explain its construction in brief.
Answer:
i. In case of two parallel surfaces, for dispersion to be easily detectable, they must be separated over a large distance.
ii. In order to have appreciable and observable dispersion, two parallel surfaces are not useful. In such case we use prisms, in which two refracting surfaces inclined at an angle.
iii. Commonly used prisms have three rectangular surfaces forming a triangle.
iv. Two of which take part in refraction at a time. The one, not involved in refraction is called base of the prism.
v. Any section of prism perpendicular to the base is called principal section of the prism. Commonly all the rays considered during refraction lie in this plane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 15

Question 33.
Draw neat labelled diagrams showing refraction of a monochromatic light and white light through a prism.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 16

Question 34.
For a prism prove that i + e = A + δ where the symbols have their usual meanings.
Answer:
i. Consider a principal section ABC of a prism of absolute refractive index n kept in air as shown in figure.

ii. Let A be the refracting angle of prism and surface BC be the base.

iii. A monochromatic ray PQ obliquely strikes first reflecting surface AB such that, angle of incidence ∠PQM at Q is i.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 17

iv. After refraction at Q, the ray deviates towards the normal and strikes second refracting surface AC at R which is the point of emergence.

v. Angles of refraction at Q (∠NQR) and at R (∠QRN) are r1 and r2 respectively.

vi. After R. the ray deviates away from normal and finally emerges along RS making e as the angle of emergence.

vii. Emergent ray RS meets an extended incident ray QT at X if traced backward. In this case, ∠TXS gives the angle of deviation.

viii. From figure,
∠AQN = ∠ARN = 90°
∴ From quadrilateral AQNR,
A + ∠QNR = 180° ………. (1)
From ∆ QNR,
r1 + r2 + ∠QNR = 180° ………. (2)
∴ A = r1 + r2 ……… (3)

ix. Angle δ forms an exterior angle for ∆ XQR.
∴ ∠XQR + ∠XRQ = δ
∴ (i – r1) + (e – r2) = δ
∴ (i + e) – (r1 + r2) = δ
From equation (3),
δ = i + e – A
∴ i + .e = A + δ

Question 35.
Explain δ versus i curve for refraction of light through a prism.
Answer:
i. Variation of angle of incidence i with angle of deviation δ is as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 18

ii. It shows that, with increasing values of i, the angle of deviation δ decreases initially to a certain minimum (δm) value and then increases.

iii. The curve shown in the figure is not a symmetric parabola, but the slope in the part towards right is less.

iv. Except at δ = δm there are two values of i for any given δ. From principle of reversibility of light, we can conclude that if one of these values is i, the other must be e and vice versa. Thus at δ = δm, we have i = e.

Question 36.
Show that, at condition of minimum deviation, n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{\mathbf{A}+\boldsymbol{\delta}_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathbf{2}}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{\mathbf{A}}{\mathbf{2}}\right)}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 19
i. For every angle of deviation except angle of minimum deviation, there are two values of angle of incidence.

ii. However, at angle of minimum deviation there is only one corressponding angle of incidence.

iii. From principle of reversibility in path PQRS, the values of i and e are interchangeable for every δ. Thus, at minimum deviation, i = e.

iv. This implies the angles of refraction r1 and r2 are also equal. Also, A = r1 + r2
∴ A = 2 r i.e., r = \(\frac {A}{2}\) ……. (1)

v. In case of minimum deviation, QR is parallel to base BC and the figure is symmetric.

vi. Using i + e = A + δ,
i + i = A + δm
∴ i = \(\frac {A+δ_m}{2}\) …………….(2)

vii. According to Snell’s law,
n = \(\frac {sin i}{sin r}\)
Thus, using equations (1) and (2),
n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}+\delta_{\mathrm{m}}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}\right)}\)
This is the prism formula.

Question 37.
For grazing emergence of a ray in a prism, find out minimum possible values for angle of incidence (i) and angle of refraction (r1) for commonly used glass prism.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 20
i. At the point of emergence in prism, the ray travels from a denser medium into rarer.
Thus, if r2 = sin-1 (\(\frac {1}{n}\)) is the critical angle, the angle of emergence e = 90°. This is called grazing emergence.

ii. Angle of prism A is constant for a given prism and A = r1 + r2. Hence the corresponding r1 and i will have their minimum possible values.

iii. For commonly used glass prisms,
n = 1.5 (r2)max = sin-1 (\(\frac {1}{n}\)) = sin-1 (\(\frac {1}{1.5}\)) = 41.49°

iv. If, prism is symmetric (equilateral),
A = 60°
∴ r1 = 60° – 41°49′ = 18°11′
∴ n = 1.5 = \(\frac{\sin \left(\mathrm{i}_{\min }\right)}{\sin \left(18^{\circ} 11^{\prime}\right)}\)
sin (imin) = 1.5 × sin (18°11′)
∴ iimin = 27°55′ ≅ 28°.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 38.
Derive the formula for angle of deviation for thin prisms.
OR
Show that in a thin prism, for small angles of incidence, angle of deviation is constant (independent of angle of incidence).
Answer:
For thin prisms (refracting angle < sin 10°). sin θ ≈ θ
∴ Refractive index, n = \(\frac{\sin \mathrm{i}}{\sin \mathrm{r}_{1}} \approx \frac{\mathrm{i}}{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\)
Also n = \(\frac{\sin e}{\sin \mathrm{r}_{2}} \approx \frac{\mathrm{e}}{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\)
∴ i ≈ n r1 and e ≈ nr2

ii. Substituting this in, i + e = A + δ, we get,
i + e = n (r1 + r2) = nA = A + δ
∴ S = A(n – 1)
A and n are constant for a given prism. Thus, for a thin prism, for small angles of incidence, angle of deviation is constant (independent of angle of incidence).

Question 39.
Give the expression for mean deviation for a beam of white light.
Answer:
For a beam of white light, yellow colour is practically chosen to be the mean colour for violet and red.
This gives mean deviation as,
δVR = \(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}+\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}\) ≈ δY = A(nY – 1)
Where, nY = refractive index for yellow colour.

Question 40.
A fine beam of white light is incident upon the longer side of a plane parallel glass slab of breadth 5 cm at angle of incidence 60°. Calculate lateral deviation of red and violet rays and lateral dispersion between them as they emerge from the opposite side. Refractive indices of the glass for red and violet are 1.51 and 1.53 respectively.
Answer:
As shown in figure,
VM = LV = lateral deviation for violet colour,
RT = LR = lateral deviation for red colour,
∴ Lateral dispersion between these colours, LVR = LV – LR
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 21
∴ rR = sin-1 (0.5735) ≈ 35°
Similarly,
sin rV = \(\frac{\sin 60^{\circ}}{1.53}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2 \times 1.53}=\frac{1.732}{3.06}\)
= antilog {log (1.732) – log (3.06)}
= antilog {0.2385 – 0.4857}
= antilog 11.7528}
= 0.5659
∴ sin rV = 0.566
∴ rV = sin-1 (0.566) = 34°28′
∴ Angle of deviation for red colour
= i – rR = 60° – 35° = 25°
and that for violet colur = i – rV = 60° – 34°28′
= 25°32′
From figure, in ∆ANR,
AR = \(\frac{\mathrm{AN}}{\cos \mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{R}}}=\frac{5}{\cos \left(35^{\circ}\right)}=\frac{5}{0.8192}\) = 6.104 cm
Similarly ∆ANV,
AV = \(\frac{\mathrm{AN}}{\cos \mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{V}}}=\frac{5}{\cos \left(34^{\circ} 28^{\prime}\right)}=\frac{5}{0.8244}\) = 6.065 cm
∴ For red colour, LR = RT = AR [sin(i – rR)]
= AR [sin (25°)]
= 6.104 × 0.4226
= 2.58 cm
For violet colour, LV = VM
= AV [sin (i – rV)]
= AV × sin (25° 32′)
= 6.065 × 0.431
= 2.61 cm
∴ LVR = LV – LR = 2.61 – 2.58 = 0.03 cm
= 0.3 mm

Question 41.
For a glass (n = 1.5) prism having refracting angle 60°, determine the range of angle of incidence for which emergent ray is possible from the opposite surface and the corresponding angles of emergence. Also calculate the angle of incidence for which i = e. How much is the corresponding angle of minimum deviation?
Answer:
For an equilateral prism of glass, the minimum angle of incidence for which the emergent ray just emerges is imin = 27° 55′. Corresponding angle of emergence is, emax = 90°.
From the principle of reversibility of light, imax = 90° and emin = 27°55′
Also, for equilateral glass prism at minimum deviation,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 22
Also, from prism formula,
i + e = A + δ
At minimum deviation,
∴ i + i = 60 + 37°10′ = 97°10′
∴ i = 48°35′

Question 42.
For a dense flint glass prism of refracting angle 10°, obtain angular deviation for extreme colours and dispersive power of dense flint glass. (nred = 1.712, nviolet = 1.792)
Answer:
Given: A = 10°, nR = 1.712, nV = 1.792
To find:
i. Angular deviation for extreme colours (δV and δR)
ii. Dispersive power of flint glass (ω)
Formulae:
i. δ = A(n – 1)
ii. ω = \(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}-\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{\left(\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{V}}+\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{2}\right)}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 23

Question 43.
The refractive indices of the material of the prism for red and yellow colour are 1.620 and 1.635 respectively. Calculate the angular dispersion and dispersive power, if refracting angle is 8°.
Solution:
Given: nR = 1.620, nY = 1.635, A = 8°
To find:
i. Angular dispersion (δV – δR)
ii. Dispersive power (ω)
Formulae:
i. δv – δr = A(nV – nR)
ii. ω = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{V}}-\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{R}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{Y}}-1}\)
Calculation: Since, nY = \(\frac {n_V+n_R}{2}\)
∴ nV = 2nY – nR
nV = 2 × 1.635 – 1.620 = 3.27 – 1.620
∴ nV = 1.65
From formula (i),
δV – δR = 8(1.65 – 1.620)
= 8 × 0.03 = 0.24°
∴ δV – δR = 0.24°
From formula (ii),
ω = \(\frac{1.65-1.620}{1.635-1}=\frac{0.03}{0.635}\) = 0.0472

Question 44.
What could be the possible reasons for the upward bending of the light ray during hot days?
Answer:
Possible reasons for the upward bending at the road could be:
i. Angle of incidence at the road is glancing. At glancing incidence, the reflection coefficient is very large which causes reflection.
ii. Air almost in contact with the road is not steady. The non-uniform motion of the air bends the ray upwards and once it has bent upwards, it continues to do so.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 45.
State some properties of rainbow.
Answer:

  1. It is seen during rains and on the opposite side of the Sun.
  2. It is seen only during mornings and evenings and not throughout the day.
  3. In the commonly seen rainbow red arch is outside and violet is inside.
  4. In the rarely occurring concentric secondary rainbow, violet arch is outside and red is inside.
  5. It is in the form of arc of a circle.
  6. Complete circle can be seen from a higher altitude, i.e. from an aeroplane.
  7. Total internal reflection is not possible in this case.

Question 46.
Why is total internal reflection not possible during formation of a rainbow ?
Answer:
i. For total internal reflection, the angle of incidence in the denser medium must be greater than critical angle for the given pair of media.

ii. The relative refractive index of air with the water drop is just less than 1 and hence the critical angle is almost equal to 90°.

iii. Angle of incidence i in air, at the water drop, can’t be greater than 90°.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 24

iv. As a result, angle of refraction r in water will always be less than the critical angle.

v. The figures shown indicates that this angle r itself acts as an angle of incidence at any point for one or more internal reflections. But this does not indicate the total internal reflection.

Question 47.
Rainbow is seen only for a definite angle range with respect to the ground. Justify.
Answer:
i. For clear visibility of rainbow, a beam must have enough intensity.

ii. The curve for angle of deviation and angle of incidence is almost parallel to X-axis near minimum deviation i.e., for majority of angles of incidence in this range, the angle of deviation is nearly the same and those rays form a beam of enough intensity.

iii. Rays beyond this range suffer wide angular dispersion and thus will not have enough intensity for visibility. Hence, the rainbow is seen only for a definite angle range with respect to the ground for which the intensity of the beam is enough for the visibility.

Question 48.
How is the range of angles for which rainbows can be observed calculated?
Answer:
i. Angle of deviation for the final emergent ray, can be shown to be equal to δ = π + 2i – 4r for primary rainbow and δ = 2π + 2i – 6r for the secondary rainbow.
ii. Using these relations along with Snell’s law, sin i = n sin r, derivatives of angle of deviation (δ) is obtained.
iii. Second derivative of δ comes out to be negative, which shows that it is the minima condition.
iv. Equating first derivative to zero corresponding values of i and r are obtained. Thus, from the figures shown, the corresponding angles θR and θV at the horizontal are obtained. These angles give the visible angular position for the rainbow.

Question 49.
When can one see complete circle of a rainbow? Explain in detail.
Answer:
i. Figure given below illustrates formation of primary and secondary rainbows with their common centre O. It is the point where the line joining the sun and the observer meets the Earth when extended.

ii. P is location of the observer. Different colours of rainbows are seen on arches of cones of respective angles.

iii. Smallest half angle refers to the cone of violet colour of primary rainbow, which is 41°.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 25

iv. As the Sun rises, the relative position of common centre of the rainbows with respect to observer shifts down. Hence as the Sun comes up, smaller and smaller part of the rainbows will be seen. If the Sun is above 41°, violet arch of primary rainbow cannot be seen.

v. Beyond 53°, no rainbows will be visible. That is why rainbows are visible only during mornings and evenings and in the shape of a bow.

vi. However, if observer moves up (may be in an aeroplane), the line PO itself moves up making lower part of the arches visible. After a certain minimum elevation, entire circle for all the cones can be visible.

Question 50.
Define following terms:
i. Longitudinal chromatic aberration
ii. Circle of least confusion
iii. Transverse chromatic aberration
Answer:
i. Longitudinal chromatic aberration:
Due to different refractive indices and angle of deviations, violet and red colours of a white light converge at different focal points, fV and fR. The distance between fV and fR is measured as the longitudinal chromatic aberration.

ii. Circle of least confusion:
In presence of aberration the image is not a single point but always a circle. At particular location on the screen, this circle has minimum diameter. This is called circle of least confusion.

iii. Transverse chromatic aberration:
Radius of the circle of least confusion is called the transverse chromatic aberration.

Question 51.
After Cataract operation, a person is recommended with concavo-convex spectacles of curvatures 10 cm and 50 cm. Crown glass of refractive indices 1.51 for red and 1.53 for violet colours is used for this. Calculate the lateral chromatic aberration occurring due to these glasses.
Answer:
For a concavo-convex lens, with convex shape facing the object, both the radii of curvature are positive as shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 26
= (1.53 – 1) × 0.08 = 0.0424
∴ fv = 23.58 cm
∴ Longitudinal (lateral) chromatic aberration
= fV – fR = 24.51 – 23.58 = 0.93 cm

Question 52.
Why do we need optical instruments for?
Answer:
i. Due to the limitation for focusing the eye lens it is not possible to take an object closer than a certain distance. This distance is called least distance of distance vision D. For a normal, unaided human eye D = 25cm.
ii. If an object is brought closer than this, we cannot see it clearly.
iii. If an object is too small the corresponding visual angle from 25 cm is not enough to see it and if we bring it closer than that, its image on the retina is blurred.
iv. Also, the visual angle made by cosmic objects far away from us such as stars is too small to make out minor details and we cannot bring those closer.
v. In such cases we need optical instruments like microscope and telescopes to observe these things clearly.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 53.
A convex lens has focal length of 2.0 cm. Find its magnifying power if image is formed at DDV.
Answer:
Given: f = 2 cm, v = D = 25 cm
To find: Magnifying power (M.P.)
Formula: M.P = 1 + \(\frac {D}{f}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
M.P = 1 + \(\frac {25}{2}\)
M.P. = 1 + 12.5 = 13.5

Question 54.
A magnifying glass of focal length 10 cm is used to read letters of thickness 0.5 mm held 8 cm away from the lens. Calculate the image size. How big will the letters appear? Can you read the letters if held 5 cm away from the lens? If yes, of what size would the letters appear? If no, why not?
Answer:
Given that, f = +10 cm, u = -8 cm,
From thin lens formula,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)
∴ \(\frac{1}{10}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{-8}\)
∴ v = 40 cm
Magnification of a lens is,
m = \(\frac {v}{u}\) = \(\frac {Object size h-i}{Object size h-0}\)
∴ \(\frac {40}{8}\) = \(\frac {h_1}{0.5}\)
∴ h1 = 2.5 cm
This implies the height of the image is 5 times that of the object.
Magnifying power,
M = \(\frac {D}{u}\) = \(\frac {25}{8}\) = 3.125
∴ Image will appear to be 3.125 times bigger,
i.e., 3.125 × 0.5 = 1.5625 cm
For u = -5 cm, v will be -10 cm
For an average human being to see clearly, the image must be at or beyond 25 cm. Thus it will not possible to read the letters if held 5 cm away from the lens.

Question 55.
A compound microscope has a magnification of 15. If the object subtends an angle of 0.5° to eye, what will be the angle subtended by the image at the eye?
Answer:
Given: M.P = 15, α = 0.5°
To Find: Angle(β)
Formula: M.P = \(\frac {β}{α}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
β = M.P × α = 15 × 0.5 = 7.5°

Question 56.
A compound microscope has a magnifying power of 40. Assume that the final image is formed at DDV(25 cm). If the focal length of eyepiece 10 cm, calculate the magnification produced by objective.
Answer:
M.P = 40, D = 25 cm, fe = 10 cm
To Find: Magnification (m0)
Formula: M.P = m0 × Me
Calculation:
From the formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 27

Question 57.
The pocket microscope used by a student consists of eye lens of focal length 6.25 cm and objective of focal length 2 cm. At microscope length 15 cm, the final image appears biggest. Estimate distance of the object from the objective and magnifying power of the microscope.
Answer:
Given: fe = 6.25 cm, f0 = 2 cm, L = 15 cm
As image appears biggest, Ve = -25 cm.
To find:
i. Distance of object from objective (u0)
ii. Magnifying power (M)
Formula:
i. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}\)
ii. L = |v0| + |ue|
iii. M = \(\left(\frac{v_{o}}{u_{o}}\right)\left(\frac{D}{u_{e}}\right)\)
Calculation: For eyelens, using formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 28
∴ ue = 5 cm
From formula (ii),
|v0| = L – |ue|
= 15 – 5 = 10 cm
Using formula (i) for objective,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 29

Question 58.
Focal length of the objective of an astronomical telescope is 1 m. Under normal adjustment, length of the telescope is 1.05 m. Calculate focal length of the eyepiece and magnifying power under normal adjustment.
Answer:
Given: f0 = 1 m, L = 1.05 m
To find:
i. Focal length of eyepiece (fe)
Magnifying power under normal adjustment (M)
Formula:
i. L = f0 + fe
ii. M = \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)
Calculation. From formula (i),
fe = L – f0 = 1.05 – 1 = 0.05 m
From formula (ii),
M = \(\frac {1}{0.05}\) = 20

Question 59.
Magnifying power of an astronomical telescope is 12 and the image is formed at D.D.V. If the focal length of the objective is 90 cm, what is the focal length of the eyepiece?
Answer:
Given: M.P = 12, v = D, f0 = 90 cm,
To find: Focal length of eye piece (fe)
Formula: M.P = \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\) (1 + \(\frac {f_e}{D}\))
Calculation:
From formula.
12 = \(\frac {90}{f_e}\) (1 + \(\frac {f_e}{25}\))
∴ fe = 10.71 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 60.
Two convex lenses of an astronomical telescope have focal length 1.3 m and 0.05 m respectively. Find the magnifying power and the length of the telescope.
Answer:
Given: f0 = 1.3 m, fe = 0.05 m
To find:
i. Magnifying power of telescope (M.P.)
ii. Length of telescope (L)
Formulae:
i. M.P = \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)
ii. L = f0 + fe
Calculation: From formula (i),
M.P = \(\frac {1.3}{0.05}\) = 26
From formula (ii),
L = 1.3 + 0.05 = 1.35 m

Question 61.
What is the angle of deviation of reflected ray if ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an incident angle θ?
Answer: When a ray of light is incident on a plane mirror at an angle θ, the reflected ray gets deviated by an angle of (π – 2θ).

Question 62.
Does nature of the image depend upon size of the mirror?
Answer:
No, nature of the image is independent of size of the mirror.

Question 63.
If a convex mirror is held in air and then dipped in oil, then what will be the change in its focal length?
Answer:
Focal length of spherical mirrors are independent of the medium.

Question 64.
When ray of light falls normally on a mirror, its angle of incidence is 90°. True or false? Justify your answer.
Answer:
False, when light falls normally on a mirror, its angle of incidence is zero degree.

Question 65.
In one of the performances, a magician keeps a gold ring beneath a thick glass slab (µ = \(\frac {3}{2}\)) Then he keeps a flask filled with water (µ = \(\frac {4}{3}\)), over the slab. Now when spectators one by one observe from the open end of the flask, the ring disappears at a certain angle of viewing.
i. What could be the reason behind the disappearance?
ii. At what angle of viewing the ring vanishes?
Answer:
i. The ring disappears due to total internal reflection of the light at water-air interface.

ii. aµw = \(\frac {4}{3}\)
sin ic = \(\frac {1}{µ}\)
∴ ic = sin-1 (\(\frac {1}{_aµ_w}\)) = sin-1 (\(\frac {3}{4}\)) = 48.6°
Hence, for angle of viewing for which angle of incidence of ring from water to air is greater that 48.6°, the ring will vanish.

Question 66.
Why dispersion of light is not observed in glass slab but it is observed in prism?
Answer:
When a light passes from one medium to another, at one interface, it changes its speed. The glass slab and prism both have two glass-air interfaces. Hence, the light undergoes refraction twice in both the cases. When the two interfaces are parallel to each other, although the colours are separated at first interface, they all travel the same path after refracting from second interface. However, in prism, the two interfaces are not parallel. Therefore, the colours separated at first interface do not travel the same path after second refraction but emerge out at different wavelengths producing spectrum.

Question 67.
A prism manufacturer is planning to build a dispersive prism out of following materials with the refracting angles as given.
i. Glass (µ = 1.5), A = 60°
ii. Plastic (µ = 1.4), A = 90°
iii. Fluorite (µ = 1.45), A = 64°
If he desires to give the prism following relations of i and δ, then which of the above combinations can be used to construct the prism?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 30
Answer:
From the given values of i and δ, δm = 37°
From prism formula, µ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}+\delta_{\mathrm{m}}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}\right)}\)

i. For Glass (µ = 1.5), A = 60°;
µ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}+37^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(30^{\circ}\right)}\)
= 1.5
Hence, this combination can be used for fabricating the desired prism.

ii. For Plastic (µ = 1.4), A = 90°;
µ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{90^{\circ}+37^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(45^{\circ}\right)}\)
= 1.26
As Ppiastic = 1-4, this combination cannot be used.

iii. For Fluorite (µ = 1.45), A = 64°
µ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{64^{\circ}+37^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(32^{\circ}\right)}\)
= 1.45
Hence, this combination can also be used for fabrication of prism.

Question 68.
Find the refractive index of material of following prism if the ray of light incident at angle 45° suffers minimum deviation through the prism.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 31
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics 32
A = 60°
Also, ray of light suffers minimum deviation.
∴ 2i = A + δm
∴ δm = 2i – A = 90° – 60° = 30°
From prism formula,
µ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}+\delta_{\mathrm{m}}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}+30^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(30^{\circ}\right)}\)
= √2
Hence, refractive index of material of prism is √2.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Time taken by light to cross a glass slab of thickness 4 mm and refractive index 3 is
(A) 4 × 10-11 s
(B) 2 × 10-11 ns
(C) 16 × 10-11 s
(D) 8 × 10-10 s
Answer:
(A) 4 × 10-11 s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 2.
If mirrors are inclined to each other at an angle of 90°, the total number of images seen for a symmetric position of an object will be
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 3 or 4
Answer:
(A) 3

Question 3.
In case of a convex mirror, the image formed is
(A) always on opposite side, virtual, erect.
(B) always on the same side, virtual, erect.
(C) always on opposite side, real, inverted.
(D) dependent on object distance.
Answer:
(A) always on opposite side, virtual, erect.

Question 4.
A glass slab is placed in the path of a beam of convergent light. The point of convergence of light
(A) moves towards the glass slab.
(B) moves away from the glass slab.
(C) remains at the same point.
(D) undergoes a lateral shift.
Answer:
(A) moves towards the glass slab.

Question 5.
For a person seeing an object placed in optically rarer medium,
(A) apparent depth of the object is more than real depth
(B) apparent depth is smaller than the real depth.
(C) apparent depthe might be smaller or greater depending on the position of the person.
(D) nothing can be concluded about the depth of object from given data.
Answer:
(A) apparent depth of the object is more than real depth

Question 6.
Light travels from a medium of refractive index µ1 to another of refractive index µ21 > µ2). For total internal reflection of light, which is NOT true?
(A) Light must travel from medium of refractive index µ1 to µ2.
(B) Angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.
(C) There is no refraction of light.
(D) Light must travel from the medium of refractive index µ2 to µ1.
Answer:
(D) Light must travel from the medium of refractive index µ2 to µ1.

Question 7.
Optical fibre is based on which of the following phenomenon?
(A) Reflection.
(B) Refraction.
(C) Total internal reflection.
(D) Dispersion.
Answer:
(C) Total internal reflection.

Question 8.
Commonly used glass have refractive index of 1.5. What is the critical angle for such glass?
(A) 49°
(B) 42°
(C) 45°
(D) 40°
Answer:
(B) 42°

Question 9.
If the refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass slab is 5/3. Then the critical angle of incidence for which a light ray tending to go from glass to water is totally reflected, is
(A) sin-1 (\(\frac {3}{4}\))
(B) sin-1 (\(\frac {3}{5}\))
(C) sin-1 (\(\frac {2}{3}\))
(D) sin-1 (\(\frac {4}{5}\))
Answer:
(D) sin-1 (\(\frac {4}{5}\))

Question 10.
While deriving prism formula, which of the following condition is NOT satisfied?
(A) I = e
(B) r1 = r2
(C) r = \(\frac {A}{2}\)
(D) δm = i + e + r
Answer:
(D) δm = i + e + r

Question 11.
If the critical angle for the material of a prism is C and the angle of the prism is A, then there will be no emergent ray when
(A) A < 2 C
(B) A = 2 C
(C) A > 2 C
(D) A < \(\frac {C}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) A > 2 C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 9 Optics

Question 12.
Chromatic aberrations is caused due to
(A) spherical shape of lens
(B) spherical shape of mirrors
(C) angle of deviation for violet light being more than that for red light.
(D) refractive index for violet light being less than that for red light
Answer:
(C) angle of deviation for violet light being more than that for red light.

Question 13.
In normal adjustment, magnifying powser of a astronomical telescope is given by
(A) \(\frac {D}{f_0}\) \(\frac {L}{f_e}\)
(B) \(\frac {L}{D}\) \(\frac {f_e}{f_0}\)
(C) \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)
(D) \(\frac {f_e}{f_0}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac {f_0}{f_e}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 1.
State the different types of waves.
Answer:

  1. Waves that require a material medium for their propagation are called mechanical waves. Example: Sound waves, string waves, seismic waves, etc.
  2. Waves that do not require a material medium for their propagation are called electromagnetic waves. Example: Light waves, radio waves, y-rays, etc.
  3. The wave associated with any object when it is in motion is called a matter-wave.
  4. Waves in which a disturbance created at one place travel to distant points and keeps travelling unless stopped by an external force are known as travelling or progressive waves.
  5. Waves are also of stationary type.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 2.
Define the following terms. Give their SI units.
i. Period
ii. Frequency
iii. Velocity
Answer:
i. Period (T):
The time taken by the particle of a medium to complete one vibration is called period of the wave.
SI unit: second (s)

ii. Frequency (n):
The number of vibrations performed by a particle per second is called frequency of a wave.
SI unit: hertz (Hz)

iii. Velocity (v):
The distance covered by a wave per unit time is called the velocity of the wave.
SI unit: m/s

Question 3.
State the properties that should be possessed by a medium for a mechanical wave to propagate through it.
Answer:

  1. The medium must be continuous and elastic so that it can regain its original state as soon as the deforming forces are removed.
  2. The medium should possess inertia. It must be capable of storing energy and transferring it in the form of waves.
  3. The frictional resistance of the medium should be negligible to avoid damped oscillations.

Question 4.
What are two types of progressive waves? State two characteristics of progressive waves.
Answer:
Progressive waves are classified into two types:
a. Transverse progressive waves
b. Longitudinal progressive waves.

Characteristics of progressive waves:
1. All the vibrating particles of medium have same amplitude, period and frequency.
2.. State of oscillation i.e., phase changes from particle to particle.

Question 5.
A violin string emits sound of frequency 510 Hz. How far will the sound waves reach when string completes 250 vibrations? The velocity of sound is 340 m/s.
Answer:
Given: n = 510 Hz, v = 340 m/s,
number of vibrations = 250
To find: Distance
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
λ = \(\frac {v}{n}\) = \(\frac {340}{510}\) = \(\frac {2}{3}\) m
Distance covered in 1 vibration = \(\frac {2}{3}\) m
∴ Distance covered in 250 vibration
= \(\frac {2}{3}\) × 250 = 166.7 m 3
Answer: The distance covered by sound waves is 166.7 m

Question 6.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s and that in glass is 4500 m/s. What is the ratio of the wavelength of sound of a given frequency in the two media?
Answer:
Given: vair = 330 m/s, vglass = 4500 m/s
To find: \(\frac {λ_{air}}{λ_{glass}}\)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation: From formula,
vair = n λair
vglass = n λglass
∴ \(\frac {λ_{air}}{λ_{glass}}\) = \(\frac {v_{air}}{v_{glass}}\) = \(\frac {330}{4500}\) = 7.33 × 10-2

Question 7.
The velocity of sound in gas is 498 m/s and in air is 332 m/s. What is the ratio of wavelength of sound waves in gas to air?
Answer:
vg = 498 m/s, va = 332 m/s
To find: Ratio of wavelengths (\(\frac {λ_g}{λ_a}\))
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
Frequency of sound wave remains same.
From formula,
For gas λg = \(\frac {v_g}{n}\) and for air λag = \(\frac {v_a}{n}\)
∴ \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {498}{332}\) = \(\frac {3}{2}\)
∴ \(\frac {v_g}{v_a}\) = 3 : 2

Question 8.
A human ear responds to sound waves of frequencies in the range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. What are the corresponding wavelengths, if the speed of sound in air is 330 m/s? Answer:
Given: v1 = vg = 330 m/s, n1 = 20 Hz,
n2 = 20 kHz = 20 × 10³ Hz
To find: Wavelength (λ1 and λ2)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
λ1 = \(\frac {v_1}{n_1}\) = \(\frac {330}{20}\) = 16.5 m
λ2 = \(\frac {v_2}{n_2}\) = \(\frac {330}{20×10^3}\) = 16.5 × 10-3 = 0.0165 m

Question 9.
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz in air. If the sound meets a water surface, what is the wavelength of (i) the reflected sound, (ii) the transmitted sound? Speed of sound in air is 340 m s-1 and in water is 1486 m s-1
Answer:
Given: n = 1000 kHz = 106 Hz,
va = 340 m/s,
vw = 1486 m/s
To find: Reflected wavelength (λR),
Transmitted wavelength (λT),
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
In different medium, frequency of sound wave remains same.
From formula,
Sound is reflected in air,
i. ∴ λR = \(\frac {v_a}{n}\) = \(\frac {330}{10^6}\) = 3.4 × 10-4 m
Sound is transmitted in water,
ii. ∴ λT = \(\frac {v_w}{n}\) = \(\frac {1486}{10^6}\) = 1.486 × 10-3 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 10.
The wavelength of a sound note is 1 m in air and 2.5 m in a liquid. Find the speed of sound in the liquid, if the speed of the sound in air is 330 m/s.
Answer:
Given: λa = 1 m, λl = 2.5 m, va = 330 m/s,
To find: Speed of sound (vl)
Formula: v = nλ
Calculation:
From formula,
Since the frequency n remains the same,
va = nλa and vl = nλl
∴ \(\frac {v_l}{v_a}\) = \(\frac {λ_l}{λ_a}\)
∴ vl = va \(\frac {λ_l}{λ_a}\) = 330 × \(\frac {2.5}{1}\) = 825 m/s

Question 11.
Define a polarised wave.
Answer:
A wave in which the vibrations of all the particles along the path of a wave are constrained to a single plane is called a polarised wave.

Question 12.
Write down the main characteristics of longitudinal waves.
Answer:
Characteristics of longitudinal waves:

  1. All the particles of medium in the path of wave vibrate in a direction parallel to the direction of propagation of wave with same period and amplitude.
  2. When longitudinal wave passes through a medium, the medium is divided into alternate compressions (high pressure zone) and rarefactions (low pressure zone).
  3. A compression and adjacent rarefaction form one cycle of a longitudinal wave. The distance between any two consecutive points having same phase (successive compression or rarefactions) is called wavelength of the wave.
  4. For propagation of longitudinal waves, the medium should possess the property of elasticity of volume (bulk modulus). Thus, longitudinal waves can travel through solids, liquids and gases. Longitudinal wave cannot travel through vacuum or empty space.
  5. The compressions and rarefactions advance in the medium and are responsible for transfer of energy.
  6. When longitudinal wave advances through medium, there is periodic variations in pressure and density along the path of wave and with time.
  7. Since the direction of vibration of particles and direction of propagation of wave are same or parallel, longitudinal waves cannot be polarised.

Question 13.
State the mathematical expression for a transverse progressive wave travelling along the positive and negative x-axis.
Answer:
i. Consider a transverse progressive wave whose particle position is described by x and displacement from equilibrium position is described by y.
Such a sinusoidal wave can be written as follows:
∴ y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + ø) ……… (1)
where a, k, ω and ø are constants,
y (x, t) = displacement as a function of position (x) and time (t)
a = amplitude of the wave,
ω = angular frequency of the wave
(kx0 – ωt + ø) = argument of the sinusoidal wave and is the phase of the particle at x at time t.

ii. At a particular instant, t = t0,
y (x, t0) = a sin (kx – ωt0 + ø)
= a sin (kx + constant)
Thus at t = t0, shape of wave as a function of x is a sine wave.

iii. At a fixed location x = x0
y(x0, t) = a sin (kx0 – ωt + ø)
= a sin (constant – ωt)
Hence the displacement y, at x = x0 varies as a sine function.

iv. This means that the particles of the medium, through which the wave travels, execute simple harmonic motion around their equilibrium position.

v. For (kx – ωt + ø) to remain constant, x must increase in the positive direction as time t increases. Thus, the equation (1) represents a wave travelling along the positive x axis.

vi. Similarly, a wave travelling in the direction of the negative x axis is represented by,
y(x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt +ø) …….(2)

Question 14.
Explain the Laplace’s correction to the Newton’s formula for the velocity of sound in air.
Answer:
Laplace’s correction:
Laplace suggested that the compression or rarefaction takes place too rapidly. Heat produced during compression and lost during rarefaction does not get sufficient time for dissipation. Due to this, the whole heat content remains same. Thus, it is an adiabatic process.

According to Laplace, E is the adiabatic modulus of elasticity of air medium which is given by,
E = γP ….(1)
where P = pressure of the air medium γ = ratio of specific heat of air at constant pressure (cp) and specific heat of air at constant volume (cv). i.e., γ = cp/cv.

iii. Using equation, v = \(\sqrt{\frac {E}{ρ}}\), we have velocity of sound in air,
v = \(\sqrt{\frac {γP}{ρ}}\), …. [From equation (1)]
For air, γ = 1.41
At NTP, P = 0.76 × 13600 × 9.8 N/m²
ρ = 1.293 kg/m³.
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\frac {1.41×0.76×13600×9.8}{1.293}}\) = 332.35 m/s
This value is in close agreement with the experimental value.

Question 15.
What is the effect of temperature on the velocity of sound in air?
Answer:
Effect of temperature on velocity of sound:
i. Let v0 and v be the velocity of sound in air at T0 and T Kelvin respectively. Let ρ0 and p be the densities of gas at temperature T0 and T respectively.

ii. Considering the number of moles n = 1 for the gas, we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 1

iii. From above formula, we can conclude that velocity of sound in air increases with increase in temperature.

Question 16.
Show that for 1 °C rise in temperature, the velocity of sound in air increases by 0.61 m/s.
Answer:
Let v0 = velocity of sound at 0 °C or 273 K
v = velocity of sound at t °C or (273 + 1) K
we have, v ∝ √T
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 2
Hence, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s when temperature increases by 1 °C.

Question 17.
Suppose you are listening to an out-door live concert sitting at a distance of 150 m from the speakers. Your friend is listening to the live broadcast of the concert in another country and the radio signal has to travel 3000 km to reach him. Who will hear the music first and what will be the time difference between the two? Velocity of light = 3 × 108 m/s and that of sound is 330 m/s.
Answer:
Distance between me and the speakers
(s1) = 150 m, distance radio signal has to travel (S2) = 3000 km, vsound 330 m/s, vlight = 3 × 108 m/s
Time taken by sound to reach me,
= \(\frac {s_1}{v_sound}\) = \(\frac {150}{330}\) = 0.4546 s
Time taken by the broadcasted sound (done by
EM waves = \(\frac {s_2}{v_light}\) = \(\frac {3000km}{30×10^5km/s}\) = \(\frac {3×1^30}{3×10^5}\) = 10-2 s
∴My friend will hear the sound first.
The time difference will be = 0.4546 – 0.01
= 0.4446 s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 18.
Consider a closed box of rigid walls so that the density’ of the air inside it is constant. On heating, the pressure of this enclosed air is increased from P0 to P. It is now observed that sound travels 1.5 times faster than at pressure P0. Calculate P/P0.
Answer:
Given: vP = 1.5 vP0
To find: Ratio of pressure (\(\frac {p}{p_0}\))
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 3

Question 19.
The densities of nitrogen and oxygen at NTP are 1.25 kg/m³ and 1.43 kg/m³ respectively. If the speed of sound in oxygen at NTP is 320 m/s, calculate the speed in nitrogen, under the same conditions of temperature and pressure, (γ for both the gases is 1.4)
Answer:
Given: ρN = 1.25 kg/m³, ρ = 1.43 kg/m³,
v0 = 320 m/s,
To find: Speed in nitrogen (vN)
Formula: v = (\(\sqrt{\frac {γP}{ρ}}\) )
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 4

Question 20.
Find the temperature at which the velocity of sound in air will be 1.5 times its velocity at 0 °C
Answer:
Given: \(\frac {p}{p_0}\) = 1.5, T0 = 0 °C = 273 K
To find: Temperature (T)
Formula: \(\frac {v}{v_0}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{T_0}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
\(\frac {T}{T_0}\) = (\(\frac {v}{v_0}\))²
∴ T = T0 (\(\frac {v}{v_0}\))²
∴ T = 273 (1.5)² = 614.25 K = 341.25 °C

Question 21.
The velocity of sound in air at 27 °C is 340 m/s. Calculate the velocity of sound in air at 127 °C.
Answer:
Given: T1 = 27 °C = 27 + 273 = 300 K,
v1 = 340 m/s,
T2 = 127 °C = 127 + 273 = 400 K
To find: Velocity (v2)
Formula: \(\frac {v_1}{v_2}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac {T_1}{T_2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
v2 = v1 \(\sqrt{\frac {T_2}{T_1}}\) = 340, \(\sqrt{\frac {400}{300}}\)
= 340 × 1.1547
∴ v2 = 392.6 m/s

Question 22.
The wavelength of a note is 27 m in air when the temperature is 27 °C. What is the wavelength when the temperature is increased to 37 °C?
Answer:
Given: λ1 = 27 m,
T1 = 27 °C = 273 + 27 = 300 K,
T2 = 37 °C = 273 + 37 = 310 K
To find: Wavelength (λ2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 5

Question 23.
We cannot hear an echo at every place. Give reason.
Answer:

  1. Echo of sound depends upon the temperature of the surrounding and distance between source and reflecting surface.
  2. To hear a distinct echo at 22 °C, the minimum distance required between the source of sound and reflecting surface should be 17.2 metre.
  3. The velocity of sound depends on the temperature of air. Thus, the minimum distance will change with temperature. Hence, we cannot hear an echo at every place.

Question 24.
Write a short note on reverberation.
Answer:

  1. Reverberation is the phenomenon in which sound waves are reflected multiple times causing a single sound to be heard more than once.
  2. Sound wave gets reflected multiple times if the distance between reflecting surface and source of sound is less than 15 m.
  3. During reverberation, the time interval between the successive reflections of a sound is small.
  4. As a result, the reflected sound waves overlap and produce a continuously increasing loud sound which is at times difficult to understand. Measures to decrease reverberation:
  5. Reverberation can be decreased by making the walls and roofs rough and by using curtains in the hall to avoid reflection of sound.
  6. Chairs and wall surfaces should be covered with sound absorbing materials.
  7. Porous cardboard sheets, perforated acoustic tiles, gypsum boards, thick curtains etc. should be used on the ceilings and walls.

Question 25.
Define acoustics.
Answer:
The branch of physics which deals with the study of production, transmission and reception of sound is called acoustics.

Question 26.
State the conditions that must be satisfied for proper acoustics in an auditorium along-with their remedies.
Answer:
i. Acoustics of an auditorium should be such that the sound is heard sufficiently loudly at all the points in the auditorium. The surface behind the speaker should be parabolic with the speaker at its focus for uniform distribution of sound in the auditorium. Reflection of sound helps to maintain good loudness through the entire auditorium.

ii. Echoes and reverberations should be reduced. More absorptive reflecting surfaces and full auditoriums help in reducing echoes.

iii. Unnecessary focusing of sound, poor audibility zone or region of silence should be avoided. Curved surface of the wall or ceiling should be avoided for this purpose.

iv. Echelon effect which arises due to the mixing of sound produced in the hall by the echoes of sound produced in front of regular structure like stairs should be reduced. Stair type construction in the hall must be avoided for this purpose.

v. To avoid outside stray sound from entering, the auditorium should be sound-proof when closed.

vi. Inside fittings, seats, etc. should not produce any sound for proper acoustics. Air conditioners instead of fans and soft action door closers should be used.

Question 27.
State the applications of acoustics observed in nature.
Answer:
Application of acoustics in nature:
i. Bats apply the principle of acoustics to locate objects. They emit short ultrasonic pulses of frequency 30 kHz to 150 kHz. The resulting echoes give them information about location of the obstacle. This helps the bats to fly in even in total darkness of caves.

ii. Dolphins navigate underwater with the help of an analogous system. They emit subsonic frequencies which can be about 100 Hz. They can sense an object about 1.4 m or larger.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 28.
State the medical applications of acoustics.
Answer:
i. High pressure and high amplitude shock waves are used to split kidney stones into smaller pieces without invasive surgery. A reflector or acoustic lens is used to focus a produced shock wave so that as much of its energy as possible converges on the stone. The resulting stresses in the stone causes the stone to break into small pieces which can then be removed easily.

ii. Ultrasonic imaging uses reflection of ultrasonic waves from regions in the interior of body. It is used for prenatal (before the birth) examination, detection of anomalous conditions like tumour etc. and the study of heart valve action.

iii. Ultrasound at a very high-power level, destroys selective pathological tissues which is helpful in treatment of arthritis and certain type of cancer.

Question 29.
State the underwater applications of acoustics.
Answer:

  1. SONAR (Sound Navigational Ranging) is a technique for locating objects underwater by transmitting a pulse of ultrasonic sound and detecting the reflected pulse.
  2. The time delay between transmission of a pulse and the reception of reflected pulse indicates the depth of the object.
  3. Motion and position of submerged objects like submarine can be measured with the help of this system.

Question 30.
State the applications of acoustics in environmental and geological studies.
Answer:
i. Acoustic principle has important application to environmental problems like noise control. The quiet mass transit vehicle is designed by studying the generation and propagation of sound in the motor’s wheels and supporting structures.

ii. Reflected and refracted elastic waves passing through the Earth’s interior can be measured by applying the principles of acoustics.

iii. This is useful in studying the properties of the Earth. Principles of acoustics are applied to detect local anomalies like oil deposits etc. making it useful for geological studies.

Question 31.
A man shouts loudly close to a high wall. He hears an echo. If the man is at 40 m from the wall, how long after the shout will the echo be heard? (speed of sound in air = 330 m/s)
Answer:
Given s = 40m, v = 330 m/s
To Find: time (t)
Formula: Time = distance \(\frac {distence}{speed}\)
Calculation:
The distance travelled by the sound wave
= 2 × distance from man to wall.
= 2 × 40 = 80 m.
From formula,
∴ Time taken to travel the distance
\(\frac {distence}{speed}\) = \(\frac {80}{30}\) = 0.24 s

Question 32.
Write a short note on pitch of sound note.
Answer:

  1. Pitch refers to the sharpness or shrillness of sound.
  2. Increase in frequency of sound results in increase in the pitch and the sound is said to be sharper.
  3. Tone refers to a single frequency of a wave.
  4. A note may contain single or multiple tones.
  5. High frequency is generally referred as high pitch or high tone.
  6. Generally, speech of the men is of low pitch (shrill) and that of the women is of high pitch (sharp). Tones of an acoustic guitar are sharper than that of a base guitar. Sound of table is sharper than that of a dagga.

Question 33.
Write a short note on quality (timbre) of sound note.
Answer:
i. Timbre of a sound refers to the quality of the sound which depends upon the mixture of tones and overtones in the sound. Same sound played on different musical instruments feels significantly different and the musical instrument from which the sound generated can be easily identified.

Question 34.
Write a short note on loudness of sound.
OR
Explain how loudness affects the characteristics of sound.
Answer:
Loudness:
i. Loudness depends upon the intensity of vibration.

ii. Intensity of a wave is proportional to square of the amplitude (I ∝ A²) and is measured in the (SI) unit ofW/m²

iii. The human response to intensity is not linear, i.e., a sound of double intensity is louder but not doubly loud.

iv. Under ideal conditions, for a perfectly healthy human ear, the least audible intensity is I0 = 10-12 W/m².

v. Loudness of a sound of intensity I (measured in unit bel) is given by,
L2 = log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) ………….. (1)

vi. Decibel is the commonly used unit for loudness.

vii. As, 1 decibel or 1 dB = 0.1 bel.
∴ 1 bel = 10 dB. Thus, loudness in dB is 10 times loudness in bel.
∴ LdB = 10Lbel = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
For sound of least audible intensity I0
LdB = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I_0}{I_0}\)) = 10 log10 (1) = 0 ………… (2)
This corresponds to threshold of hearing.

viii. For sound of 10 dB,
10 = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
∴ (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10 1 or I = 10 I0
For sound of 20 dB,
20 = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
= (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10² or I = 100 I0 and so on.

ix. This implies, loudness of 20 dB sound is felt double that of 10 dB, but its intensity is 10 times that of the 10 dB sound. Similarly, 40 dB sound is left twice as loud as 20 dB sound but its intensity is 100 times as that of 20 dB sound and 10000 times that of 10 dB sound. This is the power of logarithmic or exponential scale. If we move away from a (practically) point source, the intensity of its sound varies inversely with square of the distance, i.e., I ∝ \(\frac {1}{r^2}\).

Question 35.
When heard independently, two sound waves produce sensations of 60 dB and 55 dB respectively. How much will the sensation be if those are sounded together, perfectly in phase?
Answer:
L1 = 60 dB = 10 log10 \(\frac {I_1}{I_0}\)
∴ \(\frac {I_1}{I_0}\) = 106
∴ I1 = 106I0
Similarly, I2 = 105.5 I0
As the waves combine perfectly in phase, the vector addition of their amplitudes will be given by A² = (A1 + A2)² = A\(_1^2\) + A\(_2^2\) + 2A1, A2 As intensity is proportional to square of the amplitude.
∴ I = I1 + I2 + 2\(\sqrt {I_1I_2}\) = 105 I0 (101 +100.5 + 2\(\sqrt {10^{1.5}}\))
= 105I0(10 + 3.1623 +2 × 100.75)
= 24.41 × 105I0 = 2.441 × 106I0
∴ L = 10 log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\)) = 10 log10 (2.441 × 106)
= 10[log10 (2.441) + log10(106)]
= 10(0.3876 + 6)
L = 63.876 dB ~ 64 dB

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 36.
The noise level in a class-room in absence of the teacher is 50 dB when 50 students are present. Assuming that on the average each student outputs same sound energy per second, what will be the noise level if the number of students is increases to 100?
Answer:
Loudness of sound is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 6
∴ LB – LA = 0.301 × 10 = 3.01
∴ LB = LA + 3.01 = 53.01 dB

Question 37.
Calculate the decibel increase if there is a two-fold increase in the intensity of a wave. (Given: log10 2 = 0.3010)
Answer:
L = 10 log10 \(\frac {I}{I_0}\) decibel
L’ = 10 log10 \(\frac {2I}{I_0}\) decibel
L’ – L = 10 (log10 \(\frac {2I}{I_0}\) – log10 (\(\frac {I}{I_0}\))
= 10 log10 2
= 10 × 0.3010
∴ L’ – L = 3.01 dB

Question 38.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when listener is stationary and source is moving away from the listener.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 7
i. Consider a source of sound S moving away from a stationary listener L with velocity vs. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive). The listener uses a detector for counting each wave crest that reaches it.

ii. Let at t = 0, the source at point Si which is at a distance d from the listener, emit a crest. This crest reaches the listener at time t1, given as, t1 = d/v. …………(1)

iii. Let T0 be the time period at which the waves are emitted.
At t = T0, distance travelled by the source away from the stationary listener to reach point S2 = vsT0.
∴ Distance of point S2 from the listener = d + vsT0.
At S2, The source emits second crest. This crest reaches the listener at t2, given as,
t2 = T0 + (\(\frac {d+v_sT_0}{v}\)) …………. (2)

iv. Similarly, the time taken by the (p+1)th crest (where, p is an integer, p = 1, 2, 3,…), emitted by the source at time pT0, to reach the listener is given as,
tp+1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d+pv_sT_0}{v}\)) …………. (3)
∴ the listener’s detector counts p crests in the time interval,
tp+1 – t1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d+pv_sT_0}{v}\)) – \(\frac {d}{v}\)
The period of wave as recorded by the listener is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 8

Where, n = frequency recorded by the listener (apparent frequency)
n0 = frequency emitted by the source (actual frequency).
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the listener is stationary and the source is moving away from the listener.

Question 39.
Derive an expression for apparent frequency when listener is stationary and source is moving towards the listener.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 9
i. Consider a source of sound S moving towards a stationary listener L with velocity vs. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive). The listener use a detector for counting each wave crest that reaches it.

ii. Let at t = 0, the source at point S1 which is at a distance d from the listener, emit a Crest. This crest reaches the listener at time t1, given as,
∴ t1 = d/v. ……….(1)

iii. Let T0 be the time period at which the waves are emitted.
At t = T0, distance travelled by the source away from the stationary listener to reach point S2 = vsT0.
Distance of S2 from the listener = d – vsT0.
At S2, The source emits second crest. This crest reaches the listener at
t2 = T0 + (\(\frac {d-v_sT_0}{v}\)) ………….. (2)

iv. Similarly, the time taken by the (p+1)th crest (where, p = 1,2,3,…), emitted by the source at time pT0, to reach the listener is given as,
tp+1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d-pv_sT_0}{v}\)) ……………. (3)
∴ the listener’s detector counts p crests in the time interval,
tp+1 – t1 = pT0 + (\(\frac {d-pv_sT_0}{v}\)) – \(\frac {d}{v}\)
∴ the period of wave as recorded by the listener is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 10
Where, n = frequency recorded by the listener (apparent frequency)
n0 = frequency emitted by the source (actual frequency).
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the listener is stationary and the source is moving towards the listener.

Question 40.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving towards the source.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 11
i. Consider a listener approaching a stationary source S with velocity vL as shown in figure. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be v (always positive).

ii. Let at time t = 0, the source emits the first wave when the listener L1 is at an initial distance d from the source.
At time t = t1 the listener receives the first wave at the position L2.
Distance travelled by the listener towards the stationary source during time t1 = vLt1.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t1 = d – vLt1
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance, t1 = \(\frac {d-v_Lt_1}{v}\)
∴ t1 = \(\frac {d}{v+v_L}\) ………….. (1)

iii. Let at time t = T0 (time period of the waves emitted by the source), the source emits a second wave.
At t = t2, the listener receives the second wave. Distance travelled by the listener towards the stationary source during time t2 = vLt2.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t2 = d – vLt2
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance = \(\frac {d-v_Lt_2}{v}\)
However, this time should be counted after T0, as the second wave was emitted at t = T0.
∴ t2 = T0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_2}{v}\)
∴ t2 = \(\frac {vT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (2)

iv. Similarly, for the third wave, we get,
t3 = 2T0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_3}{v}\)
∴ t3 = \(\frac {2vT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (3)

v. Extending this argument to the (p + 1)th wave, we get,
tp+1 = pT0 + \(\frac {d-v_Lt_{p+1}}{v}\)
∴ tp+1 = \(\frac {pvT_0+d}{v+v_L}\) …………. (4)

vi. The observed or recorded period T is the time duration between instances of receiving successive waves.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 12
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving towards the source.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 41.
Derive the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving away from the source.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 13
i. Consider a listener moving away a stationary source S with velocity VL. Let the speed of sound with respect to the medium be y (always positive).

ii. Let at time t = 0, the source emits the first wave when the listener L1 is at an initial distance d from the source.
At time t = t1 the listener receives the first wave at the position L2.
Distance travelled by the listener away from the stationary source during time t1 = vLt1.
Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t1 = d + vLt1
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance,
t1 = \(\frac {d+v_Lt_1}{v}\)
∴ t1 = \(\frac {d}{v-v_L}\) ………….. (1)

iii. Let at time t = T0 (time period of the waves emitted by the source), the source emits a second wave.
At t = t2, the listener receives the second wave. Distance travelled by the listener away from the stationary source during time t2 = vLt2.
∴ Distance travelled by the sound wave during time t2 = d + vLt2.
∴ time taken by the sound wave to travel this distance = \(\frac {d+v_Lt_2}{v}\)
However, this time should be counted after T0, as the second wave was emitted at t = T0.
∴ t2 = T0 \(\frac {d+v_Lt_2}{v}\) ………….. (2)
∴ t2 = \(\frac {vT_0+d}{v-v_L}\)

iv. Similarly for the third wave, we get
t3 = 2T0 \(\frac {d+v_Lt_3}{v}\)
∴ t3 = \(\frac {2vT_0+d}{v-v_L}\) …………..(3)

v. Extending this argument to the (p + 1)th wave, we get,
tp+1 = pT0 + \(\frac {d+v_Lt_{p+1}}{v}\)
∴ tp+1 = \(\frac {pvT_0+d}{v-v_L}\) …………..(4)

vi. The observed or recorded period T is the time duration between instances of receiving successive waves.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 14
This is the expression for apparent frequency when the source is stationary and the listener is moving away from the source.

Question 42.
State the common properties between Doppler effect of sound and light.
Answer:
i. The recorded frequency is different than the emitted frequency in case of relative motion between listener (or observer) and source (of sound or light waves).

ii. In case of relative approach, recorded frequency > emitted frequency.

iii. In case of relative recede, recorded frequency < emitted frequency.

iv. For values of listener velocity (vL) or source velocity (vs) much smaller then wave speed (speed of sound or light).
n = n0 (1±\(\frac {v_r}{v}\))
Where, vr = relative velocity
n = actual frequency of the source
n0 = apparent frequency of the source
v = velocity of sound in air.
(upper sign is used during relative approach and lower sign is during relative recede.)

v. If velocities of source and observer (listener) are along different lines, their respective components along the line joining them should be chosen for longitudinal Doppler effect and the same mathematical treatment is applicable.

Question 43.
State the major difference between Doppler effects of sound and light.
Answer:

  1. Speed of light being absolute, only relative velocity between the observer and the source matter irrespective of who is in motion. However, for obtaining exact Doppler shift for sound waves, it is absolutely important to know who is in motion.
  2. In case of light, classical and relativistic Doppler effects are different while sound only has classical doppler effect.
  3. Presence of wind affects the velocity of sound which affects the Doppler shift in sound.

Question 44.
A train, standing at the outer signal of a railway station blows a whistle of frequency 400 Hz in still air. (i) What is the frequency of the whistle for a platform observer when the train (a) approaches the platform with a speed of 10 m s-1 (b) recedes from the platform with a speed of 10 m s-1? (ii) What is the speed of sound in each case? The speed of sound in still air can be taken as 340 m s-1.
Answer:
Given: vs = 10 m/s, v = 340 m/s, n0 = 400 Hz
Apparent frequency (n), velocity of sound (vs) in each case
Formulae:
i. n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. n = n0 \(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\)
Calculation:
a. As the train approaches the platform, using formula (i),
n = 400 (\(\frac {340}{340-10}\)) = 421.12 Hz

b. As the train recedes from the platform, using formula (ii),
n = 400 (\(\frac {340}{340+10}\)) = 388.57 Hz

ii. The relative motion of source and observer results in the apparent change in the frequency but has no effect on the speed of sound. Hence, the speed of sound remains unchanged in both the cases.

Question 45.
A train blows a whistle of frequency 640 Hz in air. Find the difference in apparent frequencies of the whistle for a stationary observer, when the train moves towards and away from the observer with the speed of 72 km/hour. (Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s)
Answer:
Given: vs = 72 km/ hr = 20 m/s, n0 = 640 Hz,
v = 340 m/s
To find: Difference in apparent frequencies
(nA – n’A)
Formulae:
i. When the train moves towards the stationary observer then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. When the train moves away the stationary observer then,
n’A = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\))
Calculation: From formula (i),
nA = 640 (\(\frac {340}{340-20}\))
∴ nA = 680 Hz
From formula (ii),
n’A = 640 (\(\frac {340}{340+20}\))
∴ n’A = 604.4 Hz
Difference between nA and n’A
= nA – n’A = 75.6 Hz

Question 46.
The speed limit for a vehicle on road is 120 km/hr. A policeman detects a drop of 10% in the pitch of horn of a car as it passes him. Is the policeman justified in punishing the car driver for crossing the speed limit? (Given: Velocity of sound=340 m/s).
Answer:
Given: Speed limit, vL = 120 km/hr
n’A = nA – \(\frac {10}{100}\) nA = 0.9 nA
Velocity of sound, v = 340 m/s
To Find: Velocity of source (vs)
i. nA = (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))n
ii. n’A = (\(\frac {v}{v+v_s}\))n
Calculation:
Dividing formula (i) by (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 15

Question 47.
A stationary source produces a note of frequency 350 Hz. An observer in a car moving towards the source measures the frequency of sound as 370 Hz. Find the speed of the car. What will be the frequency of sound as measured by the observer in the car if the car moves away from the source at the same speed? (Assume speed of sound = 340 m/s)
Answer:
Given: n0 = 350 Hz, v = 340 m/s,
nA = 370 Hz
To find: Speed (vL), Frequency (nA)
Formulae:
i. When the car moves towards the stationary source then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_s}{v}\))

ii. When the car moves away from the stationary source then,
nA = n0 (\(\frac {v-v_L}{v}\))
Calculation: From formula (i),
370 = 35o (\(\frac {340+v_L}{340}\))
∴ 359.43 =340 +vL
∴ vL = 19.43 m/s
From formula (ii),
∴ nA = 35o (\(\frac {340-20}{340}\)) = \(\frac {35}{34}\) × 320
∴ nA = 329.41 Hz

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 48.
A train, standing in a station-yard, blows a whistle of frequency 400 Hz in still air. The wind starts blowing in the direction from the yard to the station with a speed of 10 m s-1. What are the frequency, wavelength, and speed of sound for an observer standing on the station’s platform? Is the situation exactly identical to the case when the air is still and the observer runs towards the yard at a speed of 10 m s-1? The speed of sound in still air can be taken as 340 m s-1.
Answer:
Blowing of wind changes the velocity of sound. As the wind is blowing in the direction of sound, effective speed of sound ve = v + vw = 340 + 10 = 350 m/s
As the source and listener both are at rest, frequency is unchanged, i.e., n = 400 Hz.
∴ wavelength, λ = \(\frac {v_e}{n}\) = \(\frac {350}{400}\) = 0.875 m
For still air, vw = 0 and ve = v = 340 m/s
Also, as observer runs towards the stationary train vL = 10 m/s and vs = 0
The frequency now heard by the observer,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)) = 400 (\(\frac {340+10}{340}\))
= 411.76 Hz
As the source is at rest, wavelength does not change i.e., λ’ = λ = 0.875 m
Comparing the answers, it can be stated that, the situations in two cases are different.

Question 49.
A SONAR system fixed in a submarine operates at a frequency 40 kHz. An enemy submarine moves towards the SONAR with a speed of 360 km h-1. What is the frequency of sound reflected by the submarine? Take the speed of sound in water to be 1450 m s-1.
Answer:
Frequency of SONAR (source)
n = 40 kHz = 40 × 10³ Hz
Speed of sound waves, v = 1450 m s-1
Speed of the listener, vL = 360 km h-1
= 360 × \(\frac {5}{18}\) ms-1
= 100 m s-1
Since, the source is at rest and the observer moves towards the source (SONAR).
We have,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)) = 40 × 10³ × (\(\frac {1450+100}{14540}\))
∴ n = 4.276 × 10⁴ Hz
This frequency n’ is reflected by the enemy ship and is observed by the SONAR (which now acts as observer). Therefore, in this case vs = 100 m s-1
Apparent frequency,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
= 4.276 × 10⁴ × (\(\frac {1450}{1450-100}\)) = 4.59 × 10⁴ Hz
∴ n = 45.9 kHz

Question 50.
A rocket is moving at a speed of 220 m s-1 towards a stationary target. While moving, it emits a wave of frequency 1200 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the target gets reflected back to the rocket as an echo. Calculate (i) the frequency of the sound as detected by the target and (ii) the frequency of the echo as detected by the rocket (velocity of sound = 330 m/s)
Answer:
Given: vs = 220 m/s, vL = 0 m/s, n = 1200 Hz
To find: Apparent frequency (n)
i. n = n0 (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\))
ii. n = n0 \(\frac {v+v_L}{v}\)
Calculation: For first case, observer is stationary and source i.e., rocket is moving towards the target.
Hence, using formula (i),
frequency of sound as detected by the target,
n = 1200 (\(\frac {330}{330-220}\)) = 3600 Hz
For second case, target acts as a source with frequency 3600 Hz as it is the source of echo. While rocket detector acts as an observer. This means, vs = 0 and VL = 220 m/s
Using formula (ii),
frequency of echo as detected by the rocket,
n = 3600 (\(\frac {330+220}{330}\)) = 600 Hz

Question 51.
A bat is flying about in a cave, navigating via ultrasonic beeps. Assume that the sound emission frequency of the bat is 40 kHz. During one fast swoop directly towards a flat wall surface, the bat is moving at 0.03 times the speed of sound in air. What frequency does the bat hear reflected off the wall?
Answer:
Here, frequency of sound emitted by bat,
n = 40 kHz
Velocity of bat, vs = 0.03 v
where v is velocity of sound.
The bat is moving towards the flat wall. This is the case of source in motion and the observer at rest.
Therefore, the frequency of sound reflected at the wall is,
n = ns (\(\frac {v}{v-v_s}\)) = n × (\(\frac {v}{v-0.03v}\))
= n × \(\frac {1}{0.97}\) = \(\frac {n}{0.97}\)
The frequency n’ is reflected by the wall and is again received by the bat moving towards the wall. This is the case of an observer moving towards the source with velocity vL = 0.03 v.
The frequency observed by bat,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 16

Question 52.
A bat, flying at velocity VB = 12.5 m/s, is followed by a car running at velocity Vc = 50 m/s. Actual directions of the velocities of the car and the bat are as shown in the figure below, both being in the same horizontal plane (the plane of the figure). To detect the car, the bat radiates ultrasonic waves of frequency 36 kHz. Speed of sound at surrounding temperature is 350 m/s.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 17
There is an ultrasonic frequency detector fitted in the car. Calculate the frequency recorded by this detector. The ultrasonic waves radiated by the bat are reflected by the car. The bat detects these waves and from the detected frequency, it knows about the speed of the car. Calculate the frequency of the reflected waves as detected by the bat. (sin 37° = cos 53° ~ 0.6, sin 53° = cos 37° ~ 0.8)
Answer:
The components of velocities of the bat and the car, along the line joining them, are
vc cos 53° ~ 50 × 0.6 = 30 m s-1 and
vB cos 37° ~ 12.5 × 0.8 = 10 m s-1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound 18
Doppler shifted frequency n = n0 (\(\frac {v±v_1}{v±v_s}\))
upper signs to be used during approach, lower signs during recede.
Case I: Frequency radiated by the bat
n0 = 36 × 10³ Hz,
The source (bat) is receding, while the listener (car) is approaching
vS = vB cos 37° = 10 m/s and
VL = vC cos 53° = 30 m/s
∴ Frequency detected by the detector in the car,
n = n0 (\(\frac {v+v_L}{v+v_s}\))
∴ n = 36 × 10³ (\(\frac {350+30}{350+10}\)) = 36 × 10³ × \(\frac {38}{36}\)
∴ n = 38 × 10³ Hz = 38 kHz

Case II: The car is the source.
Emitted frequency by the car, is given as,
n0 = 38 × 10³ Hz,
Car, the source, is approaching the listener (bat).
Now bat-the listener is receding while car the source is approaching,
∴ vs = vc cos 53° = 30 m/s
∴ vL = vB cos 37° = 10 m/s
∴ n = n0 (\(\frac {v-v_L}{v-v_s}\))
∴ n = 38 × 10³ (\(\frac {350-10}{350-30}\)) = 38 × 10³ × \(\frac {34}{33}\)
= 39.15 × 10³ Hz
∴ n = 39.15 kHz

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 53.
Source of sound is placed at one end of a copper bar of length 1 km. Two sounds are heard at the other end at an interval of 2.75 seconds, (speed of sound in air = 330 m/s)
i. Why do we hear two sounds?
ii. Find the velocity of sound in copper.
Answer:
i. Two sounds are heard because sound travels through air as well as through copper.

ii. In air, t1 = \(\frac {distence}{time}\) = \(\frac {1000}{330}\) = 3.03 s
As the time interval is 2.75 seconds and sound travels faster in copper.
∴ In copper, t2 = 3.03 – 2.75 = 0.28 s
∴ velocity of sound in copper = \(\frac {1000}{0.28}\) = 3571 m/s

Question 54.
If all the persons mentioned in the table below are listening to a match commentary on the same channel at their respective locations positioning at same distance from television, then will they hear the same line of the commentary at same instant of time? Justify your answer.

Name of a person Location Humidity
Aijun Bangalore 65 %
Virendra Hyderabad 56%
Vikas Delhi 54%
Nilesh Mumbai 75%

Answer:
As the order of humidity for the above locations is Mumbai > Bangalore > Hyderabad > Delhi.
As velocity of sound increases with increase in humidity, the order of velocity of sound at their respective locations is Mumbai > Bangalore > Hyderabad > Delhi.
Hence, the order of persons who would listen the line of commentary first to last is Nilesh, Arjun, Virendra, Vikas.

Question 55.
Speed of sound is greater during day than at night. True or False? Justify your answer.
Answer:
True. At night, the amount of CO2 in atmosphere increases the density of atmosphere. Since, Speed of sound is inversely proportional to the square root of density. Hence, speed of sound is greater during day than in night.

Question 56.
Case I: During summer (33 °C), Prakash was waiting for a train at the platform, train arrived tt seconds after he heard train’s whistle.
Case II: During winter (19 °C), train arrived t2 seconds after Prakash heard the sound of train’s whistle.
i. Will t2 be equal to t1? Justify your answer.
ii. Calculate the velocity of sound in both the cases.
(velocity of sound in air at 0 °C = 330 m/s)
Answer:
i. Velocity of sound is directly proportional to square root of absolute temperature.
Hence, whistle’s sound will be first heard by Prakash in summer than in winter.
Therefore, the time interval between sound and train reaching Prakash in summer will be more than in winter.
i.e.,t1 > t2

ii. When t = 33 °C
∴ v1 = v0 + 0.61t
= 330 + 0.61 × 33
∴ v1 = 350.13 m/s
When t = 19 °C
v2 = v0 + 0.61t
= 330 + 0.61 × 19
v2 = 341.59 m/s

Question 57.
You are at a large outdoor concert, seated 300 m from speaker system. The concert is also being broadcast live. Consider a listener 5000 km away who receives the broadcast. Who will hear the music first, you or listener and by what time difference? (Speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s and speed of sound in air = 343 m/s)
Answer:
s1 = 300 m,
v1 = 343 m/s,
∴ t1 = \(\frac {s_1}{v_1}\) = \(\frac {300}{343}\) = 0.8746 s
Now,
s2 = 5000 km = 5 × 106 m,
v2 = c = 3 × 108 m/s
∴ t2 = \(\frac {s_2}{c}\) = \(\frac {5×10^6}{3×10^8}\) = 0.0167 s
∴ t2 < t1
∴ Listener will hear the music first.
Time difference = t1 – t2
= 0.8746 – 0.0167
= 0.8579 s
The listener will hear the music first, about 0.8579 s before the person present at the concert.

Question 58.
When a source of sound moves towards a stationary observer, then the pitch increases. Give reason.
Answer:
When a source of sound moves towards a stationary observer, then the increase in pitch is due to actual or apparent change in wavelength. When the source of sound moves towards an observer at rest, waves get compressed and the effective velocity of sound waves relative to source becomes less than the actual velocity. Hence the wavelength of sound waves an decreases which results into increase in pitch.

Question 59.
In the examples given below, state if the wave motion is transverse, longitudinal or a combination of both?

  1. Light waves travelling from Sun to Earth.
  2. ultrasonic waves in air produced by a vibrating quartz crystal.
  3. Waves produced by a motor boat sailing in water.

Answer:

  1. Light waves (from Sun to Earth) are electromagnetic waves which are transverse in nature.
  2. Ultrasonic waves in air are basically sound waves of frequency greater than the audible frequencies. Therefore, these waves are longitudinal.
  3. The water surface is cut laterally and pushed backwards by the propeller of motor boat. Therefore, the waves produced are a mixture of longitudinal and transverse waves.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 60.
Internet my friend
Answer:
https://hyperphysics.phys-astr.gsu.edu/ hbase/hframe.html
[Students are expected to visit the above mentioned website and collect more information about sound.]

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Water waves are …………….
(A) longitudinal
(B) transverse
(C) both longitudinal and transverse
(D) neither longitudinal nor transverse
Answer:
(C) both longitudinal and transverse

Question 2.
Sound travels fastest in ……………..
(A) water
(B) air
(C) steel
(D) kerosene oil
Answer:
(C) steel

Question 3.
At room temperature, velocity of sound in air at 10 atmospheric pressure and at 1 atmospheric pressure will be in the ratio ……………..
(A) 10 : 1
(B) 1 : 10
(C) 1 : 1
(D) cannot say
Answer:
(C) 1 : 1

Question 4.
In a gas, velocity of sound varies directly as ………………
(A) square root of isothermal elasticity.
(B) square of isothermal elasticity.
(C) square root of adiabatic elasticity.
(D) adiabatic elasticity.
Answer:
(C) square root of adiabatic elasticity.

Question 5.
At a given temperature, velocity of sound in oxygen and in hydrogen has the ratio …………………
(A) 4 : 1
(B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 1
(D) 2 : 1
Answer:
(B) 1 : 4

Question 6.
With decrease in water vapour content in air, velocity of sound …………………..
(A) increases
(B) decreases
(C) remains constant
(D) cannot say
Answer:
(B) decreases

Question 7.
The temperature at which speed of sound in air becomes double its value at 0 °C is ……………….
(A) 546 °C
(B) 819 °C
(C) 273 °C
(D) 1092 °C
Answer:
(B) 819 °C

Question 8.
The velocity of sound in air at NTP is 330 m/s. What will be its value when temperature is doubled and pressure is halved?
(A) 330 m/s
(B) 165 m/s
(C) 330 √2 m/s
(D) \(\frac {330}{√2}\) m/s
Answer:
(D) \(\frac {330}{√2}\) m/s

Question 9.
A series of ocean waves, each 5.0 m from crest to crest, moving past the observer at a rate of 2 waves per second have wave velocity
(A) 2.5 m/s
(B) 5.0 m/s
(C) 8.0 m/s
(D) 10.0 m/s
Answer:
(D) 10.0 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 10.
A radio station broadcasts at 760 kHz. What is the wavelength of the station?
(A) 395 m
(B) 790 m
(C) 760 m
(D) 197.5 m
Answer:
(A) 395 m

Question 11.
If the bulk modulus of water is 2100 MPa, what is the speed of sound in water?
(A) 1450 m/s
(B) 2100 m/s
(C) 0.21 m/s
(D) 21 m/s
Answer:
(A) 1450 m/s

Question 12.
If speed of sound in air at 0°C is 331 m/s. What will be its value at 35° C?
(A) 331 m/s
(B) 366 m/s
(C) 351.6 m/s
(D) 332 m/s.
Answer:
(C) 351.6 m/s

Question 13.
For a progressive wave, in the usual notation
(A) v = λT
(B) n = \(\frac {v}{λ}\)
(C) T = λv
(D) λ = \(\frac {1}{n}\)
Answer:
(B) n = \(\frac {v}{λ}\)

Question 14.
At normal temperature, for an echo to be heard the reflecting surface should be at a minimum distance of ………………. m.
(A) 34.4
(B) 17.2
(C) 10
(D) 20
Answer:
(B) 17.2

Question 15.
In a transverse wave, are regions of negative displacement.
(A) rarefactions
(B) compressions
(C) crests
(D) troughs
Answer:
(D) troughs

Question 16.
If pressure of air gets doubled at constant temperature then velocity of sound in air ……………….
(A) gets doubled
(B) remains unchanged
(C) √2 times initial velocity
(D) becomes half
Answer:
(B) remains unchanged

Question 17.
Wave motion has ……………………
(A) single periodicity.
(B) double periodicity.
(C) only periodicity in space.
(D) only periodicity in time.
Answer:
(B) double periodicity.

Question 18.
The speed of the mechanical wave depends upon ………………
(A) elastic properties of the medium only.
(B) density of the medium only.
(C) elastic properties and density of the medium
(D) initial speed.
Answer:
(C) elastic properties and density of the medium

Question 19.
Longitudinal waves CANNOT be …………………
(A) reflected
(B) refracted
(C) scattered
(D) polarised
Answer:
(D) polarised

Question 20.
Wavelength of the transverse wave is 30 cm. If the particle at some instant has displacement 2 cm, find the displacement of the particle 15 cm away at the same instant.
(A) 2 cm
(B) 17 cm
(C) -2 cm
(D) -17 cm
Answer:
(C) -2 cm

Question 21.
The wavelength of sound in air is 1.5 m and that in liquid is 2 m. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the velocity of sound in liquid is
(A) 330 m/s
(B) 440 m/’s
(C) 495 m/s
(D) 660 m/s
Answer:
(B) 440 m/’s

Question 22.
The velocity of sound in a gas is 340 m/s at the pressure P, what will be the velocity of the gas when only pressure is doubled and temperature same?
(A) 170 m/s
(B) 243 m/s
(C) 340 m/s
(D) 680 m/s
Answer:
(C) 340 m/s

Question 23.
Choose the correct statement.
(A) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s.
(B) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound decreases by 0.61 m/s.
(C) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound decreases by \(\frac {1}{273}\) m/s.
(D) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by \(\frac {1}{273}\) m/s.
Answer:
(A) For 1 °C rise in temperature, velocity of sound increases by 0.61 m/s.

Question 24.
A sound note emitted from a certain source has a velocity of 300 m/s in air and 1050 m/s in water. If the wavelength of sound note in air is 2 m, the wavelength in water is …………
(A) 2 m
(B) 6 m
(C) 7 m
(D) 12 m
Answer:
(C) 7 m

Question 25.
A thunder clap was heard 6 seconds after a lightening flash was seen. If the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s at the time of observation, the distance of the listener from the thunder clap is ………………
(A) 56.6 m
(B) 346 m
(C) 1020 m
(D) 2040 m
Answer:
(D) 2040 m

Question 26.
The speed of sound in air at NTP is 330 m/s. The period of sound wave of wavelength 66 cm is …………………
(A) 0.2 s
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.1 × 10-2 s
(D) 0.2 × 10-2 s
Answer:
(D) 0.2 × 10-2 s

Question 27.
If the velocity of sound in hydrogen is 1248 m/s, the velocity of sound in oxygen is [Given: MO = 32 and MH = 2]
(A) 1248 m/s
(B) 624 m/s
(C) 312 m/s
(D) 300 m/s
Answer:
(C) 312 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 8 Sound

Question 28.
If the source is moving away from the observer, then the apparent frequency …………..
(A) will increase
(B) will remain the same
(C) will be zero
(D) will decrease
Answer:
(D) will decrease

Question 29.
The working of SONAR is based on …………………
(A) resonance
(B) speed of a star
(C) Doppler effect
(D) speed of rotation of sun
Answer:
(C) Doppler effect

Question 30.
The formula for speed of a transverse wave on a stretched spring is ……………… (m = linear mass density, T = tension in Spring)
(A) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {m}{T}}\)
(B) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{m}}\)
(C) v = (\(\frac {m}{T}\))\(\frac {3}{2}\)
(D) v = (\(\frac {T}{m}\))\(\frac {3}{2}\)
Answer:
(B) v = \(\sqrt{\frac {T}{m}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 1.
State various units of heat and relate them to SI units of heat.
Answer:

  1. CGS unit of heat: erg and it is related to SI unit as 1 J = 107 erg
  2. Thermodynamic unit of heat: calorie (cal) and it is related as 1 cal = 4.184 J

Question 2.
What is thermal equilibrium?
Answer:

  1. When two bodies at different temperatures come into the contact with each other, they exchange heat.
  2. After some time, temperature of two bodies become equal and heat transfer between them stops.
  3. The two bodies are then said to be in thermal equilibrium with each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
State true of false. Correct the statement and rewrite if false.
i. Heat transfer takes place between the body and the surrounding medium until the body and the surrounding medium are at the same temperature.
ii. Whenever two bodies are in contact, there is a transfer of heat.
Answer:

  1. True.
  2. False.

Whenever two bodies at different temperature are in contact, there is a transfer of heat.

Question 4.
Give reason: Temperature is said to be a measure of average kinetic energy of the atoms/molecules of the body.
Answer:

  1. Matter consists of particles which are in continuous vibrational motion and thereby possess kinetic energy.
  2. When external energy is provided to these particles, internal energy of particles increases.
  3. This increase in internal energy is in the form of increased kinetic energy of atoms/molecules and raises temperature of body (except at melting or boiling point of the body).
  4. Greater the kinetic energy, faster the atoms/ molecules move and temperature of body becomes higher.
  5. Thus, temperature of body is directly proportional to its kinetic energy.
    Hence, temperature is said to be a measure of average kinetic energy of the atoms and molecules of the body.

Question 5.
Why do solid particles possess potential energy?
Answer:
The solid particles possess potential energy due to the interatomic forces that hold the particles together at some mean fixed positions.

Question 6.
What happens when heat is supplied to a solid at its melting point?
Answer:

  1. When heat is supplied to a solid at its melting point, average kinetic energy of constituent particles does not change.
  2. As a result, temperature of body remains constant.
  3. Supplied energy is used to weaken the bonds between constituent particles.
  4. While order of magnitude of average distance between the molecules remains almost same as solid, substance melts, i.e., changes into liquid state, at melting point.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
Why do solids have definite shape and volume?
Answer:
The solid particles possess potential energy due to the interatomic forces that hold the particles together at some mean fixed positions.
Hence, solids have definite shape and volume.

Question 8.
Why is density of liquid at melting point nearly same as density of solids at melting point?
Answer:

  1. During change of state from solid to liquid, mass of substance does not change.
  2. Also, mean distance between particles during change of state does not alter at melting point.
  3. Density depends upon mass and volume, in turn, on mean distance between particles.
    Hence, density of liquid at melting point is nearly same as density of solids at melting point.

Question 9.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
Due to weakened interatomic bonds liquid do not possess definite volume but have definite shape.
Answer:
False.
Due to weakened bonds liquids do not possess definite shape but have definite volume.

Question 10.
What happens when heat is supplied to liquid its freezing point (melting point)?
Answer:

  1. On heating, the atoms/molecules in liquid gain kinetic energy and temperature of the liquid increases.
  2. If liquid is continued to heat further, at the boiling point, the constituents overcome the interatomic/molecular forces.
  3. The mean distance between the constituents increases so that the particles are farther apart.
  4. At boiling point, the liquid gets converted into gaseous state.

Question 11.
Why, according to kinetic theory of gases, gases have neither definite volume nor shape?
Answer:
As per kinetic theory of gases, for an ideal gas, there are no forces between the molecules of a gas. Hence, gases neither have a definite volume nor shape.

Question 12.
Match the pairs.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 1
Answer:
i – b,
ii – c,
iii – a

Question 13.
Distinguish between an adiabatic wall and diathermic wall.
Answer:

Adiabatic wall

Diathermic wall

i. An ideal wall or partition separating two systems such that no heat exchange can take place between the systems is called adiabatic wall. A wall that allows exchange of heat energy between two systems is said to be diathermic wall.
ii. It is a perfect thermal insulator. It is not a perfect thermal insulator.
iii. It does not exist in reality. Partition like thin sheet of copper acts as diathermic wall.
iv. It is generally represented as thick cross-shaded (slanting lines region). It is represented as a thin dark region.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 14.
State and explain zeroth law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Statement: If two bodies A and B are in thermal equilibrium and also A and C are in thermal equilibrium then B and C are also in thermal equilibrium.
Explanation:

  1. Consider two sections of a container separated by an adiabatic wall containing two different gases as system A and system B.
  2. Systems A and B are independently brought in thermal equilibrium with a system C.
  3. When the adiabatic wall separating systems A and B is removed, there will be no transfer of heat from system A to system B or vice versa.
  4. This indicates that systems A and B are also in thermal equilibrium.
  5. This means, if systems A and B are separately in thermal equilibrium with a system C, then A and B are also mutually in thermal equilibrium.

Question 15.
What is thermometry? What is thermometer?
Answer:
Thermometry is the science of temperature and its measurement. The device used to measure temperature is a thermometer.

Question 16.
State the principle used to measure the temperature of a system using a thermometer.
Answer:
When two or more systems/bodies are in thermal equilibrium, their temperatures are same. This principle is used to measure the temperature of a system by using a thermometer.

Question 17.
Explain how thermal equilibrium is attained between thermometer and the patient holding thermometer, in mouth.
Answer:

  1. Thermometer indicating lower temperature is held in mouth by patient.
  2. As body of patient is at higher temperature, heat energy is transferred from patient to thermometer.
  3. When temperature of thermometer becomes same as temperature of patient, heat exchange stops and thermal equilibrium is attained between thermometer and body of patient.

Question 18.
Define the following terms.
i) Ice point
ii) Steam point
Answer:

  1. Ice point: The temperature at which pure water freezes at one standard atmospheric pressure is called as ice point or freezing point.
  2. Steam point: The temperature at which pure water boils into steam or steam changes to liquid water at one standard atmospheric pressure is called as steam point or boiling point.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 19.
Explain Celsius and fahrenheit scale of temperature. Give relation between the two scales with the help of the graph.
Answer:

  1. Celsius scale:
    • The ice point (melting point of pure ice) is marked as 0 °C (lower point) and steam point (boiling point of water) is marked as 100 °C (higher point).
    • Both are taken at one atmospheric pressure.
    • The interval between these points is divided into loo equal pans. Each of these parts is called as one degree celsius and it is written as 1 oc.
  2. Fahrenheit scale:
    • The ice point (melting point of pure ice) is marked as 32 °F and steam point (boiling point of water) is marked as 212 °F.
    • The interval between these two reference points is divided into 180 equal parts. Each part is called as degree fahrenheit and is written as 1 °F.
  3. Relation between fahrenheit temperature and celsius temperature:
    \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{F}}-32}{180}\) = \(\frac{T_{C}-0}{100}\)
    Where, TF = temperature in fahrenheit scales.
    TC = temperature in celsius scale.
    The graph of TF versus TC is as shown
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 2

Question 20.
What is thermometer? Explain with examples, the thermometric property used in a thermometer.
Answer:

  1. An instrument designed to measure temperature is called as thermometer.
  2. Any property of a substance which changes sufficiently with temperature can be used as a basis of constructing a thermometer and is known as the thermometric property.
  3. There are different types of thermometers.
    • In a constant volume gas thermometer, the pressure of a fixed volume of gas (measured by the difference in height) is used as the thermometric property.
    • The liquid-in-glass thermometer depends on the change in volume of the liquid with temperature. Small change in temperature changes the volume of liquid considerably. Two such liquids are mercury and alcohol. Mercury thermometers are used for measurement of temperature range -39 °C to 357 °C while alcohol thermometers are used only to measure temperatures near ice point (melting point of pure ice).
    • The resistance thermometer uses the change of electrical resistance of a metal wire with temperature.
    • Normally in research laboratories, a thermocouple is used to measure the temperature. A thermocouple is a junction of two different metals or alloys eg.: copper and iron joined together.
    • When two such junctions at the two ends of two dissimilar metal rods are kept at two different temperatures, an electromotive force is generated that can be calibrated to measure the temperature.
  4. Thermometers are calibrated so that a numerical value may be assigned to a given temperature. The standard fixed points are melting point of ice and boiling point of water.

Question 21.
State characteristics of thermometer.
Answer:

  1. Thermometer must be sensitive, i.e., a noticeable change in the thermometric property should be observed for a very small change in temperature.
  2. It has to be accurate.
  3. It should be easily reproducible.
  4. It is important that the system attains thermal equilibrium with the thermometer quickly.

Question 22.
Explain relation between unknown temperature T and thermodynamic property PT at temperature T.
Answer:
If the values of a thermometric property are P1 and P2 at the ice point (0 °C) and steam point (100 °C) respectively and the value of this property is PT at unknown temperature T, then T is given by the following equation.
T = \(\frac{100\left(P_{T}-P_{1}\right)}{P_{2}-P_{1}}\)

Question 23.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
Ideally, there should be no difference in temperatures recorded on two different thermometers.
Answer:
True.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 24.
List an advantage and a disadvantage of constant volume gas thermometer.
Answer:
Advantage: There is no difference in temperatures recorded on two different constant volume gas thermometers. Hence, it is very accurate.
Disadvantage: Constant volume gas thermometer is bulky instrument. Hence, it is not easily portable.

Question 25.
Give short note on liquid-in-glass thermometer.
Answer:

  1. Liquid-in-glass thermometer depends on the change in volume of the liquid with temperature.
  2. When the bulb is heated, the liquid in a glass bulb expands upward in a capillary tube.
  3. The liquid is such that it is easily seen and expands (or contracts) rapidly and by a large amount over a wide range of temperature.
  4. Most commonly used liquids are mercury and alcohol as they remain in liquid state over a wide range. Mercury freezes at -39 °C and boils at 357 °C; alcohol freezes at -115 °C and boils at 78 °C.

Question 26.
What are thermochromic liquids? Give two examples.
Answer:

  1. Thermochromic liquids are ones which change colour with temperature.
  2. These liquids are very sensitive to temperature, especially in range of room temperature.
  3. Hence, only specific liquids display distinct colour variations at normal temperature.
    Examples: Titanium dioxide and zinc oxide are white at room temperature but when heated change to yellow.

Question 27.
Write a note on resistance thermometer.
Answer:

  1. Resistance thermometer uses the change of electrical resistance of a metal wire with temperature.
  2. It measures temperature accurately in the range -2000 °C to 1200 °C is best for steady temperatures.
  3. It is bulky and hence not easily portable.

Solved Examples

Question 28.
If the temperature in the room is 29 °C, what is its temperature in degree fahrenheit?
Solution:
Given: TC = 29 °C
To find: Temperature in degree fahrenheit (TF)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 3
Answer:
Temperature in the room in degree fahrenheit is 84.2 °F.

Question 29.
Average room temperature on a normal day is 27 °C. What is the room temperature in °F?
Solution:
TC = 27 °C
Room temperature in °F
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 4
Answer:
Room temperature in °F is 80.6 °F.

Question 30.
Normal human body temperature in fahrenheit is 98.4 °F. What is the body temperature in °C?
Solution:
TF = 98.4 °F
Formula: Body temperature in °C (TC)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 5
Body temperature in °C is 36.89 °C.

Question 31.
The length of a mercury column in a mercury-in-glass thermometer is 25 mm at the ice point and 180 mm at the steam point. What is the temperature when the length is 60 mm?
Solution:
Here the thermometric property P is the length of the mercury column.
Using equation,
T = \(\frac{100\left(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{P}_{1}\right)}{\left(\mathrm{P}_{2}-\mathrm{P}_{1}\right)}\)
For P1 = 25 mm,
P2 = 180 mm,
PT = 60 mm
T = \(\frac{100(60-25)}{(180-25)}\)
= 22.58 °C
The temperature corresponding to the length of 60 mm is 22.58 °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 32.
A resistance thermometer has resistance 95.2 Ω at the ice point and 138.6 Ω at the steam point. What resistance would be obtained if the actual temperature is 27 °C?
Solution:
Here the thermometric property P is the resistance. If R is the resistance at 27 °C,
Using equation,
T = \(\frac{100\left(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{P}_{1}\right)}{\left(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{P}_{1}\right)}\)
For T = 27 °C, P1 = 95.2 Ω, P2 = 138.6 Ω .
∴ 27 = \(\frac{100(\mathrm{R}-95.2)}{(138.6-95.2)}\)
∴ R = \(\frac{27 \times(138.6-95.2)}{100}\) + 95.2
= 11.72 + 95.2
= 106.92Ω
The resistance obtained would be 106.92 Ω.

Question 33.
Explain the need for thermodynamic (absolute) scale.
Answer:

  1. The two fixed point scale, Celsius scale and Fahrenheit scale had a practical shortcoming for calibrating the scale.
  2. It was difficult to precisely control the pressure and identify the fixed points, especially for the boiling point as the boiling temperature is very sensitive to changes in pressure.
  3. Hence, a one fixed point scale was adopted to define a temperature scale.
  4. This scale is called the absolute scale or thermodynamic scale.

Question 34.
What is triple point of water? State its physical significance.
Answer:

  1. The triple point of water is that point where water in a solid, liquid and gas state co-exists in equilibrium and this occurs only at a unique temperature and a pressure.
  2. To know the triple point, one has to see that three phases coexist in equilibrium and no one phase in dominating. This occurs for each substance at a single unique combination of temperature and pressure.
  3. Thus, if three phases of water solid ice, liquid water and water vapour coexist, the pressure and temperature are automatically fixed.
  4. Internationally, triple point of water has been assigned as 273.16 K at pressure equal to 6.11 × 102 Pa or 6.11 × 10-3 atmosphere, as the standard fixed point for calibration of thermometers.
  5. The physical significance of triple point of water is that, it represents unique condition and it is used to define the absolute temperature.

Question 35.
Write a short note on absolute scale of temperature.
Answer:

  1. The absolute scale of temperature, is so termed since ills based on the properties of an ideal gas and does not depend on the property of any particular substance.
  2. The zero of this scale is ideally the lowest temperature possible although it has not been achieved in practice.
  3. It is termed as Kelvin scale after Lord Kelvin with its zero at -273.15 °C and temperature intervals same as that on the Celsius scale. It is written as K (without °).

Question 36.
Draw a neat and well labelled diagram to show comparison of kelvin, Celsius and fahrenheit temperature scales.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 6

Question 37.
Answer the following:
i) The triple-point of water is a standard fixed point in modern thermometry. Why? What is wrong in taking the melting point of ice and the boiling point of water as standard fixed points (as was originally done in the Celsius scale)?
ii) The absolute temperature (Kelvin scale) T is related to temperature tc on the Celsius scale by tc = T – 273.15. Why do we have 273.15 in this relation and not 273.16?
Answer:
i) The triple point of water has been assigned a fixed value of 273.15 K. This number represents a unique value associated with a unique condition of temperature and pressure in which all the three phases of water co-exist. On the other hand, melting point of ice and boiling point of water do not have a unique set of values as they are subject to changes in pressure and volume. For this reason, triple point of water is a standard fixed point in modem thermometry.

ii) On Celsius scale, the melting point of ice at normal pressure has a value 0 °C. The value corresponding to this value on the absolute scale is 273.15 K. The value 273.16 K denotes the triple point of water which has a value,
273.16 – 273.15 = 0.01 °C on Celsius scale as per the given relation.

Question 38.
State Charles’ law and give its formula.
Answer:
Charles’ law:
At constant pressure, volume of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature.
Mathematically,
V ∝ T … ( at constant pressure)
∴ V = kT
where k is constant of proportionality
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = k = constant
For two gases, \(\frac{V_{1}}{T_{1}}\) = \(\frac{V_{2}}{T_{2}}\) = constant.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 39.
State Pressure law and give its formula.
Answer:
Pressure (Gay Lussac’s) law:
At constant volume, pressure of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature.
Mathematically,
P ∝ T .. .(at constant volume)
∴ P = kT
Where, k is constant of proportionality P
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = k = constant
For two gases, \(\frac{P_{1}}{T_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{T_{2}}\) = constant

Question 40.
State Boyle’s law and give its formula.
Answer:
Boyle’s law:
At constant temperature, the volume of a fixed mass of a gas is inversely proportional to its pressure.
Mathematically,
V ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{P}}\).. ..(at constant temperature)
V = k × \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{P}}\)
where, k is constant of proportionality.
PV = k = constant For two gases,
P1V1 = P2V2 = constant

Question 41.
Derive ideal gas equation PV = nRT.
Answer:

  1. The relation between three variables of a gas i.e., pressure, volume and absolute temperature is called as ideal gas equation.
    From Boyle’s law,
    V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{P}}\), at constant temperature ….(1)
    From Charles’ law,
    V ∝ T, at constant pressure … .(2)
  2. Combining equations (1) and (2) we get,
    ∴ V ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
    ∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\)= constant
  3. For one mole of a gas,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = R or PV = RT … (3)
    where R is the constant of proportionality.
  4. Equation (3) is called ideal gas equation. The value of constant R is same for all gases. Therefore, R is called as universal gas constant. R = 8.31 JK-1mol-1.
  5. For ‘n’ moles of gas, i.e. if the gas contains ‘n’ moles, equation (3) can be written as,
    PV = nRT

Solved Examples

Question 42.
Express T = 24.57 K in Celsius and fahrenheit.
Solution:
Given: TK = 24.57 K
To find: Temperature in Celsius (TC),
Temperature in fahrenheit (TF)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 7
Calculation:
From formula,
∴ TC = TK – 273.15
= 24.57 – 273.15
= -248.58 °C
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 8
Temperature in celsius (TC) is – 248.58 °C
Temperature in fahrenheit (TF) is -415.44 °F

Question 43.
Calculate the temperature which has the same value on fahrenheit scale and kelvin scale.
Solution:
Given: TK = TF = x
To find: Temperature at which Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales coincide (x)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{F}}-32}{180}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{K}}-273.15}{100}\)
Calculation: From formula.
∴ \(\frac{x-32}{180}\) = \(\frac{x-273.15}{100}\)
∴ 5(x – 32) = 9(x – 273.15)
∴ 5x – 160 = 9x – 2458.35
∴ 4x = 2298.35
∴ x = \(\frac{2298.35}{4}\) = 574.6
∴ x = 574.6 °F
The temperature at which kelvin and fahrenheit scales coincide is 574.6 °F.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 44.
The triple points of neon and carbon dioxide are 24.57 K and 216.55 K, respectively. Express these temperatures on
the celsius and fahrenheit scales. (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: For neon, TK = 24.57 K
For carbon dioxide, TK = 216.55 K
To find:
i) Triple point of neon on celsius (TCN) and fahrenheit scale (TFN)
ii) Triple point of carbon dioxide on Celsius (TCC) and fahrenheit scale (TFC)

Formulae:
i) TK – 273.15 = TC
ii) \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{K}}-273.15}{100}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{c}}-32}{180}\)
Calculation: From formula (i),
TC = TK – 273.15
For neon, TCN = 24.57 – 273.15
∴ TCN = -248.58 °c
For carbon dioxide.
TCC = 216.55 – 273.15
∴ TCC = -56.60 °c
From formula (ii),
TF = \(\frac{9}{5}\)(Tk – 273.15) + 32
For neon, Tk = 24.57 K
∴ TFN = \(\frac{9}{5}\)[24.57 – 273.15] + 32
∴ TFN = -415.44 °F
For CO2, TK = 216.55 K
∴ TFC = \(\frac{9}{5}\)(216.55 – 273.15) + 32
∴ TFC = -69.88 °F
i) Triple point of neon on celsius scale is -248.58 °c and on a fahrenheit scale is -415.44 °F.
ii) Triple point of carbon-dioxide on celsius scale is -56.60 °C and on fahrenheit scale is -69.88 °F.

Question 45.
Two absolute scales A and B have triple points of water defined to be 200 A and 350 B. What is the relation between TA and TB?
Solution:
Triple point of water is, T = 273.16 K
Since the absolute scales measure the triple point as 200 A and 350 B.
∴ 200A = 350B = 273.16 K
∴ 1A = \(\frac{273.16}{200}\)K and 1B = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\)K
If TA and TB are the temperatures on the two scales, then
\(\frac{273.16}{200}\)TA = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\)TB
∴ TA = \(\frac{200}{350}\) TB = \(\frac{4}{7}\)TB
\(\frac{\mathbf{T}_{\mathbf{A}}}{\mathbf{T}_{\mathbf{B}}}\) = \(\frac{4}{7}\)
The relation between TA and TB is TA : TB = 4 : 7

Question 46.
The pressure reading in a thermometer at steam point is 1.367 × 103 Pa. What is pressure reading at triple point knowing the linear relationship between temperature and pressure?
Solution:
Given: P = 1.367 × 103 Pa at steam point (T) i.e., at 273.15 + 100 = 373.15 K.
Linear relationship between temperature and pressure means that.
P ∝ T ⇒ P1T1 = P2T2
To find: Pressure reading (Ptriple)
Formula: Ptriple = 273.16 × \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{T}}\right)\)
where Ptriple and P are the pressures at temperature of triple point (273.16 K) and T (375.15 K) respectively.
Calculation: From formula,
∴ Ptriple = 273.16 × \(\left(\frac{1.367 \times 10^{3}}{373.15}\right)\)
= 1000 × 103 Pa
Pressure reading is 1.000 × 103 Pa.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 47.
When the pressure of 0.75 litre of a gas at 27 °C is doubled, its temperature rises to 111°C. Calculate the final volume of a gas.
Solution:
Given: V1 = 0.75 litre = 750 cm3,
T1 = 27 + 273.15 = 300.15 K,
T2 = 111 + 273.15 = 384.15 K,
P2 = 2P1
To find: Final volume (V2)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 9
∴ V2 = 480 cm3
The final volume of the gas is 480 cm3.

Question 48.
A certain mass of a gas at 20 °C is heated until both its pressure and volume are doubled. Calculate the final temperature.
Solution:
T1 = 20 + 273.15 = 293.15 K,
P2 = 2P1, and V2 = 2V1
To find: Final temperature (T2)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{2} \mathrm{~V}_{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}\) = \(\frac{\left(2 \mathrm{P}_{1}\right)\left(2 \mathrm{~V}_{1}\right)}{\mathrm{T}_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_{1}}\) = \(\frac{4}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}}\)
∴ T2 = 4 × 293.15 = 1172.6 K
= 1172.6 – 273.15 = 899.45 °C
∴ T2 = 1172.6 K or 899.45 °C
The final temperature of the gas is 1172.6 K or 899.45 °C.

Question 49.
Explain how substances expand on the basis of vibrational motion of atoms.
Answer:

  1. The atoms in a solid vibrate about their mean positions.
  2. When heated, they vibrate faster and force each other to move a little farther apart. This results into expansion.
  3. The molecules in a liquid or gas move with certain speed.
  4. When heated, they move faster and force each other to move a little farther apart. This results
    in expansion of liquids and gases on heating.
  5. The expansion is more in liquids than in solids; gases expand even more.

Question 50.
What is thermal expansion? List types of thermal expansion.
Answer:

  1. A change in the temperature of a body causes change in its dimensions.
  2. The increase in the dimensions of a body due to an increase in its temperature is called thermal expansion.
  3. There are three types of thermal expansion:
    • Linear expansion
    • Areal expansion
    • Volume expansion

Question 51.
Define linear expansion of solids.
Answer:
The expansion in length of a solid due to thermal energy is called linear expansion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 52.
Define coefficient of linear expansion of solid. State its unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of linear expansion of a solid is defined as increase in the length per unit original length at 0 °C per degree rise in temperature.
    It is denoted by α and given by,
    α = \(\frac{l_{2}-l_{1}}{l_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{2}-\mathrm{T}_{1}\right)}\)
    where l1 = initial length at temperature T1 °C
    l2 = final length at temperature T2 °C
  2. Unit: °C-1 or K-1
  3. Dimensions: [L0M0T0K-1]

Question 53.
Derive an expression for the coefficient of linear expansion in solid.
Answer:
i) If the substance is in the form of a long rod of length l, then for small change ∆T, in temperature, the fractional change ∆l/l, in length is directly proportional to ∆T.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 10
[Note: Linear expansion ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]
\(\frac{\Delta l}{l}\) ∝ ∆T
∴ \(\frac{\Delta l}{l}\) = α∆T … (1)
where, α is called the coefficient of linear expansion of solid.

ii) Rearranging terms in equation (1),
α = \(\frac{\Delta l}{l \Delta \mathrm{T}}\)
= \(\frac{l_{\mathrm{T}}-l_{0}}{l_{0}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\)
where,
l0 = length of rod at 0 °C,
lT = length of rod when heated to T °C,
T0 = 0 °C (initial temperature)
T = final temperature,
∆l = lT – T0 = change in length,
∆T = T – T0 = rise in temperature.

iii) If l0 = 1 m and T – T0 = 1 °C, then α = lT – l0 (numerically).

iv) As magnitude of α varies negligibly with temperature, it is assumed to be constant for a particular material.
Hence, it is not essential to take initial temperature as 0 °C.
This modifies equation (2) into,
α = \(\frac{l_{2}-l_{1}}{l_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{2}-\mathrm{T}_{1}\right)}\)
where l1 = initial length at temperature T1 °C
l2 = final length at temperature T2 °C

Question 54.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
i) Coefficient of linear expansion is same for all substances.
ii) Metals have high values for the coefficient of linear expansion, than non-metals.
Answer:

  1. False.
    Coefficient of linear expansion is different for different substances.
  2. True.

Question 55.
Define areal expansion of solids.
Answer:
The increase in the surface area of a solid, on heating is called areal expansion or superficial expansion of solids.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 56.
Define coefficient of superficial (areal) expansion of a solid, state its unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. Coefficient of superficial (areal) expansion of a solid is defined as the increase in area per unit original area at 0 °C per degree rise in temperature.
    It is denoted by β and given by,
    β = \(\frac{A_{2}-A_{1}}{A_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
    where, A1 = Area of solid sheet at T1 °C,
    A2 = Area of solid sheet at T2 °C
  2. Unit: 0°C-1 or K-1
  3. Dimensions: [L0M0T0K-1

Question 57.
Derive expression for coefficient of areal expansion.
Answer:
i) If a substance is in the form of a plate of area A, then for small change ∆T in temperature, the fractional change in area, ∆A/A in figure given below, is directly proportional to ∆T.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 11
[Note: Areal expansion ∆A is exaggerated for explanation]
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}\) ∝ ∆T
∴ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}\) = β∆T … (1)
where β is called the coefficient of areal expansion of solid.

ii) Rearranging terms in equation (1),
β = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A} \Delta \mathrm{T}}\)
= \(\frac{A_{T}-A_{0}}{A_{0}\left(T-T_{0}\right)}\)
where,
A0 = volume at 0 °C,
AT = volume when heated to T °C,
T0 = 0 °C (initial temperature),
T = final temperature,
∆A = AT – A0 = change in area,
∆T = T – T0 = rise in temperature.
iii) If A0 = 1 m2, T – To = 1 °C, then β = AT – A0 (numerically).
iv. As, β does not vary significantly with temperature. Hence, if A1 is the area of a metal plate at T1 °C and A2 is the area at higher temperature at T2 °C, then
β = \(\frac{A_{2}-A_{1}}{A_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)

Question 58.
Define volume expansion of solids.
Answer:
The increase in volume due to heating is called volume expansion or cubical expansion.

Question 59.
Define coefficient of cubical (volume) expansion of a solid. State its unit and dimensions.
Answer:
i) Coefficient of cubical (volume) expansion:
Coefficient of cubical (volume) expansion of a solid is defined as increase in volume per unit original volume at O °C per degree rise in temperature.
It is denoted by γ and is given by,
γ = \(\frac{V_{2}-V_{1}}{V_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
where,
V1 = Volume of solid at T1 °C,
V2 = Volume of solid at T2 °C
ii) Dimensions: [L0M0T0K-1]

[Note: Units and dimension of areal expansion in solid (β) and cubical expansion in solid (γ) are same as that of linear expansion in solid (α).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 60.
Derive an expression for coefficient of cubical expansion.
Answer:
i) If the substance is in the form of a cube of volume V, then for small change ∆T in temperature, the fractional change, ∆/V in volume is directly proportional to ∆T.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 12
[Note: Volume expansion ∆V is exaggerated for explanation.)
ii) γ = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{V} \Delta \mathrm{T}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{T}}-\mathrm{V}_{0}}{\mathrm{~V}_{0}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{0}\right)}\)
where, V0 = volume at 0 °C,
VT = volume when heated to T °C,
T0 = 0 °C (initial temperature),
T = final temperature.
∆V = VT – V0 = change in volume,
γ = VT – T0 = rise in temperature.

iii) If V0 = 1 m3, T – T0 = 1 °C, then γ = VT – V0 (numerically).

iv) If V1 is the volume of a body at T1 °C and V2 is the volume at higher temperature T2 °C, then
γ1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}-\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{2}-\mathrm{T}_{1}\right)}\)
γ1, is the coefficient of volume expansion at temperature T1 °C.

Question 61.
How does coefficient of volume expansion depend upon temperature?
Answer:

  1. As compared to coefficient of linear expansion (α) and coefficient of areal expansion (β), γ changes more with temperature.
  2. It is constant only at high temperatures.

Question 62.
Do coefficient of areal expansion and coefficient of volume expansion depend upon nature of material?
Answer:
Yes, coefficient of areal expansion and coefficient of volume expansion depend upon nature of material.

Question 63.
Explain expansion in fluids.
Answer:

  1. Since fluids possess definite volume and take the shape of the container, they exhibit only change in volume significantly.
  2. Equations valid for cubical or volume expansion of fluids are:
    γ = \(\frac{\Delta V}{V \Delta T}=\frac{V_{T}-V_{0}}{V_{0}\left(T-T_{0}\right)}\)
    where, V0 = volume at 0 °C,
    VT = volume when heated to T °C,
    T0 = 0 °C (initial temperature),
    T = final temperature,
    ∆V = VT – V0 = change in volume,
    ∆T = T – T0 = rise in temperature.
    and γ1 = \(\frac{V_{2}-V_{1}}{V_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
    where, V1 is volume of body at T1 °C, V2 is volume of body at higher temperature T2 °C and γ1 is coefficient volume expansion at T1 °C.
  3. As fluids are kept in containers, while dealing with the volume expansion of fluids, expansion of the container also needs to be considered.
  4. If expansion of fluid results in a volume greater than the volume of the container, the fluid overflows if the container is open.
  5. If the container is closed, volume expansion of fluid causes additional pressure on the walls of the container.

Question 64.
Use the data given in the table below:

Materials γ(K-1)
Invar 2 × 10 -6
Steel (3.3 – 3.9) × 10-5
Aluminium 6.9 × 10“-5
Mercury 18.2 × 10-5
Water 20.7 × 10-5
Paraffin 58.8 × 10-5
Gasoline 95.0 × 10-5
Alcohol (ethyl) 110 × 10-5

What conclusions can be drawn using the data?
Answer:

  1. Coefficient of volume expansion (γ) is a characteristic of the substance.
  2. It (γ) has higher order of magnitude for liquids than that of solids.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 65.
Explain how behaviour of water is different than solids and liquids when heat is supplied.
Answer:

  1. Normally solids and liquids expand on heating. Hence their volume increases on heating.
  2. Since the mass is constant, it results in a decrease in the density on heating.
  3. Water expand on cooling from 4 °C to 0 °C.
  4. Hence its density decreases on cooling in this temperature range.

Question 66.
Derive relation between coefficient of linear expansion (α) and coefficient of areal expansion (β).
Answer:
Consider a square plate of side l0 at 0 °C and h at T °C.

  1. lT = lo (1 + αT) .
    If area of plate at 0 °C is Ao, Ao = \(l_{0}^{2}\)
    If area of plate at T °C is AT,
    AT = \(l_{\mathrm{T}}^{2}\) = \(l_{0}^{2}\)(1 + αT)2
    or AT = A0(1 + αT)2 …. (1)
    Also,
    AT = A0(1 + βT) … (2)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 13.1
  2. Using Equations (1) and (2), A0(1 + αT)2 = A0(1 + βT)
    ∴ 1 + 2αT + α2T2 = 1 + βT
  3. Since the values of a are very small, the term α2T2 is very small and may be neglected, ∴ β = 2α
  4. The result is general because any solid can be regarded as a collection of small squares.

Question 67.
Derive relation between coefficient of linear expansion (α) and coefficient of cubical expansion (γ).
Answer:

  1. Consider a cube of side lo at 0 °C and lT at T°C.
    ∴ lT = lo(l + αT)
    If volume of the cube at 0 °C is V0, V0 = \(l_{0}^{3}\)
    If volume of the cube at T °C is
    VT, VT = \(l_{\mathrm{T}}^{3}\) = \(l_{0}^{3}\)(1 + αT)3
    VT = V0 (1 + αT)3 ….(1)
    Also,
    VT = V0(1 + γT) ….(2)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 14
  2. Using Equations (1) and (2),
    Vo(1 + αT)3 = V0(1 + γT)
    ∴ 1 + 3αT + 3α2T2 + α3T3 = 1 + γT
  3. Since the values of a are very small, the terms with higher powers of a may be neglected.
    ∴ γ = 3α
  4. The result is general because any solid can be regarded as a collection of small cubes.

Question 68.
State the relation between α, β and γ and write their meaning.
Answer:
Relation between α, β and γ is given by,
α = \(\frac{\beta}{2}\) = \(\frac{\gamma}{3}\)
where, α = coefficient of linear expansion.
β = coefficient of superficial expansion.
γ = coefficient of cubical expansion.

Solved Examples

Question 69.
The length of a rail on a railway line is 25 m at 10 °C. During summer, maximum temperature attained in the region is 50 °C. Find the minimum gap between the rails, (a = 1.2 × 10-5/°C)
Solution:
Given: L1 = 25 m, T1 = 10 °C, T2 = 50 °C,
α = 1.2 × 10-5/°C
To find: Minimum gap between rails (L2 – L1)
Formula: L2 – L1 = L1α(T2 – T1)
Calculation: From formula,
L2 – L1 = 25 × 1.2 × 10-5 × (50 – 10)
= 25 × 1.2 × 10-5 × 40
= 1.2 × 10-2 m
∴ L2 – L1 = 1.2 cm
The minimum gap between the rails is 1.2 cm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 70.
The length of a metal rod at 27 °C is 4 cm. The length increases to 4.02 cm when the metal rod is heated upto 387 °C. Determine the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal rod.
Solution:
Given: T1 = 27 °C, T2 = 387 °C
L1 = 4 cm = 4 × 10-2 m
L1 = 4.02 cm = 4.02 × 10-2 m
To find: Coefficient of linear expansion
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 15
Coefficient of linear expansion is 1.389 × 10-5/°C

Question 71.
The length of a metal rod is 150 cm at 25 °C. Find its length when it is heated to 150 °C. (αsteel = 2.2 × 105 /°C)
Solution:
Given. L1 = 150 cm, T1 = 25 °C, T2 = 150 °C,
αsteel = 2.2 × 105 /°C
To find: Length of rod (L2)
Formula: α = \(\frac{L_{2}-L_{1}}{L_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
L2 – L1 = L1 α(T2 – T1)
∴ L2 = L1[1 + α(T2 – T1)]
= 150[1 + 2.2 × 105 × (150 – 25)]
= 150(1 + 2.2 × 105 × 125)
= 150(1 + 0.00275)
= 150× 1.00275 = 150.4125
∴ L2 = 150.4cm
Length of the rod at 150 °C) is 150.4 cm.

Question 72.
Length of a metal rod at temperature 27 °C is 4.256 m. Find the temperature at which the length of the same rod increases to 4.268 m. (α for iron = 1.2 × 105 K-1)
Solution:
Given: T1 = 27°C, L1 = 4.256 m, L2 = 4.268 m,
α = 1.2 × 105 K-1
To find: Temperature (T2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 47
= antilog [log 1114.912 – log 4.256]
= antilog [3.0468 – 0.6290]
= antilog [2.4 1781
= 2.617 × 102
= 261.7°C
Required temperature is 261.7 °C.

Question 73.
A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The diameter of the hole is 4.24 cm at 27 °C. What is the change in the diameter of the hole when the sheet is heated to 227 °C? Coefficient of linear expansion of copper = 1.70 × 10-5 °C-1.
Solution:
Given: d1 = 4.24 cm, ∆T = 227 – 27 = 200 °C,
α = 1.70 × 10-5 °C-1
To find: Change in diameter (∆d)
Formula: α = \(\frac{d_{2}-d_{1}}{d_{1} \Delta T}=\frac{\Delta d}{d_{1} \Delta T}\)
Calculation: From formula.
∆d = α x d1 x αT
= 1.70 × 10 × 4.24 × 200
∴ ∆d = 1.44 × 10-2 cm
The change in diameter of the hole is 1.44 × 10-2 cm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 74.
A thin aluminium plate has an area 286 cm2 at 20 °C. Find its area when it is heated to 180 °C.
(β for aluminium = 4.9 × 10-5 °C)
Solution:
Given: T1 = 20°C, T2 = 180°C, A1 = 286 cm2
β = 4.9 × 10-5 °C
To find: Final area (A2)
Formula: β = \(\frac{A_{2}-A_{1}}{A_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
A2 = A1 [1 + β(T2 – T1)]
= 286[1 + 4.9 × 10-5 (180 – 20)]
= 286[1 + 4.9 × 10-5 × 160]
= 286 [1 + 784.0 × 10]
= 286 [1 + 0.00784]
= 286 [1.00784]
∴ A2 = 288.24 cm2
Its area when its heated is 288.24 cm2.

Question 75.
The surface area of the metal plate is 2.4 × 10-2 m2 at 20°C. When the plate is heated to 185 °C, its area increases by 0.8 cm2. Find the coefficient of areal expansion of metal.
Solution:
Given: T1 = 20 °C, A1 = 2.4 × 10-2 m2,
T2 = 185°C,
∆A = 0.8cm2 = 0.8 × 10-4 m2
To find: Coefficient of areal expansion (β)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 48
The coefficient of areal expansion of the metal is 2.02 × 10-5/ °C.

Question 76.
A liquid occupies a volume of 2 × 10-4 m3 at 0 °C. Calculate the increase in its volume If It is heated to 80 °C. [The coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid is 4 × 10-4 K-1]
Solution:
Given: V0 = 2 × 10-4 m3, T0 = 0°C,T = 80°C,
γr = 4 × 10-4 K-1,
T – T0 = 80 – 0 = 80°C
To find: Increase in volume (∆V)
Formula. ∆V = V0γr(T – T0)
Calculation: From formula.
∆V = (2 × 10-4) (4 × 10-4) × 80
∴ ∆V = 6.4 × 10-6 m3
Increase m volume of the liquid is 6.4 × 10-6 m3.

Question 77.
A liquid at O °C is poured in a glass beaker of volume 600 cm3 to fill it completely. The beaker is then heated to 90 °C. How much liquid will overflow?
liquid = 1.75 × 10-4/ °C, γglass = 2.75 × 10-5/ °C)
Solution:
Given: V1 = 600 cm3, T1 = 0 °C, T2 = 90 °C
γliquid = 1.75 × 10-4/°C,
γglass = 2.75 × 10-4/°C
To find: Volume of liquid that overflows
Formula: γ = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{2}-\mathrm{V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{2}-\mathrm{T}_{1}\right)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Increase is volume = V2 – V1
= γ V1(T2 – T1)
Increase in volume of beaker
= γglass × V1 (T2 – T1)
= 2.75 × 10-5 × 600 × (90 – 0)
= 2.75 × 10-5 × 600 × 90
= 148500 × 10-5 cm3
∴ Increase in volume of beaker = 1.485 cm3
Increase in volume of liquid
= γliquid × V1 (T2 – T1)
= 1.75 × 10-4 × 600 × (90 – 0)
= 1.75 × 10-4 × 600 × 90
= 94500 × 10-4 cm3
∴ Increase in volume of liquid = 9.45 cm3
∴ Volume of liquid which overflows
= (9.45 – 1.485) cm3
= 7.965 cm3
Volume of liquid that overflows is 7.965 cm3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 78.
The surface area of an iron plate is 80 cm2 at 20 °C. Find its surface area at 120 °C. (αiron = 1.25 × 10-5 / °C)
Solution:
Given: A1 = 80 cm2, T1 = 20 °C, T2 = 120 °C,
αiron = 1.25 × 10-5 / °C
To find: Surface area (A2)
Formula: A2 = A1 [1 + β (T2 – T1)]
Calculation: βiron = 2 × αiron = 2.5 × 10-5 / °C
From formula,
A2 = 80[1 + 2.5 × 10-5 (120 – 20)]
∴ A2 = 80.2 cm2
Surface area of the iron plate at 120 °C is 80.2 cm2.

Question 79.
A sheet of brass is 50 cm long and 8 cm broad at 0 °C. If the surface area at 100 °C is 401.57 cm2 find the coefficient of linear expansion of brass.
Solution:
Given: l = 50 cm, b = 8cm.
∴ A1 = l × b = 50 x 8 = 400 cm2,
T1 = 0°C, T2 = 100°C,
A2 = 401.57 cm2
To find: coefficient of linear expansion (α)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 49
Coefficient of linear expansion of brass is 1.962 × 10-5/°C.

Question 80.
On heating a glass block of 10.000 cm3 from 25 °C to 40 °C, its volume increases by 4 cm3. Calculate coefficient of linear elipansion of glass.
Solution:
Given: V = 10,000 cm3, ∆V = 4 cm3,
∆T = 40 – 25 = 15°C,
To find: Coefficient of linear expansion (α)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 50
Coefficient of linear expansion of the glass block is 8.89 × 10-6 /°C.

Question 81.
Explain in detail what is specific heat or specific heat capacity of a substance.
Answer:

  1. Specific heat capacity is defined as the amount of heat per unit mass absorbed or given out by the substance to change its temperature by one uni! (one degree) Le., 1 °C or 1 K.
  2. The amount of heat (∆Q) required to change the temperature of a substance is directly proportional to:
    • the mass of the substance (m).
    • change in temperature of the substance (∆T).
      ∴ ∆Q ∝ m and ∆Q ∝∆T
      ∴ ∆Q ∝ m∆T
      ∴ ∆Q = sm∆T …………….. (1)
      where ‘s’ is specific heat or specific heat capacity of a substance.
      From equation (1).
      s = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{m \Delta T}\)
      If m = 1 kg and ∆T = 1 °C,then s = ∆Q.
  3. Unit: S.I. unit of specific heat is J kg-1 °C-1 or J kg-1 K-1 and C.G.S. unit is erg g-1 K-1 or erg g-1 °C-1.
  4. Example: The specific heat of water is 4.2 J kg-1 °C-1
    It means that 4.2 J of energy must be added to 1 kg of water to rise its temperature by 1 °C.
  5. The specific heat capacity is a property of the substance.
  6. Specific heat capacity weakly depends on temperature of object. Except for very low temperatures. the specific heat capacity is almost constant for all practical purposes.

Question 82.
State the heat equation.
Answer:
Heat received or given out (Q)
= mass (m) temperature change (∆T) × specific heat capacity (s).
or Q = m × ∆T × s

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 83.
Write a note on: Molar specific heat.
Answer:

  1. If the amount of substance is specified in terms of moles (μ) instead of mass (m) in kg. then the specific heat is called molar specific heat (C).
  2. It is given by, C = \(\frac{1}{\mu} \frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\)
  3. The SI unit of molar specific heat capacity is J/mol °C or J/mol K.
  4. Like specific heat, molar specific heat also depends on the nature of the substance and its temperature.

Question 84.
Give reason: Water is used as a coolant in automobile radiators.
Answer:

  1. Water has the highest specific heat capacity compared to other substances.
  2. As a result, water requires higher amount of energy to get heated.
  3. This allows water to absorb heat readily while increasing its temperature minimally.
    Hence, water is used as a coolant in automobile radiators.

Question 85.
Give reason: Water is preferred as heater in hot water hag than other liquids.
Answer:

  1. Water has the highest specific heat capacity compared to other substances.
  2. This means certain mass of water heated to certain temperature contains more heat than the same mass of any other liquid heated to same temperature.
  3. As a result, water takes longer time to cool than any other liquid heated to same temperature.
    Hence, water is preferred as heater in hot water bag than other liquids.

Question 86.
Explain why specific heat capacity of a gas at constant pressure is greater than that at constant volume.
Answer:

  1. When the gas is heated at constant volume. there is no work done against external pressure.
  2. Hence, all the supplied heat is used in raising the temperature of the gas.
  3. But when the gas is heated at constant pressure, volume of the gas changes.
  4. Due to this, part of the supplied heat is used by the gas to expand against external pressure and remaining part of heat supplied is used to raise the temperature.
  5. Because of this, for the same rise in temperature, the heat to be supplied at constant pressure is greater than that for heating at constant volume.
    Hence, specific heat capacity of a gas at constant pressure is greater than specific heat capacity at constant volume.

Question 87.
Define principal and molar specific heat of a gas at constant volunie and constant pressure.
Answer:

  1. Principal specific heat:
    • Principal specific heat of a gas at constant volume (sv):
      Principal specific heat of a gas at constant volume is defined as the quantity of heat absorbed or released for rise or fall temperature of unit mass of a gas through 1 K (or 1 °C), when its volume is kept constant.
    • Principal specific heat of a gas at constant pressure (sp): Principal specfic heat of a gas at constant pressure is defined as the quantity of heat absorbed or released for rise or fall the temperature of unit mass of a gas through 1 K (or 1 °C), when its pressure is kept constant.
  2. Molar specific heat:
    • Molar specific heat of a gas at constant volume (CV): Molar specific heat of a gas at Constant volume is defined as the quantity of absorbed or released for rise or fall the temperature of one mole of the gas through 1 K (or 1 °C), when its volume is kept constant.
    • Molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure (CP): Molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure is defined as the quantity of heat absorbed or released for rise or fall the temperature of one mole of the gas through 1 K (or 1 °C), when its pressure is kept constant.

Question 88.
State the relation between principal specific heat capacity and molar specific heat capacity for a gas.
Answer:
Molar specific heat capacity = Molecular weight × principal specific heat capacity.
i.e. CV = μ × SP and CV = μ × SV
where, μ is the molecular weight of the gas.
[Note: Symbols (SV) and (SP) are used as per standard convention.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 89.
What is heat capacity?
Answer:

  1. Heat capacity or thermal capacity of a body is the quantity of heat needed to raise or lower the temperature of the whole body by 1 o°C (or 1 K).
  2. Heat capacity can be written as Heat received or given out
    = mass × 1 × specific heat capacity
    Heat capacity = Q = m × s
    Heat capacity (thermal capacity) is measured in J/°C.

Solved Examples

Question 90.
If the temperature of 4 kg mass of a material of specific heat capacity 300 J/ kg °C rises from 20 °C to 30 °C. Find the heat received.
Solution:
m = 4 kg, s = 300 J/kg °C
∆T = 30 – 20 = 10 °C
To find: Heat received (Q)
Formula: Q = ms∆T
Calculation: From formula,
Q = 4 × 300 × 10
∴ Q = 12000 J
Heat received is 12000 J.

Question 91.
How much heat is required to raise temperature of 750 g of copper pot from 20 to 50 °C?
(The specific heat of copper is 0.094 kcal/kg °C)
Solution:
Given: s = 0.094 kcal/kg°C,
m = 750 g = 0.750kg,
T1 = 20°C and T2 = 50°C
Rise in temperature,
∆T = T2 – T1 = 50 – 20 = 30°C
To find: Heat required (Q)
Formula: Q = m × s × ∆T
Calculation: From formula,
Q = 0.750 × 0.094 × 30
∴ Q = 2.115 kcal
Heat required to raise the temperature of copper pot is 2.115 kcal.

Question 92.
Calculate the difference in the temperatures between the water at the top and bottom of a water fall 200 m high. Specific heat of water is 4200 J kg-1 °C-1.
Solution:
Given: s = 4200 J kg-1 °C-1, h = 200 m
To find: Difference in temperatures (∆T)
Formulae:
i) Q = ms∆T
ii) P.E. = mgh
Calculation: From formulae (j) and (ii)
When water falls from top to bottom. assuming no loss in energy, potential energy is converted into heat energy.
∴ Q = P.E.
∴ ms∆T = mgh
∴ s∆T = gh
∴ ∆T = \(\frac{\mathrm{gh}}{\mathrm{s}}=\frac{9.8 \times 200}{4200}\)
∴ ∆T = 0.467 °C
The difference in temperatures between the water at top and bottom is 0.467 °C.

Question 93.
Find thermal capacity for a copper block of mass 0.2 kg, if specific heat capacity of copper is 290 J/kg °C.
Solution:
Given: m = 0.2 kg, s = 290 J/kg °C
To find: Thermal capacity
Formula: Thermal capacity = m × s
Calculation: From formula,
Thermal capacity = 0.2 × 290
= 58 J/ °C
Thermal capacity is 58 J/ °C.

Question 94.
What is calorimetry?
Answer:
Calorimetry is an experimental technique for quantitative measurement of heat exchange.

Question 95.
Explain construction of calorimeter with the help of a labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. A device in which heat measurement can be made is called calorimeter.
  2. It consists of a cylindrical vessel and stirrer as well as lid of the same material like copper or aluminium.
  3. The vessel is kept inside a wooden jacket which contains heat insulating materials like glass. wool etc. to prohibit any transfer of heat into or out of the calorimeter.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 26

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 96.
State the principle behind working of calorimeter.
Answer:
Calorimeter being isolated system works on the principle of conservation of energy, where heat gained equals heat lost.

Question 97.
Explain the technique “method of mixtures’.
Answer:

  1. Method of mixtures is a technique used to determine specific heat capacity of a material using calorimeter.
  2. In this technique a sample ‘A’ of the substance is heated to a high temperature which is accurately measured.
  3. The sample ‘A’ is then placed quickly in the calorimeter containing water.
  4. The contents are stirred constantly until the mixture attains a final common temperature.
  5. The heat lost by the sample ‘A’ will be gained by the water and the calorimeter.
  6. The specific heat of the sample ‘A’ of the substance can be calculated as follows:
    • Let,
      m1 = mass of the sample ‘A’
      m22 = mass of the calorimeter and the stirrer
      m3 = mass of the water in calorimeter
      s1 = specific heat capacity of the substance of sample ‘A’
      s2 = specific heat capacity of the material of calorimeter (and stirrer)
      s3 = specific heat capacity of water
      T1 = initial temperature of the sample ’A’
      T2 = initial temperature of the calorimeter stirrer and water
      T = final temperature of the combined system
    • Using heat equation,
      Heat lost by the sample ‘A’ = m1s1 (T1 – T)
      Heat gained by the calorimeter and the stirrer = m2s2 (T – T2)
      Heat gained by the water = m3s3 (T – T2)
    • c. Assuming no loss of heat to the surroundings, the heat lost by the sample goes into the calorimeter, stirrer and water,
      ∴ m1s1(T1 – T) = m2s2(T – T2) + m3s3(T – T2) ………….. (1)
    • Knowing the specific heat capacity of water and copper material of the calorimeter and the stirrer, specific heat capacity (si) of material of sample ‘A’ can be calculated.
      e. Rearranging terms of equation (1),
      s1 = \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{~s}_{2}+\mathrm{m}_{3} \mathrm{~s}_{3}\right)\left(\mathrm{T}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right)}{\mathrm{m}_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}\right)}\)
  7. One can find specific heat capacity of water or any liquid using the following expression, if the specific heat capacity of the material of calorimeter and sample is known
    s3 = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~s}_{1}\left(\mathrm{~T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}\right)}{\mathrm{m}_{3}\left(\mathrm{~T}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right)}-\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{~s}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{3}}\)

Question 98.
In method of mixtures, why is it essential that density of solid sample be greater than the liquid in calorimeter?
Answer:

  1. In method of mixtures, solid sample gives away heat to liquid, and heat exchange between, solid, liquid and calorimeter is considered as isolated.
  2. If density of solid sample is lesser than liquid in calorimeter, sample will float on liquid.
  3. This will cause partial heat loss to air inside the calorimeter and standard heat equations of calorimeter will no longer be applicable.
    Hence, in method of mixtures it is essential that density of solid sample be greater than liquid in calorimeter.

Solved Examples

Question 99.
A sphere of aluminium of 0.06 kg is placed for sufficient time in a vessel containing boiling water so that the sphere is at 100 °C. It is then immediately transferred to 0.12 kg copper calorimeter containing 0.30 kg of water at 25 °C. The temperature of water rises and attains a steady state at 28 °C. Calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
(Specific heat capacity of water, sw = 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1, specific heat capacity of copper, sCu = 0.387 × 103 J kg-1 K-1)
Solution:
Given: Mass of aluminium sphere = m1 = 0.06 kg
Mass of copper calorimeter = m2 = 0.12 kg
Mass of water in calorimeter = m3 = 0.30 kg
Specific heat capacity of copper
= SCu = s2 = 0.387 × 103 J/kg K = 387 J/kg K
Specific heat capacity of water
= Sw = s3 = 4.18 × 103 J/kg K = 4180 J/kg K
Initial temperature of aluminium sphere
= T1 = 100 °C
Initial temperature of calorimeter and water
= T2 = 25 °C
Final temperature of the mixture = T = 28 °C
To find: Specific heat capacity of aluminium (sal)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 27
= 903.08 J/kg K
Specific heat capacity of aluminium is 903.08 J/kg K.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 100.
A copper sphere of 100 g mass is heated to raise its temperature to 100 °C and is released in water of mass 195 g and temperature 20 °C in a copper calorimeter. If the mass of calorimeter is 50 g, what will be the maximum temperature of water? (Given: specific heat of copper = 0.1 cal/g °C and specific heat of calorimeter = 0.1 cal/g °C)
Solution:
Let copper sphere, water and calorimeter attain final temperature T °C.
We have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 28
Heat lost by copper sphere
Q = msphere × Ssphere × ∆T
= 100 × 0.1 × (100 – T)
Heat gained by water in calorimeter
Q1 = mwater × Swater × ∆T
= 195 × 1 × (T – 20)
Heat gained by calorimeter
Q2 = mcalorimeter × mcalorimeter × ∆T
= 50 × 0.1 × (T – 20)
According to principle of heat exchange,
Q = Q1 + Q2
∴ 10 × (100 – T) = 195 × (T – 20) + 5 × (T – 20)
∴ 1000 – 10T = 200(T – 20)
∴ 210 T = 5000
∴ T ≈ 23.8 °C
Maximum temperature of water will be 23.8 °C.

Question 101.
What is a change of state? When does it occur?
Answer:

  1. Matter normally exists in three states: solid. liquid and gas. A transition from one of these states to another is called a change of state.
  2. This change can occur when exchange of heat takes place between the substance and its surroundings.

Question 102.
Explain the following temperature vs time graph obtained during process of boiling water.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 29
Variation of temperature with time
Answer:

  1. The given temperature v/s time graph demonstrates the behaviour of water when heated continuously and uniformly.
  2. Line segment AB indicates temperature of ice remaining constant at 0 °C for certain period of time.
    • This means, amount of heat (latent heat of fusion) supplied to ice is entirely used for changing its state from solid to liquid.
    • Thus, line segment AB denotes conversion of ice at 0 °C into water at 0 °C.
  3. Line segment BC indicates continuous rise in temperature of water from 0 °C to 100 °C.
    • At point C, boiling point of water is
      reached and heat energy (latent heat of vaporisation) supplied further is used to convert water into steam.
    • During this transformation, temperature remains unchanged as represented by line segment CD.
    • Thus, line segment CD denotes conversion of water at 100 °C into steam at 100 °C.
  4. Beyond point D, thermometer again shows rise in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 103.
Write a note on latent heat of substance.
Answer:

  1. Latent heat of a substance is the quantity of heat required to change the state of unit mass of the substance without changing its temperature.
  2. Mathematically, if mass m of a substance undergoes a change from one state to the other then the quantity of heat absorbed or released is given by, Q = mL
    where. L is known as latent heat.
  3. It is characteristic of the substance.
  4. Its SI unit is J/kg.
  5. The value of L depends on the pressure and is usually quoted at one standard atmospheric pressure.

Question 104.
Explain the following terms.
i) Latent heat of fusion
ii) Latent heat of vaporisation
Answer:

  1. Latent heat of fusion:
    • The quantity of heat required to convert unit mass of a substance from its solid state to the liquid state, at its melting point, without any change in its temperature is called its latent heat of fusion.
    • The S.I. unit of latent heat of fusion is J/kg and its C.G.S. unit is cal/’g.
  2. Latent heat of vaporisation:
    • The quantity of heat required to convert unit mass of a substance from its liquid state to vapour state, at its boiling point, without any change in its temperature is called its latent heat of vaporisation.
    • The S.I. unit of latent heat of vaporization is J/kg and its C.G.S unit is cal/g.

Question 105.
Explain why latent heat of vaporisation is much larger than latent heat of fusion.
Answer:

  1. The energy required to completely separate the molecules or atoms in liquids is greater than the energy needed to break the rigidity (rigid bonds between the molecules or atoms) in solids.
  2. Also, when the liquid is converted into vapour, it expands. Work has to be done against the surrounding atmosphere to allow this expansion.
    Hence, latent heat of vaporisation is larger than latent heat of fusion.

Question 106.
A plot of temperature versus heat energy for a given quantity of water is shown below. What can be inferred studying it?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 30
Temperature versus heat for water at one standard atmospheric pressure (not to scale)
Answer:
Inferences:

  1. When heat is added (or removed) during a change of state, the temperature remains constant.
  2. Also the slopes of the phase lines are not all the same, which indicates that specific heats of the various states are not equal.
  3. For water, the latent heat of fusion and vaporisation are Lf = 3.33 × 105 J kg-1 and Lv = 22.6 × 105 J kg-1 respectively, i.e., 3.33 × 105 J of heat is needed to melt 1 kg of ice at 0 °C and 22.6 × 105 J of heat is needed to convert 1 kg of water to steam at 100 °C.
  4. This means, steam at 100 °C carries 22.6 × 105 J kg-1 more heat than water at 100 °C.

Question 107.
Compare change of state from solid to liquid and from liquid to vapour.
Answer:

Solid to liquid Liquid to vapour
i. The change of state from solid to liquid is called melting and from liquid to solid is called solidification. The change of state from liquid to vapour is called vaporisation while that from vapour to liquid is called condensation.
ii. Both the solid and liquid states of the substance co-exist in thermal equilibrium during the change of states from solid to liquid or vice versa. Both the liquid and vapour states of the substance coexists in thermal equilibrium during the change of state from liquid to vapour.
iii. The temperature at which the solid and the liquid states of the substance are in thermal equilibrium with each other is called the melting point of solid or freezing point of liquid. The freezing point describes the liquid to solid transition while melting point describes solid to liquid transition. The temperature at which the liquid and the vapour states of the substance coexist is called the boiling point of liquid. This is also the temperature at which water vapour condenses to form liquid.
iv. It is the characteristic of the substance and also depends on pressure. It is characteristic of substance and depends on pressure.

Question 108.
What is normal melting point?
Answer:
The melting point of a substance at one standard atmospheric pressure is called its normal melting point.
Example: Normal melting point of water is 0°C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 109.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
Normal freezing point ice is 32 °C.
Answer:
False.
Normal freezing point ice is 0 °C or 32 °F.

Question 110.
What is normal boiling point?
Answer:
The boiling point of a substance at one standard atmospheric pressure is called its normal boiling point.
Example: Normal boiling point of water is 99.97 °C,

Question 111.
Distinguish between boiling and evaporation of liquid.
Answer:

Boiling of liquid Evaporation of liquid
i. Boiling of liquid takes place at boiling point which is fixed for a given pressure and unique for a given liquid. Evaporation of liquid can take place at any temperature.
ii. It occurs throughout the liquid. It occurs only at surface of liquid.
iii. The process does not depend on area of liquid surface exposed. The process depends upon area of liquid surface exposed. Higher the exposed surface area, higher the rate of evaporation.
iv. Source of energy is needed. Energy is taken from surrounding.
V. Boiling does not reduce temperature of liquid. When evaporation takes place, temperature of liquid decreases.
vi. During boiling process, bubbles are formed in liquid. During evaporation, no bubbles are formed in liquid.

Question 112.
Explain evaporation in terms of kinetic energy of liquid molecules.
Answer:

  1. Molecules in a liquid are moving about randomly.
  2. The average kinetic energy of the molecules decides the temperature of the liquid.
  3. However, all molecules do not move with the same speed.
  4. Some with higher kinetic energy may escape from the surface region by overcoming the interatomic forces.
  5. This process can take place at any temperature and is termed as evaporation.

Question 113.
Explain the dependence of evaporation on temperature of liquid.
Answer:

  1. If the temperature of the liquid is higher, more is the average kinetic energy.
  2. This implies that the number of fast moving molecules is more.
  3. Hence the rate of losing such molecules to atmosphere will be higher.
  4. Thus, higher is the temperature of the liquid, greater is the rate of evaporation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 114.
Why does evaporation gives a cooling effect to the remaining liquid?
Answer:

  1. In the process of evaporation, faster moving molecules escape from surface of liquid overcoming the interatomic forces.
  2. Since faster molecules are lost, the average kinetic energy of the liquid is reduced.
  3. As a result, the temperature of the liquid is lowered.
    Hence, evaporation gives a cooling effect to the remaining liquid.

Question 115.
Explain two applications of evaporation in details.
Answer:

  1. Drying of clothes:
    • Clothes dry faster when hanged exposing more surface area than when kept folded.
    • Due to more surface area, water in clothes gets evaporated faster, drying clothes quickly.
  2. Using a spirit swab on skin before injecting gives cooling effect:
    • Before giving an injection to a patient, normally a spirit swab is used to disinfect the region.
    • A cooling effect is experienced by skin of patient due to evaporation of the spirit as explained before.

Question 116.
Write a note on sublimation.
Answer:

  1. All substances do not pass through the three states: solid-liquid-gas.
  2. There are certain substances which normally pass from the solid to the vapour state directly and vice versa.
  3. The change from solid state to vapour state without passing through the liquid state is called sublimation and the substance is said to sublime.
    Examples: Dry ice (solid CO2) and iodine.
  4. During the sublimation process, both the solid and vapour states of a substance coexist in thermal equilibrium.
  5. Most substances sublime at very low pressures.

Question 117.
What is a phase? Give an example.
Answer:
A phase is a homogeneous composition of a material.
Example: Graphite and diamond are two phases of carbon.

Question 118.
What is a phase diagram?
Answer:
A pressure-temperature (P-T) diagram particularly convenient for comparing different phases of a substance is called as a phase diagram.

Question 119.
Study phase diagrams given below and answer the following questions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 31
i)Explain vaporisation curve (l – v).
ii) Explain fusion curve (l – s).
iii) Explain sublimation curve (s – v).
iv) Explain triple point.
Answer:

    • The curve labelled l – v represents those points where the liquid and vapour phases are in equilibrium.
    • It is a graph of boiling point versus pressure.
    • The l – v curve of water correctly shows that at a pressure of 1 atmosphere, the boiling point of water is 100 °C and the boiling point gets lowered for a decreased pressure.
    • The l – v curve for CO2 yields that CO2 cannot exist as a liquid under normal atmospheric pressure conditions.
    • The curve l – s represents the points where the solid and liquid phases coexist in equilibrium.
    • It is a graph of the freezing point versus pressure.
    • At one standard atmosphere pressure, the freezing point of water is 0 °C which can be depicted using l – s curve of water.
    • At a pressure of one standard atmosphere water is in the liquid phase if the temperature is between 0 °C and 100 °C but is in the solid or vapour phase if the temperature is below 0 °C or above 100 °C.
    • Also, l – s curve for water slopes upward to the left i.e., fusion curve of water has a slightly negative slope.
    • This is true only of substances that expand upon freezing.
    • However, for most materials like CO2, the l – s curve slopes upwards to the right i.e., fusion curve has a positive slope. The melting point of C02 is -56 °C at higher pressure of 5.11 atm.
    • The curve labelled s – v is the sublimation point versus pressure curve.
    • Water sublimates at pressure less than 0.0060 atmosphere, while carbon dioxide, which in the solid state is called dry ice, sublimates even at atmospheric pressure at temperature as low as -78 °C.
    • The temperature and pressure at which the fusion curve, the vaporisation curve and the sublimation curve meet and all the three phases of a substance coexist is called the triple point of the substance.
    • The triple point of water is that point where water in solid, liquid and gaseous states coexist in equilibrium and this occurs only at a unique temperature and pressure.
    • The triple point of water is 273.16 K and 6.11 × 10-3 Pa and that of CO2 is -56.6 °C and 5.1 × 10 -5 Pa.

Question 120.
What is critical temperature of a gas?
Answer:
In order to liquefy a gas, it must be cooled to a certain temperature. This temperature is called critical temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 121.
Compare gas and vapour.
Answer:

Gas

Vapour

i. A substance that is in gaseous phase above its critical temperature is called a gas. A substance that is in gaseous phase below its critical temperature is call vapour.
ii. Gas cannot be liquified only by pressure alone. Vapour can be liquified simply by increasing pressure.
iii. Gas exerts pressure. Vapour exerts pressure

Solved Examples

Question 122.
Calculate the amount of heat energy to be supplied to convert 2 kg of ice at 0 °C completely into water at 0 °C if latent heat of fusion for ice is 80 cal/g.
Solution:
Given:
Mass (m) = 2 kg = 2 × 103 g. latent heat of fusion for ice (L) = 80 cal/g.
To find: Heat energy (Q)
Formula: Q = mL
From formula,
Q = 2 x× 103 × 80 = 160000 cal
= 160 kcal
Heat energy to be supplied is 160 kcal.

Question 123.
When 0.1 kg of ice at 0 °C is mixed with 0.32 kg of water at 35 °C in a container. The resulting temperature of the mixture is 7.8 °C. calculate the heat of fusion of ice (swater = 4186 J kg-1 K-1).
Solution:
Given:
mice = 0.1 kg, mwater = 0.32 kg,
Tice = 0 °C, Twater = 35 °C, TF = 7.8 °C
swater = 4186 J kg-1 K-1
To find: Heat of fusion (Lf)

Formula: i) Heat lost by water
Q1 = mwater × swater × (Twater – TF)
ii) Heat required to melt ice
Q2 = mice LF
iii) Heat required to raise temperature of molten ice (water now) to find temperature
Q3 = miceswater (T – Tice)
Calculation: From formula (j),
Q1 = 0.32 × 4186 × (35 – 7.8)
= 36434.944 J
From formula (ii),
Q2 = 0.1 × Lf
From formula (iii),
Q3 = 0.1 × 4186 × (7.8 – 0) = 3265.08J
According to principle of heat conservation,
heat lost = heat gained
Q1 = Q2 + Q3
∴ 36434.944 = 0.1 Lf + 3265.08
∴ Lf = \(\frac{36434.944-3265.08}{0.1}\)
= 331698.64 J kg-1
Rounding off to correct significant figure,
Lf = 3.31699 × 105 J kg-1
Heat of fusion of ice 3.3 1699 × 10 5 J kg-1.

Question 124.
If 80 g steam of temperature 97 °C is released on an ¡ce slab of temperature 0 °C, how much ice will melt? How much energy will be transferred to the ice when the steam will be transformed to water?
(Given: Latent heat of melting the ice = Lmelt =80 cal/g ; Latent heat of vaporisation of water Lvap = 540 cal/g)
Solution:
Mass of steam (ms) = 80 g,
Change in temperature (∆T)
= 97 – 0 = 97 °C
We know that: Latent heat of melting of ice = Lmelt = 80 cal/g
Latent heat of vaporisation of water = Lvap = 540 cal/g
Specific heat of water cw = 1 cal /g °C
To find: i) Energy transferred (Q)
ii) Mass of ice that melts (mi)

Formula: i) Heat released during conversion of steam into water at 97 °C (Q1)= ms × Lvap
ii) Heat released during decrease of temperature of water from 97°C to 0°C (Q2) = ms × cw × ∆T
iii) Heat gained by ice (Q)= mi × Lmelt

From formula (i),
Q1 = 80 × 540 cal
From formula (ii),
Q2 = 80 × 1 × (97 – 0) = 80 × 97 cal
According to principle of heat conservation,
Total heat gained by ice
Q = Q1 + Q2
= 80 × 540 + 80 × 97
= 80 × (540 + 97)
= 80 × 637
= 50960 cal
This energy would cause m; mass of ice to melt,
From formula (iii),
∴ mi × Lmelt = 50960
∴ mi = \(\frac{50960}{80}=\frac{80 \times 637}{80}\) = 637 g
Energy transferred to ice is 50960 cal and it will melt 637 g of ice.

Question 125.
Name three modes of heat transfer.
Answer:
Three modes of heat transfer are conduction, convection and radiation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 126.
Define conduction. State conditions for conduction of heat.
Answer:
Conduction is the process by which heat flows from the hot end to the cold end of a solid body without any net bodily movement of the particles of the body.
Conditions for conduction:

  1. The two points should be at different temperatures.
  2. There should be a medium between the two points.

Question 127.
Explain process of conduction in solid.
Answer:

  1. Heat passes through solids by conduction only.
  2. When one end of a rod is heated, the molecules near the hot end receive the thermal energy and start oscillating with larger amplitudes.
  3. In doing so, they collide with the neighbouring molecules and transfer a part of their energy to these molecules.
  4. The molecules which receive the energy vibrate with increased amplitudes and collide with the neighbouring molecules. Thus, energy of thermal motion is transferred by molecular collisions down the rod.
  5. As the distance of a molecule from the hot end increases, its amplitude of oscillation decreases and hence there is continuous decrease in temperature.
  6. This transfer of heat continues till two ends of the object are at the same temperature.
  7. In metals, mainly free electrons conduct the heat energy.

Question 128.
Define good conductors and bad conductors.
Answer:
Good conductors:
The substances which conduct heat easily are called good conductors of heat.
All metals are good conductor.
eg: Steel, silver, Aluminium etc.

Insulators:
The substances which do nor conduct heal easily are called insulators or bad condiciors of heal.
eg.: Glass. wood, air, paper. etc.
[Note: In general, good conductors of heat are also good conductors of electricity, while bad conductors of hear are had conductors of electricity.]

Question 129.
Explain why metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.
Answer:

  1. Metals like iron, copper. aluminium etc, contain free electrons in their atoms.
  2. These free electrons assist the atoms in transfer of thermal energy as well as electrical energy.
  3. Therefore, metal are good conductors of heat and electricity.

Question 130.
What is thermal conductivity?
Answer:

  • Thermal conductivity of a solid is a measure of the ability of the solid ¡o conduct heat through it.
  • Thus good conductors of heat have higher thermal conductivity than bad conductors.

Question 131.
Give reason: Hot water when poured in glass beaker, it cracks.
Answer:

  1. When hot water is poured in a glass beaker the inner surface of the glass expends on heating.
  2. Since glass is a bad conductor of heat, the heat from inside does not reach the outside surface so quickly.
  3. Hence the outer surface does not expand thereby causing a crack in the glass.

Question 132.
Explain mechanism of thermal conduction and temperature gradient.
Answer:

  1. When one end of a metal rod is heated, the heat flows by conduction from hot end to the cold end.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 32
  2. As a result, the temperature of every section of the rod starts increasing.
  3. Under this condition, the rod is said to be in a variable temperature state.
  4. After some time, the temperature at each section of the rod becomes steady i.e., does not change.
  5. Temperature of each cross-section of the rod now becomes constant though not the same. This is called steady state condition.
  6. Under steady state condition, the temperature at points within the rod decreases uniformly with distance from the hot end to the cold end.
  7. The fall of temperature with distance between the ends of the rod in the direction of flow of heat, is called temperature gradient.
    ∴ Temperature gradient = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{x}}\)
    Where, T1 = temperature of hot end
    T2 = temperature of cold end
    x = length of the rod

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 133.
State SI unit and dimensions of temperature gradient.
Answer:
S.I unit: = °C /m or K/m
Dimensions: [L-1M0T0K1]

Question 134.
State S.I. unit and dimensions of coefficient of thermal conductivity.
Answer:
SI unit of coefficient of thermal conductivity is J s-1 m-1 °C-1 or J s-1 m-1 K-1 and its dimensions are [L1M1T3K-1].

Question 135.
Explain how SI unit of coefficient of thermal conductivity be obtained as W/m °C or W/m K.
Answer:

  1. Consider equation, \(\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{k A\left(T_{1}-T_{2}\right)}{x}\)
  2. The quantity Q/t, denoted by Pcond, is the time rate of heat flow (i.e. heat flow per second) from the hotter face to the colder face, at right angles to the faces.
  3. Its SI unit is watt (W).
  4. SI unit of k can therefore be written as W m-1°C-1 or W m-1 K-1.
    [Note: Above equation, using calculus can be written as, \(\frac{d Q}{d t}\) = – kA \(\frac{d T}{d x}\), where \(\frac{d T}{d x}\) is the temperature gradient. The negative sign indicates that heat flow is in the direction of decreasing temperature. If A = 1 m2 and \(\frac{d T}{d x}\) = 1, then \(\frac{d Q}{d t}\) = k.]

Question 136.
Define coefficient of thermal conductivity in terms of temperature gradient.
Answer:
Coefficient of thermal conductivity of a material is defined as the rate of flow of heat per unit area per unit temperature gradient when the heat flow is at right angles to the faces of a thin parallel-sided slab of material.

Question 137.
Define conduction rate.
Answer:
Conduction rate (Pcond) is the amount of energy transferred per unit time through a slab of area A and thickness x, the two sides of the slab being at temperatures T1, and T2 (T1 > T2),
and is given Pcond = \(\frac{Q}{t}\) = kA \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right)}{\mathrm{x}}\)

Question 138.
Explain the analogy between electrical resistance and thermal resistance.
Answer:

  1. Electrical resistance is ratio of \(\frac{V}{I}\) where, V is electrical potential difference between two ends of conductor and I is current or rate flow of charge.
  2. Consider expression for conduction rate,
    Pcond = kA \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right)}{\mathrm{x}}\)
    ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{cond}}}=\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{kA}}\) ……………… (1)
  3. Comparing equation (1) with \(\frac{V}{I}\), (T1 – T2) is temperature difference between two ends and Pcond is rate of flow of heat.
  4. Ratio \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {cond }}}\) is called as thermal resistance (RT) of material.
  5. Using (1), thermal resistance RT = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{kA}}\)
  6. Thermal resistance depends on the material and dimensions (length / breadth) of object.

Question 139.
What is thermal resistivity? What does it depend upon?
Answer:
i. Thermal resistivity (ρT) is the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k).
ii. It is characteristic of a material.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 140.
Complete the table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 33
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 34

Question 141.
Define convection.
Answer:
The process by which heat is transmitted through a substance from one point to another due to actual bodily movement of the heated particles of the substance is called convection.

Question 142.
Describe the mechanism of heat transfer by convection in liquids and gases.
Answer:

  1. Consider liquid being heated in a vessel from below.
  2. The liquid at the bottom of the vessel is heated
    first and consequently its density decreases i.e., liquid molecules at the bottom are separated farther apart.
  3. These hot molecules have high kinetic energy and rise upward to cold region while the molecules from cold region come down to take their place.
  4. Thus, each molecule at the bottom gets heated and rises then cool and descends.
  5. This action sets up the flow of liquid molecules called convection currents.
  6. The convection currents transfer heat to the entire mass of liquid via actual physical movement of the liquid molecules.
  7. Similar process takes place in case of a gas.

Question 143.
Give two applications of convection.
Answer:

  1. Heating and cooling of rooms:
    • The mechanism of heating a room by a heater is entirely based on convection.
    • The air molecules in immediate contact with the heater are heated up.
    • These air molecules acquire sufficient energy and rise upward.
    • The cool air at the top being denser moves down to take their place. This cool air in turn gets heated and moves upward.
    • In this way, convection currents are set up in the room which transfer heat to different parts of the room.
    • The same principle but in opposite direction is used to cool a room by an air-conditioner.
  2. Cooling of transformers:
    • Due to current flowing in the windings of the transformer, enormous heat is produced.
    • Therefore, transformer is always kept in a tank containing oil.
    • The oil in contact with transformer body heats up, creating convection currents.
    • The warm oil comes in contact with the cooler tank, gives heat to it and descends to the bottom. It again warms up to rise upward.
    • This process is repeated again and again. The heat of the transformer is thus carried away by convection to the cooler tank.
    • The cooler tank, in turn loses its heat by convection to the surrounding air.

Question 144.
Distinguish between free convection and forced convection.
Answer:

Free convection Forced convection
i. When a hot body is in contact with air under ordinary conditions, like air around a firewood, the air removes heat from the body by aprocess called free or natural convection. The convection process can be accelerated by employing a fan to create a rapid circulation of fresh air. This is called forced convection.
ii. Land and sea breezes are formed as a result of free convection currents in air. Heat convector, air conditioner, heat radiators in IC engine etc. operate using forced convection.

Question 145.
Define radiation.
Answer:
The transfer of heat energy from one place to another via emission of electromagnetic (EM) energy (in a straight line with the speed of light) without heating the intervening medium is called radiation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 146.
Compare conduction, convection and radiation.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 35
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 36

Solved Examples

Question 147.
The temperature difference between two sides of an iron plate. 2 cm thick, is 10 °C. Heat is transmitted through the plate at the rate of 600 kcal per minute per square metre at steady state. Find the thermal conductivity of iron.
Solution:
Given: \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\mathrm{At}}\) = 600 kcal/min m2 = \(\frac{600}{60}\) kcal/s m2
= 10 kcal/s m2
x = 2cm = 2 × 10-2 m
T1 – T2 = 10°C
To Find.- Thermal conductivity (k)
Formula: Q = \(\frac{\mathrm{kA}\left(\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}\right) \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{x}}\)
Calculation: From formula.
∴ k = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{\mathrm{At} \mathrm{t}} \frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}=\frac{10 \times 2 \times 10^{-2}}{10}\)
= 0.02 kcal / m s
Thermal conductivity is 0.02 kcal / m s °C.

Question 148.
Calculate the rate of loss of heat through a glass window of area 1000 cm2 and thickness of 4 mm. when temperature inside is 27 °C and outside is – 5 °C. Coefficient of thermal conductivity of glass is 0.022 cal /s cm °C.
Solution:
Given: A = 1000 cm2 1000 × 10 m2
k = 0.22 cal / s cm °C
= 0.22 × 102 cal/ m °C
x = 4mm = 0.4 × 10-2 m
T1 = 27°C, T2 = -5°C
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 37
= 1.76 × 103 cal/s = 1.76kcal / s
Rate of loss of heat is 1.76 kcal / s.

Question 149.
Heat is conducted through a copper plate at the rate of 460 cal/s-cm2. Calculate the temperature gradient when the steady state is reached. (kcopper = 92 cal/m-s °C)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 38
Temperature gradient of the copper plate is 5°C/m.

Question 150.
Two parallel slabs of metals A and B of thickness 5 cm and 3 cm respectively are joined together. The outer face of the metal A is maintained at 100 °C and that of metal B is maintained at 40 °C. If the thermal conductivities of metal A and B are 0.045 kcal/m-s K and 0.015 kcal/m-s K respectively, find the temperature of the interface of two plates.
Solution:
For metal A:
T1 = 100 °C, T2 = θ
dx1= 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m,
k1 = 0.045 kcal/m-s K
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 39
∴ 9(100 – T) = 5(T – 40)
∴ 900 – 9T = 5T – 200
∴ 14T = 1100
∴ T = 78.57°C
Temperature of the interlace of two plates is 78.57 °C.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 151.
What is the rate of energy loss in watt per square metre through a glass window 5 mm thick if outside temperature in -20 °C and inside temperature is 25 °C? (kglass = 1 W/m K)
Solution:
Given:
kglass = 1W/m K, T1 = 25 °C, T2 = -20 °C
T1 – T2 = 25- (-20)°C = 45 °C
X = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3 m
As one degree celsius equates to one kelvin, temperature difference of 450 C equals 45 K.
To find: Rate of energy loss per square metre \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\text {cond }}}{\mathrm{A}}\right)\)
Formula: Pcond = \(\frac{Q}{t}=k A \frac{T_{1}-T_{2}}{x}\)
Calcula lion: From formula,
∴ The energy loss per square metre,
\(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\text {oond }}}{\mathrm{A}}=\mathrm{k} \frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}-\mathrm{T}_{2}}{\mathrm{x}}=\frac{1 \times 45}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 9 × 103 W/m2
Rate of energy loss per square metre is 9 × 103 W/m2.

Question 152.
A metal sphere cools at the rate of 1.6 °C/min when its temperature is 70 °C. At what rate will it cool when its temperature is 40 °C? The temperature of surroundings is 30 °C.
Solution:
Given: T1 = 70°C, T2 = 40 °C, T3 = 30 °C
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 40
= 0.4 (40 – 30)
= 0.4 °C/mm
Rate of cooling is 0.4 °C/mm.

Question 153.
A body cools at the rate of 0.5 °C/s when it is at 50 °C above the surrounding temperature. What is its rate of cooling when ¡t is at 30 °C above the surrounding temperature?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 41
Divide equation (2) by (1),
\(\frac{\left(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)_{2}}{0.5}=\frac{\mathrm{C}(30)}{\mathrm{C}(50)}\)
∴ \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\right)_{2}\) = 0.5 × \(\frac{30}{50}\) = 0.3 °C/s
The rate of cooling of the body at 30 °C above the surrounding temperature is 0.3 °C/s.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 154.
A metre scale made up of aluminium (αa = 24 × 10-6 /°C) measures length of a steel rod (αs = 12 × 10-6 /°C) at room temperature as 50.00 cm. Now the temperature of the room is increased by 100 °C. What can be said about the measured length of the rod at new temperature?
Answer:
At new temperature T °C,
change in length of rod is,
∆Ls = L0s∆T) = 50.00(12 × 10-6 × 100)
= 0.06 cm.
Hence, the actual length of rod at T °C,
Ls = 50.06 cm
Due to change in temperature, along with rod, the scale will also increase in length.
For aluminium, at T °C,
∆La = L0a∆t) = 100.00 × 24 × 10-6 × 100
= 0.24 cm
∴ Length of the scale will be,
La = 100.24 cm
As, the expansion in scale is more than that in rod, the reading recorded by the scale at t°C will be less than 50 cm.

Question 155.
A mercury thermometer calibrated to measure temperature in Fahrenheit scale is kept in liquid phosphorus at 150 °F. The liquid phosphorus is then heated continuously until it reaches its boiling point measured by the thermometer to be 500 °F. Find the percentage fractional change in the density of mercury during the whole process. (γHg = 10-4/°F)
(Assume that no heat is lost to the surrounding during the process.)
Answer:
Given:
T2 = 500°F, T1 = 150°F
γHg = 10-4 /°F
As the liquid phosphorus is heated, the mercury in the thermometer also gets heated.
Due to thermal expansion,
V2 = V1(1 + γ∆t)
= V1 [1 + 10-4 × (500 – 150)]
= 1.035 V1
Now, initial density of mercury is,
ρ1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}_{1}}\)
After heating,
ρ2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{V}_{2}}=\frac{\mathrm{m}}{1.035 \mathrm{~V}_{1}}=\frac{\rho_{1}}{1.035}\)
⇒ ρ2 < ρ1
∴ change in density of mercury is,
\(\frac{\rho_{1}-\rho_{2}}{\rho_{1}}=\frac{\rho_{1}(1-0.9662)}{\rho_{1}}\) = 0.0338
∴ Percentage fractional change = 3.38%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 155.
When ‘m’ g of ice is added to ‘M’g of water at 20 °C, state the conditions for m and M for which
i) temperature of the mixture remains 0° C.
ii) temperature of the mixture exceeds 0 °C. (Specific heat of water = sw = 4.2 × 103 J kg-1 °C-1, latent heat of fusion = L = 3.36 × 105 J kg-1 )
Answer:
The heat lost by water in going from 20 °C to 0°C,
Q1 = Msw ∆T = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{1000}\) × 4.2 × 103 × (20) = 84M J
Now, heat required to convert m g of ice into water at 0 °C,
Q2 = mL = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{1000}\) × 3.36 × 105 = 336m J

  1. For temperature of mixture to be 0 °C,
    Q2 > Q1
    ⇒ 336m > 84M
    ⇒ m > \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{4}\)
  2. For temperature of mixture to exceed 0 °C,
    Q2 < Q1 ⇒ m < \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{4}\)

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 42

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Heat is transferred between two (or more) systems or a system and its surrounding by virtue of
(A) temperature difference.
(B) material difference.
(C) amount of heat difference.
(D) mass difference.
Answer:
(A) temperature difference.

Question 2.
On celsius scale, the two fixed points are marked as
(A) 0°C and 232°C
(B) 32°C and 100°C
(C) 0°C and 100°C
(D) 100°C and 180°C
Answer:
(C) 0°C and 100°C

Question 3.
If the temperature in a room is 30 °C, temperature in degree fahrenheit is
(A) 22 °F
(B) 62 °F
(C) 86 °F
(D) 96 °F
Answer:
(C) 86 °F

Question 4.
If the temperature on Fahrenheit scale is 140 °F, then the same temperature on kelvin scale will be
(A) 60.15 K
(B) 213.15 K
(C) 333.15 K
(D) 413.15 K
Answer:
(C) 333.15 K

Question 5.
In the gas equation, PV = RT, V stands for volume of
(A) any amount of gas .
(B) one gram mole of gas.
(C) one gram of a gas.
(D) one litre of a gas.
Answer:
(B) one gram mole of gas.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 6.
1 litre of an ideal gas at 27 °C is heated at constant pressure so as to attain temperature 297 °C. The final volume is approximately
(A) 1.2 litre
(B) 1.9 litre
(C) 19 litre
(D) 2.4 litre
Answer:
(B) 1.9 litre

Question 7.
How much should the pressure be increased in order to decrease the volume of a gas by 10% at a constant temperature?
(A) 7%
(B) 8%
(C) 10%
(D) 11.11%
Answer:
(D) 11.11%

Question 8.
Two rods of same material are equal in length, but one has cross-sectional area double the other. If they are heated through the same temperature then
(A) thick rod expands more.
(B) thin rod expands more.
(C) both rods will expand equally.
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(C) both rods will expand equally.

Question 9.
Two iron bars of same length with unequal radii are heated for the same rise in temperature. The linear expansion will be
(A) more in thin bar.
(B) more in thick bar.
(C) same for both.
(D) less in thick bar.
Answer:
(A) more in thin bar.

Question 10.
Which of the following has minimum coefficient of linear expansion?
(A) Gold
(B) Copper
(C) Platinum
(D) Invar steel
Answer:
(D) Invar steel

Question 11.
The coefficient of cubical expansion of a solid is the increase in volume per unit original volume at 0 °C per degree rise in _________.
(A) pressure
(B) volume
(C) temperature
(D) area
Answer:
(C) temperature

Question 12.
A disc has an area of 0.32 m2 at 20 °C, what will be its area at 100 °C? (α = 2 × 10-6 / °C)
(A) 0.12 m2
(B) 0.32 m2
(C) 0.51 m2
(D) 0.71 m2
Answer:
(B) 0.32 m2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 13.
The coefficient of linear expansion of iron is 1.1 × 10-5 per K. An iron is 10 m long at 27 °C. Length of the rod will be decreased by 1.1 mm when the temperature of the rod changes to
(A) 0°C
(B) 10 °C
(C) 17 °C
(D) 20 °C
Answer:
(C) 17 °C

Question 14.
The length of an aluminium rod is 120 cm at 20 °C. What is its length at 80 °C, if coefficient of linear expansion of aluminium is 2.5 × 10-5/°C?
(A) 130.18 cm
(B) 120.18 cm
(C) 110.18 cm
(D) 100.18 cm
Answer:
(B) 120.18 cm

Question 15.
A metal rod having a coefficient of linear expansion of 2 × 10-5 /°C has a length of 100 cm at 20 °C. The temperature at which it is shortened by 1 mm is
(A) -40 °C
(B) -30 °C
(C) -20 °C
(D) -10 °C
Answer:
(B) -30 °C

Question 16.
Iron sheet 50 cm × 20 cm is heated through 100 °C. If a = 12 × 10-6 / °C, the change in area is
(A) 2.4 cm2
(B) 3.4 cm2
(C) 4.2 cm2
(D) 5.3 cm2
Answer:
(A) 2.4 cm2

Question 17.
A liquid with coefficient of volume expansion γ is filled in a container of a material having the coefficient of linear expansion α. If the liquid over flows on heating then
(A) γ = 3α
(B) γ < 3α (C) γ > 3α
(D) γ = 3α2
Answer:
(B) γ < 3α

Question 18.
The volume of a metal block changes by 0.18% when it is heated through 20 °C. Its coefficient at cubical expansion will be
(A) 9 × 10-5 / °C
(B) 3 × 10-5 / °C
(C) 18 × 10-5 / °C
(D) 36 × 10-5 / °C
Answer:
(A) 9 × 10-5 / °C

Question 19.
The volume of liquid is 830 m3 at 30 °C and 850 m3 at 90 °C. The coefficient of volume expansion of liquid is
(A) 2 × 10-4 per °C
(B) 8 × 10-4 per °C
(C) 4 × 10-4 per °C
(D) 2.5 × 10-4 per °C
Answer:
(C) 4 × 10-4 per °C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 20.
The superficial expansivity is 1 / x times the cubic expansivity. The value of x is
(A) 2/3
(B) 3/2
(C) 2
(D) 3
Answer:
(B) 3/2

Question 21.
The unit of molar specific heat is
(A) JK-1 mole-1
(B) JK mole-1
(C) J-1 K-1mole-1
(D) JK-1 mole
Answer:
(A) JK-1 mole-1

Question 22.
The S.I. unit of latent heat is
(A) J-1 kg
(B) J kg-1
(C) J k-1 °C
(D) J-1 kg °C
Answer:
(B) J kg-1

Question 23.
The slowest mode of transfer of heat is
(A) conduction
(B) convection
(C) radiation
(D) specific heat
Answer:
(A) conduction

Question 24.
The quantity of heat which crosses unit area of a metal plate during conduction depends on
(A) the density of the metal.
(B) the temperature gradient perpendicular to the area.
(C) the temperature to which the metal is heated.
(D) the area of the metal plate.
Answer:
(B) the temperature gradient perpendicular to the area.

Question 25.
Which of the following is not the unit of thermal conductivity?
(A) J/m s °C
(B) K cal/m s K
(C) Watt/m °C
(D) J/m2 s °C
Answer:
(D) J/m2 s °C

Question 26.
The most desirable combination for the material of a cooking pot is
(A) high specific heat and high conductivity.
(B) low specific heat and high conductivity.
(C) high specific heat and low conductivity.
(D) low specific heat and low conductivity.
Answer:
(B) low specific heat and high conductivity.

Question 27.
While measuring thermal conductivity of a liquid, we keep the upper part hot and lower part cold, so that
(A) radiation may start.
(B) radiation may stop.
(C) convection may start.
(D) convection may be stopped.
Answer:
(D) convection may be stopped.

Question 28.
Convention currents in air in day time is from
(A) land to sea
(B) sea to land
(C) sea to sky
(D) land to land
Answer:
(B) sea to land

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 29.
One end of a metal rod one metre long is kept in ice and the other end is at 100 °C. What is temperature gradient throughout the rod?
(A) 10 °C/m
(B) 100 °C/m
(C) 50 °C/m
(D) 1 °C/m
Answer:
(B) 100 °C/m

Question 30.
__________ amount of heat is required to raise the temperature of 100 g of kerosene from 10 °C to 30 °C (Given: specific heat of kerosene is 0.51 kcal/kg °C)
(A) 0.102 kcal
(B) 1.02 kcal
(C) 10.2 kcal
(D) 102 kcal
Answer:
(B) 1.02 kcal

Question 31.
One end of copper rod is in contact with water at 100 °C and the other end in contact with ice at 0 °C. The length of the rod is 100 cm. At a point which is at a distance of 35 cm from the cold end, temperature is (assuming steady state heat flow)
(A) 35 °C
(B) 65 °C
(C) 56 °C
(D) 53 °C
Answer:
(A) 35 °C

Question 32.
In Newton’s law of cooling, the rate of fall of temperature
(A) is constant
(B) increases
(C) decreases
(D) doubles
Answer:
(C) decreases

Question 33.
The metal sphere cools at 1 °C/min, when its temperature is 50 °C. If the temperature of environment is 30 °C, its rate of cooling at 35 °C is
(A) 0.25 °C/min
(B) 0.5 °C/min
(C) 0.75 °C/min
(D) 0.4 °C/min
Answer:
(A) 0.25 °C/min

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
A copper rod of 88 cm and an aluminium rod of unknown length have their increase in length independent of increase in temperature. The length of aluminum rod is:
Cu = 1.7 × 10-5 K-1 and αAl = 2.2 × 10-5 K-1)
(A) 88 cm
(B) 68 cm
(C) 6.8 cm
(D) 1 13.9 cm
Answer:
(B) 68 cm
Hint:
LCu αCu ∆T = LAl αAl ∆T
∴ 88 × (1.7 × 10-5) = LAl(2.2 × 10-5)
∴ LAl = \(\frac{88 \times 1.7}{2.2}\)
∴ LAl = 68 cm

Question 2.
The unit of thermal conductivity is:
(A) W m K-1
(B) W m-1 K-1
(C) JmK -1
(D) Jm-1K-1
Answer:
(B) W m-1 K-1
Hint:
Q = kA \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\) t
Q = quantity of heat conducted.
A = area of cross section
t = time for which heat is passed
\(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\) = temperature gradient
∴ K = \(\frac{Q}{A t\left(\frac{\Delta T}{\Delta x}\right)}\)
∴ Unit of k = W m-1 K-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
A deep rectangular pond of surface area A, containing water (density = p, specific heat capacity = s), is located in a region where the outside air temperature is at a steady value of -26°C. The thickness of the frozen ice layer in this pond, at a certain instant is x. Taking the thermal conductivity of ice as K, and its specific latent heat of fusion as L, the rate of increase of the thickness of ice layer, at this instant, would be given by
(A) 26K/ρx(L + 4s)
(B) 26K/ρx(L – 4s)
(C) 26K/(ρx2 L)
(D) 26K/(ρxL)
Answer:
(D) 26K/(ρxL)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 43

Question 4.
An object kept in a large room having air temperature of 25°C takes 12 minutes to cool from 80°C to 70°C. The time taken to cool for the same object from 70°C to 60°C would be nearly.
(A) 15 min
(B) 10mm
(C) 12mm
(D) 20mm
Answer:
(A) 15 min
Hint:
By Newton’s law of cooling,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 44

Question 5.
A thermally insulated vessel contains 150 g of water at 0 °C. Then the air from the vessel ispumped out adiabatically. A fraction of water turns into ice and the rest evaporates at 0 °C itself. The mass of evaporated water will be closest to :
(Latent heat of vaporization of water = 2.10 × 106 J kg-1 and Latent heat of Fusion of water = 3.36 × 105 J kg-1)
(A) 150g
(B) 20g
(C) 130g
(D) 35g
Answer:
(B) 20g
Hint:
m= 150 g = 0.15 kg
The heat required to evaporate ‘m’ grams of water,
∆Qrequired = mLv ………. ( 1)
(015 – m) is the amount of mass that converts into ice
∴ ∆Qreleased = (0.15 – m) Lf …………. (2)
Now, amount of heat required = amount of heat released
∴ From (1) and (2),
mLv = (0.15 – m)Lf
∴ m(Lf + Lv) = 0.15 Lf
∴ m = \(\frac{0.15 \mathrm{~L}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{L}_{\mathrm{f}}+\mathrm{L}_{\mathrm{v}}}\)
∴ m = \(\frac{0.15 \times 3.36 \times 10^{5}}{2.10 \times 10^{6}+3.36 \times 10^{5}}\)
∴ m=0.0206kg ≈ 20g

Question 6.
A copper ball of mass 100 g is at a temperature T. It is dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 g, filled with 170 g of water at room temperature. Subsequently, thetemperature of the system is found to be 75 °C. T is given by: (Given: room temperature = 30°C, specific heat of copper 0.1 cal/g °C)
(A) 1250°C
(B) 825°C
(C) 800°C
(D) 885°C
Answer:
(D) 885°C
Hint:
Heat lost by copper ball = Heat gained by calorimeter and water
∴mbsc∆T1 = mccc∆T2 + mwsw∆T2
∴ (100)(0.1)(T – 75) = (100)(0.1)(75 – 30) + (170)(1)(75 – 30)
10(T – 75) = 450 + 7650 = 8100
T – 75 = 810
T = 885 °C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
Coefficient of linear expansion of brass and steel rods are α1 and α2. Lengths of brass and steel rods are l1 and l2 respectively. If (l2 – l1) is maintained same at all temperatures, which one of the following relations holds good?
(A) α12l2 = α22l1
(B) α1l1 = α2l2
(C) α1l2 = α2l1
(D) α1l22 = α2l12
Answer:
(B) α1l1 = α2l2
Hint:
∆L = L(1 + α∆t)
i.e. ∆l2 = l2(1 + α2∆t)
and ∆l1 =11(1 + α1∆t)
It is given,
l2– l1 = ∆tl2 – ∆ll1
∴ l2 – l1 = l2 (1 + α2∆t) – l1 (1+ α1∆t)
= l2 + l2α2∆t – l1 – l1α1∆t
∴ – l2 + l2 + l2α2∆t = -l1 + l1 + l1α1∆t
∴ l2α2∆t = l1α1∆t
i.e., l2α2 = l1α1

Question 8.
A pendulum clock loses 12 s a day if the temperature is 40 °C and gains 4 s a day if the temperature is 20 °C. The temperature at which the clock will show correct time, and the coefficient of linear expansion (a) of the metal of the pendulum shaft are respectively:
(A) 60 πC, a = 1.85 × 10-4/πC
(B) 30 πC, a = 1.85 × 10-3/πC
(C) 55 πC, a = 1.85 × 10-2/πC
(D) 25 πC, a = 1.85 × 10-5/πC
Answer:
(D) 25 πC, a = 1.85 × 10-5/πC
Hint:
Period of pendulum, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{g}}}\)
∴ T ∝ \(\sqrt{\mathrm{L}}\)
But, L = L0 (1 + α∆t)
∴ T ∝ \(\sqrt{\mathrm{L}_{0}(1+\alpha \Delta \mathrm{t})}\)
As L0 is constant,
⇒ T ∝ (1 + α ∆t)
Calculating fractional change in time period of pendulum, \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{1}{2}(\alpha \Delta \mathrm{t})\)
For the given pendulum,
T = 24 × 60 × 60 = 864000 s
When t1 = 40 °C, ∆T = 12 s,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 45

Question 9.
A piece of ice falls from a height h so that it melts completely. Only one — quarter of the heat produced is absorbed by the ice and all energy of ice gets converted into heat during its fall. The value of h is [Latent heat of ice is 3.4 × 105 J/kg and g = 10 N/kg]
(A) 136 km
(B) 68km
(C) 34km
(D) 544km
Answer:
(A) 136 km
Hint:
When the piece of ice falls from the height h, it possesses potential energy, mgh.
This P.E. is converted to heat energy.
∴ Q = mgh
But only \(\frac{1^{\text {th }}}{4}\) of it is absorbed by ice which is used to change the state.
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{mgh}}{4}\) = mL
∴ \(\frac{10 \times \mathrm{h}}{4}\) = 3.4 × 105
∴ h = 13.6 × 104 m = 136km

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 10.
A body cools from a temperature 3T to 2T in 10 minutes. The room temperature is T. Assume that Newton’s law of cooling is applicable. The temperature of the body at the end of next 10 minutes will be
(A) T
(B) \(\frac{7}{4}\) T
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\) T
(D) \(\frac{4}{3}\) T
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\) T
Hint:
By Newton’s law of cooling,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Thermal Properties of Matter 46

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 1.
Explain the equilibrium state of solids at a given temperature.
Answer:

  1. Solids are made up of atoms or a group of atoms placed in a definite geometric arrangement.
  2. This arrangement is decided by nature so that the resultant force acting on each constituent due to others is zero. This is the equilibrium state of a solid at room temperature.
  3. This equilibrium arrangement does not change with time but it can only change when an external stimulus, like compressive force, is applied to a solid from all sides.
  4. The constituents vibrate about their equilibrium positions even at very low temperatures but cannot leave their fixed positions.
  5. As a result, the solids possess a definite shape and size.

Question 2.
Explain the effects of applied force on a rigid body.
Answer:

  1. When an external force is applied to a solid, the constituents are slightly displaced and restoring forces are developed in it.
  2. These restoring forces try to bring the constituents back to their equilibrium positions so that the solid can regain its shape.
  3. When the deforming forces are removed, the inter-atomic forces tend to restore the original positions of the molecules and thus the body regains its original shape and size.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of deforming force with the help of examples.
Answer:

  1. When a force (within specific limit) is applied to a solid (which is not free to move), the size or shape or both change due to changes in the relative positions of molecules. Such a force is called deforming force.
  2. The larger the deforming force on a body, the larger is its deformation.
  3. Deformation could be in the form of change in length of a wire, change in volume of an object or change in shape of a body.
  4. Examples:
    • When a deforming force such as stretching, is applied to a rubber band, it gets deformed (elongated) but when the force is removed, it regains its original length.
    • When a similar force is applied to a dough or a clay, it also gets deformed but it does not regain its original shape and size after removal of the deforming force.

Question 4.
Define plasticity.
Answer:
If a body does not regain its original shape and size and retains its altered shape or size upon removal of the deforming force, it is called a plastic body and the property is called plasticity.

Question 5.
When is a body said to be perfectly elastic? Give an example for perfectly elastic body and perfectly plastic body.
Answer:

  1. If a body regains its original shape and size completely and instantaneously upon removal of the deforming force, then it is said to be perfectly elastic.
    • There is no solid which is perfectly elastic or perfectly plastic,
    • The best example of a near perfectly elastic body is quartz fibre and that of a plastic body is putty.

Question 6.
State SI unit and dimensions of strain.
Answer:
Strain is the ratio of two similar quantities. Hence strain is a dimensionless physical quantity and it has no units.

Question 7.
State and explain longitudinal stress (Tensile stress and Compressive stress).
Answer:
i. Stress produced by a deforming force acting along the length of a body or a rod is called longitudinal stress.

ii. Tensile stress: Consider a force F is applied along a length of a wire, or perpendicular to its cross-section A of a wire (or along its length).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1

[Note: Elongation of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]
This produces an elongation in the wire and the length of the wire increases, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2

iii. Compressive stress: When a rod is pushed from two ends with equal and opposite forces.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
[Note: Compression of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]
This restoring force per unit area is called compressive stress.
Compressive stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\)

Question 8.
State and explain longitudinal strain (Tensile strain or Linear strain).
Answer:
The strain produced by a tensile deforming force is called longitudinal strain (tensile strain or linear strain,).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4
where, L = Original length,
∆l = Change in length.

Question 9.
State and explain volume stress / hydraulic stress.
Answer:
When a deforming force acting on a body produces change in its volume, the stress is called volume stress.
Volume stress/hydraulic stress:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
[Note: Change in size is exaggerated for explanation.]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6

  1. Let \(\vec{F}\) be a force acting perpendicular to the entire surface of the body.
  2. It acts normally and uniformly all over the surface area A of the body.
  3. Such a stress which produces change in size but no change in shape is called volume stress.
    Volume stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\)
  4. Volume stress produces change in size without change in shape of body, hence it is also called as hydraulic or hydrostatic volume stress.

Question 10.
Explain volume strain.
Answer:

  1. A deforming force acting perpendicular to the entire surface of a body produces a volume strain.
  2. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
    where ∆V = change in volume,
    V = original volume.

Question 11.
Define and explain shearing stress.
Answer:
The restoring force per unit area developed due to the applied tangential force is called shearing stress or tangential stress.
Shearing stress:

  1. When a deforming force acting on a body produces change in the shape of a body shearing stress is produced.
  2. Consider ABCD as a front face of a cube, a tangential force is applied to the cube so that the bottom of the cube is fixed and only the top surface is slightly displaced.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Question 12.
Explain shearing strain.
Answer:

  1. The relative displacement of the bottom face and the top face of the cube is called shearing strain.
  2. Shearing strain = \(\frac{\Delta l}{\mathrm{~L}}\) = tan θ
    where, ∆l = displaced length,
    L = Original length.
  3. When ∆l is very small,
    tan θ ≈ θ and shearing strain = θ

Question 13.
State and explain Hooke’s law.
Answer:
Statement: Within elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to strain.
Explanation:

  1. According to Hooke’s law,
    Stress-Strain
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9
    This constant of proportionality is called modulus of elasticity.
  2. Modulus of elasticity of a material is the slope of stress-strain curve in elastic deformation region and depends on the nature of the material.
  3. The graph of strain (on X-axis) and stress (on Y-axis) within elastic limit is shown in the figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10

Question 14.
Define elastic limit.
Answer:
The maximum value of stress upto which stress is directly proportional to strain is called the elastic limit.

Question 15.
Define modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
The modulus of elasticity of a material is the ratio of stress to the corresponding strain.

Question 16.
State different types of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:

  1. Young’s modulus (Y): It is the modulus of elasticity related to change in length of an object like a metal wire, rod, beam, etc., due to the applied deforming force.
  2. Bulk modulus (K): It is the modulus of elasticity related to change in volume of an object due to applied deforming force.
  3. Shear modulus or Modulus of rigidity (η): The modulus of elasticity related to change in shape of an object is called modulus of rigidity.

Question 17.
Explain the usefulness of Young’s modulus.
Answer:

  1. Young’s modulus indicates the resistance of an elastic solid to elongation or compression.
  2. Young’s modulus of a material is useful for characterization of an object subjected to compression or tension.

Question 18.
Within elastic limit, prove that Young’s modulus of material of wire is the stress required to double the length of wire.
Answer:

(i) Let, L = Initial length of wire
2 L = Final length of wire
∴ Increase in length = ∆l = 2L – L = L

(ii) Longitudinal strain of wire = \(\frac{\Delta l}{\mathrm{~L}}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=1\)

(iii)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
∴ Y = Longitudinal stress

(iv) Hence, Young’s modulus of material of wire is the stress required to double the length of wire.

Question 19.
What is bulk modulus? Derive an expression for bulk modulus.
Answer:
Definition:
Bulk modulus is defined as the ratio of volume stress to volume strain.
It is denoted by ‘K’.
Unit: N/m2 or Pa in SI system
Dimensions: [L-1M1T-2]
Expression for bulk modulus:

(i) If a sphere made from rubber is completely immersed in a liquid, it will be uniformly compressed from all sides.
Let, F = Compressive force,
dP = Change in pressure,
dV = Change in volume,
V = Original volume.

(ii) Volume stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\) = dP

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12

(iii) The negative sign indicates that there is a decrease in volume.
The magnitude of the volume strain is \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

Question 20.
Explain the usefulness of bulk modulus.
Answer:

  1. Bulk modulus indicates the resistance of gases, liquids or solids to change their volume.
  2. Materials with small bulk modulus and large compressibility are easier to compress.

Question 21.
State few applications of bulk modulus.
Answer:

  1. When a balloon is filled with air at high pressure, its walls experience a force from within. It tries to expand the balloon and change its size without changing shape. When the volume stress exceeds the limit of bulk elasticity, the balloon explodes.
  2. A gas cylinder explodes when the pressure inside it exceeds the limit of bulk elasticity of its material.
  3. A submarine when submerged under water is under volume stress. The depth it can reach within water depends upon its limit of bulk elasticity.

Question 22.
Define compressibility. State its unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. The reciprocal of bulk modulus of elasticity is called compressibility of the material.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14
  2. Compressibility is the fractional decrease in volume, (-dV/V) per unit increase in pressure.
    Compressibility = \(\frac{-\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}\)
  3. Unit: m2/N or Pa-1 in SI system.
  4. Dimensions: [L1M-1T2]

Question 23.
What is modulus of rigidity? Derive an expression for it.
Answer:
Definition: It is defined (is the ratio of shear stress to shear strain within elastic limit.
It is denoted by ‘η’.
Unit: N/m2 or Pa in SI system.
Dimension: [L-1M1T-2]

Expression for modulus of rigidity:

Consider a solid cube as shown in the figure.

Let, F = Tangential force
A = Cross sectional area
∆l = Relative displaced length
l = Original length
θ = Shear strain
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15
[Note: Displacement of upper surface is exaggerated for explanation.]
The forces applied on the block is subjected to a shear stress,
Shearing stress = F/A
The comer angle which changes by a small amount θ (expressed in radian) is given by,
Shearing strain = \(\frac{\Delta l}{l}\) ≈ θ
From definition,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16

Question 24.
What does modulus of rigidity indicate?
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity indicates resistance offered by solid to change in its shape.

Question 25.
Explain the change of diameter of a wire when it is stretched and compressed.
Answer:
i. When a wire is fixed at one end and a force is applied at its free end so that the wire gets stretched, length of the wire increases and at the same time, its diameter decreases, i.e., the wire becomes longer and thinner as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17
[Note: Linear expansion ∆l is exaggerated far explanation.]

ii. If equal and opposite forces are applied to an object along its length inwards, the object gets compressed. There is a decrease in dimensions along its length and at the same time there is an increase in its dimensions perpendicular to its length. When length of the wire decreases, its diameter increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18

[Note: Compression of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]

Question 26.
Derive expression for Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
i. Let,
L = original length
l = increase/decrease in length
D = original diameter
d = change in diameter

ii. The ratio of change in dimensions to original dimensions in the direction of the applied force is called linear strain.
Linear strain = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\) …. (1)

iii. The ratio of change in dimensions to original dimensions in a direction perpendicular to the applied force is called lateral strain.
Lateral strain = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{D}}\) ….(2)

iv. Poisson’s ration,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19

Question 27.
A wire of length 20 m and area of cross section 1.25 × 10-4 m2 is subjected to a load of 2.5 kg. (1 kg wt = 9.8 N). The elongation produced in wire is 1 × 10-4 m. Calculate Young’s modulus of the material.
Solution:
L = 20 m, A = 1.25 × 10-4m2,
F = mg = 2.5 × 9.8 N, l = 10-4 m
Formula Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
To find: Young’s modulus (Y)
Calculation: From formula,
Y = \(\frac{2.5 \times 9.8 \times 20}{1.25 \times 10^{-4} \times 10^{-4}}\) = 3.92 × 1010Nm-2
Answer: The Young’s modulus of the material is 3.92 × 1010 Nm-2.

Question 28.
A wire of diameter 0.5 mm and length 2 m is stretched by applying a force of 2 kg wt. Calculate the increase in length of the wire, (g = 9.8 m/s2, Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given:
L = 2 m, F = 2 kg wt, d = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10-4 m,
∴ r = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{2}\) = 2.5 × 10-4 m.
Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Increase in length (l)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}=\frac{\mathrm{MgL}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2} l}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 20
Answer:
The increase in length of the wire is 2.218 × 10-3 m.

Question 29.
A brass wire of length 4.5 m with cross-section area of 3 × 10-5 m2 and a copper wire of length 5.0 m with cross section area 4 × 10-5 m2 are stretched by the same load. The same elongation is produced in both the wires. Find the ratio of Young’s modulus of brass and copper.
Solution:
LB = 4.5 m, AB = 3 × 10-5 m2
LC = 5 m, AC = 4 × 10-5 m2 lB = C, FB = FC
To find: Ratio of Young’s modulus \(\left(\frac{Y_{B}}{Y_{C}}\right)\)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Calculation: For brass,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 21
= 1.2
Answer:
The ratio of Young’s modulus of brass and copper is 1.2 : 1.

Question 30.
The length of wire increases by 9 mm when weight of 2.5 kg is hung from the free end of wire. If all conditions are kept the same and the radius of wire is made thrice the original radius, find the increase in length.
Solution:
Given; l1 = 9mm = 9 × 10-3m,
M = 2.5 kg, r2 = 3r1,
Y1 = Y2 = Y (material is same)
To find: Increase in length (l2)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 22
Answer:
The longitudinal strain produced in 1st wire is

Question 31.
Two wires of diameter 0.25 cm, one made of steel and the other made of brass are loaded as shown in the figure. The unloaded length of steel wire is 1.5 m and that of brass wire is 1.0 m. Compute the elongations of the steel and the brass wires.(Ys = 2.0 × 1011 Nm-2, YB = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2) (NCERT)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 23
Solution:
Given: D = 0.25 cm = 0.25 × 10-2 m,
LS = 1.5 m, LB = 1 m,
YS = 2.0 × 1011 Nm-2,
YB = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2
To find: Elongations of brass wire (lB)
Elongations of steel wire (lS)

Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)

Calculation: Since, A = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}^{2}}{4}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 24
Answer:
The elongation of the steel wire is 1.5 × 10-4 m and that of brass wires is 1.32 × 10-4 m.

Question 32.
One end of steel wire is fixed to a ceiling and load of 2.5 kg is attached to the free end of the wire. Another identical wire is attached to the bottom of load and another load of 2.0 kg, is attached to the lower end of this wire as shown in the figure. Compute the longitudinal strain produced in both the wires, if the cross-sectional area of wires is 10-4m2, (Ysteel = 20 × 1010N/m2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 25
Solution:
Given: M1 = 2.5 kg, M2 = 2kg, A = 10-4m2, Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2, L1 = L2 = L
To find: Longitudinal strain of 1st wire (Strain1).
Longitudinal strain of 2nd wire (Strain2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 26
Answer:
The longitudinal strain produced in 1st wire is 1.225 × 10-6 and in 2nd wire is 2.205 × 10-6

Question 33.
A steel wire having cross-sectional area 2 mm2 is stretched by 10 N. Find the lateral strain produced in the wire. (Given: Y for steel = 2 × 1011 N/m2, Poisson’s ratio σ = 0.29)
Solution:
Given: A = 2 mm2 = 2 × 10-6 m2,
F = 10 N, Ystee; = 2 × 1011 N/m2, σ = 0.29

To find: Lateral strain
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 27
Calculation: From formula (i),
longitudinal stress = \(\frac{10}{2 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 5 × 106 N/m2
From formula (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 28
From formula (iii),
lateral strain = σ × longitudinal strain
= 0.29 × 2.5 × 10-5
∴ lateral strain = 7.25 × 10-6
Answer:
Lateral strain produced in the wire is 7.25 × 10-6.

Question 34.
A brass wire of radius 1 mm is loaded by a mass of 31.42 kg. What would be the decrease in its radius? (Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, Poisson’s ratio σ = 0.36)
Solution:
Given: R = 1 mm = 1 × 10-3 m, M = 31.42 kg, Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, σ = 0.36
To find: Decrease in radius (r)

Formulae:

i. Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
ii. σ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Lr}}{l \mathrm{R}}\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 29
Answer:
The decrease in radius of the brass wire would be 3.92 × 10-7 m

Question 35.
A metal cube of side 1 m is subjected to a force. The force acts normally on the whole surface of cube and its volume changes by 1.5 × 10-5 m3. The bulk modulus of metal is 6.6 × 1010 N/m2. Calculate the change in pressure.
Solution:
Given: L = 1 m, dV = 1.5 × 10-5 m3,
K = 6.6 × 1010 N/m2.
To find: Change in pressure (dP)
Formula: K = V\(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 30
Answer:
The change in pressure is 9.9 × 105 N/m2.

Question 36.
Determine the volume contraction of solid copper cube, 10 cm on an edge, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 7.0 × 106 P.a. (Bulk modulus of copper = 140 × 109 pa)
Solution:
Given: L = 10 cm =0.1 m, ∆P = 7 × 106 Pa, K = 140 × 109 pa
To find: Volume contraction (dV)
Formula: K = V × \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
dV = \(\mathrm{L}^{3} \times \frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\) = (0.1)3 × \(\frac{7 \times 10^{6}}{140 \times 10^{9}}\)
∴ dV = 5 × 10-8 m3
Answer:
The volume contraction of solid copper cube is 5 × 10-8 m3

Question 37.
Calculate the modulus of rigidity of a metal, if a metal cube of side 40 cm is subjected to a shearing force of 2000 N. The upper surface is displaced through 0.5 cm with respect to the bottom. Calculate the modulus of rigidity of the metal.
Solution:
Given: L = 40 cm = 0.4 m,
F = 2000 N = 2 × 103N
l = 0.5 cm = 0.005 m, A = L2 = 0.16 m2
To find: Modulus of rigidity (η)

Formulae:

i. θ = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\)
ii. η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} \theta}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
θ = \(\frac{0.005}{0.4}\) = 0.0125
From formula (ii),
η = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{3}}{0.16 \times 0.0125}\) = 1 × 106 N/m2
Answer:
The modulus of rigidity of the metal cube is 1 × 106 N/m2.

Question 38.
A piece of copper having a rectangular cross-section of 15.2 mm × 19.1 mm is pulled in tension with 44500 N forces producing only elastic deformation. Calculate the resulting strain. (Rigidity modulus of copper = 42 × 109 N m-2)
Solution:
Given: A = 15.2 × 19.14 × 10-6 m2,
F = 44500 N, η = 42 × 109 N m-2
To find: Strain (θ)
Formula: η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} \theta}\)

Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 31
Answer:
The strain produced in the piece of copper is 3.64 × 10-3

Question 39.
A copper metal cube has each side of length 1 m. The bottom edge of cube is fixed and tangential force 4.2 × 108 N is applied to top surface. Calculate the lateral displacement of the top surface, if modulus of rigidity of copper is 14 × 1010 N/m2.
Solution:
Given: L = h = 1 m, F = 4.2 × 108 N, η = 1.4 × 1011 N/m2
To find: Lateral displacement (x)
Formula: η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} / \theta}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Fh}}{\mathrm{Ax}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
x = \(\frac{\mathrm{Fh}}{\mathrm{A\eta}}\)
∴ x = \(\frac{4.2 \times 10^{8} \times 1}{(1 \times 1) \times 1.4 \times 10^{11}}\) = 3 × 10-3 m
∴ x = 3 mm
Answer:
The lateral displacement of top is 3 mm.

Question 40.
The area of the upper face of a rectangular block is 0.5 m × 0.5 m and the lower face is fixed. The height of the block is 1 cm. A shearing force applied at the top face produces a displacement of 0.0 15 mm. Find the strain and shearing force. (Modulus of rigidity: η = 4.5 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: A = 0.5 m × 0.5 m = 0.25 m2,
h = 1 cm = 10-2m,
x = 0.015 mm = 15 × 10-6m
η = 4.5 × 1010 N/m2
To find: Strain (θ). Shearing force (F)

Formulae:

i. θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{h}}\)
ii. F = ηAθ

Calculations:

Using formula (i),
θ = \(\frac{15 \times 10^{-6}}{10^{-2}}\) = 1.5 × 10-3
Using formula (ii),
F = 4.5 × 1010 × 0.25 × 1.5 × 10-3
= 1.688 × 107 N
Answer:
Shearing force is 1.688 × 107 N and strain is 1.5 × 10-3

Question 41.
Explain the behaviour of metal wire under increasing load.
Answer:
Consider a metal wire suspended vertically from a rigid support and stretched by applying load to its lower end. The load is gradually increased in small steps until the wire breaks. The elongation produced in the wire is measured during each step. Stress and strain are noted for each load and a graph is drawn by taking tensile strain along X-axis and tensile stress along Y-axis. It is a stress-strain curve as shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 32

  1. Proportional limit: The initial part of the graph is a straight line OA. This is the region in which Hooke’s law is obeyed and stress is directly proportional to stain. The straight line portion ends at A. The stress at this point is called proportional limit.
  2. Yield point: If the load is further increased till point B is reached, stress and strain are no longer proportional and Hooke’s law is not valid. If the load is gradually removed starting at any point between O and B. The curve is retracted until the wire regains its original length. The change is reversible. The material of the wire shows elastic behaviour in the region OB. Point B is called the yield point. It is also known as the elastic limit.
  3. Permanent Set: When the stress is increased beyond point B, the strain continues to increase. If the load is removed at any point beyond B, for example (at C), the material does not regain its original length. It follows the line CE. Length of the wire when there is no stress is greater than the original length. The deformation is irreversible and the material has acquired a permanent set.
  4. Fracture point: Further increase in load causes a large increase in strain for relatively small increase in stress, until a point D is reached at which fracture takes place. The material shows plastic flow or plastic deformation from point B to point D. The material does not regain its original state when the stress is removed. The deformation is called plastic deformation.

Question 42.
Stress-strain curve for two materials A and B are shown in the figure. The graphs are drawn to the same scale.

  1. Which material has greater Young’s modulus?
  2. Which of the two is the stronger material? (NCERT)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 33
Answer:

  1. For a given strain, stress for A is more than that of B. Hence, Young’s modulus (= stress/strain) is greater for A than that of B.
  2. Material A is stronger than B because A can bear greater stress before the breaking of the wire.

Question 43.
Figure shows the stress-strain curve for a given material. What are

  1. Young’s modulus and
  2. approximate yield strength for this material? (NCERT)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 34
Answer:

  1. The graph, implies stress of 150 × 106 N m-2 corresponds to a strain of 0.002. Therefore, Young’s modulus is,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 35
  2. The yield strength for the material is less than 300 × 106 N m-2, i.e.. 3 × 108 N m-2 and greater than 2.5 × 108 N m-2.

Question 44.
Explain the following terms:

  1. Ductile
  2. Malleable

Answer:

  1. Metals such as copper, aluminium, wrought iron, etc. have large plastic range of extension. They lengthen considerably and undergo plastic deformation till they break. They are called ductile.
  2. Metals such as gold, silver which can be hammered into thin sheets are called malleable.

Question 45.
Define strain energy.
Answer:
The elastic potential energy gained by a wire during elongation b a stretching force is called as strain energy.

Question 46.
A steel wire is acted upon by a load of 10 N. Calculate the extension produced in the wire, if the strain energy stored in the wire is 1.1 × 10-3 J.
Solution:
Given: F = 10 N, Strain energy =1.1 × 10-3 J,
To find: Extension (l)
Formula: W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
Calculation:
From formula,
l = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~W}}{\mathrm{~F}}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 1.1 \times 10^{-3}}{10}\) = 2.2 × 10-4 m.
Answer:
The extension produced in the wire is 2.2 × 10-4 m.

Question 47.
Calculate the strain energy per unit volume in a brass wire of length 3 m and area of cross-section 0.6 mm2 when it is stretched by 3 mm and a force of 6 kg-wt is applied to its free end.
Solution:
Given: L = 3 m, F = 6 kg wt = 6 × 9.8N = 58.8N, A = 0.6 mm2 = 0.6 × 10-6 m2, l = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m
To find: Strain energy per unit volume (u)

Formulae:

i. Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\)
ii. Strain = \(\frac{l}{L}\)
iii. u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Stress × Strain

Calculation:

From formula (i),
Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\) = \(\frac{58.8}{0.6 \times 10^{-6}}\) = 98 × 106 N/m2
From formula (ii),
Strain = \(\frac{l}{L}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{-3}}{3}\) = 10-3
From formula (iii),
u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Stress × Strain
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 98 × 106 × 10-3
u = 49 × 103 J/m3
Answer:
Strain energy per unit volume in the brass wire is 49 × 103 J/m3

Question 48.
A steel wire of diameter 1 × 10-3 m is stretched by a force of 20 N. Calculate the strain energy per unit volume. (Ysteel = 2 × 1011 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: d = 1 × 10-3 m, r = 5 × 10-4 m, ysteel = 2 × 1011 N/m2
To find: Strain energy per unit volume
Formula: Strain energy per unit volume
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{\text { (stress) }^{2}}{\mathrm{Y}}\)
Calculation:
From formula.
Strain energy per unit volume
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 36
Answer:
The strain energy per unit volume of the steel wire is 1621 J.

Question 49.
A uniform steel wire of length 3 m and area of cross section 2 mm2 is extended through 3 mm. Calculate the energy stored in the wire, if the elastic limit is not exceeded. (Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: L = 3 m, A = 2 mm2 = 2 × 10-6 m2,
l = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m,
Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2
To find: Energy stored (U)
Formula: W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
Calculation: Since, Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 37
Answer:
The energy stored in the steel wire is 0.6 J.

Question 50.
Explain the following terms:
i. Hardness
ii. Strength
iii. Toughness
Answer:

i. Hardness:

  1. Hardness is the property of a material which enables it to resist plastic deformation.
  2. Hard materials have little ductility and they are brittle to some extent.
  3. The term hardness also refers to stiffness or resistance to bending, scratching, abrasion or cutting.
  4. It is the property of a material which gives it the ability to resist permanent deformation when a load is applied to it.
  5. The greater the hardness, greater is the resistance to deformation.
  6. Hardness of material is different from its strength and toughness.
  7. The most well known example for hard material is diamond, while metal with very low hardness is aluminium.

ii. Strength:

  1. If a force is applied to a body, it produces deformation in it.
  2. Higher is the force required for deformation, the stronger is the material, i.e., the material has more strength.
  3. Steel has high strength whereas plasticine clay is not strong because it gets easily deformed even by a small force.

iii. Toughness:

  1. Toughness is the ability of a material to resist fracturing when a force is applied to it.
  2. Plasticine clay is relatively tough as it can be stretched and deformed due to applied force without breaking.

Question 51.
Explain the concept of frictional force.
Answer:

  1. Whenever the surface of one body slides over another, each body exerts a certain amount of force on other body.
  2. These forces are tangential to the surfaces. The force on each body is opposite to the direction of motion between two bodies.
  3. It prevents or opposes the relative motion between two bodies.
  4. It is common experience that an object placed on any surface does not move easily when a small force is applied to it.
  5. This is because of certain force of opposition acting between the surface of the object and the surface on which it is placed.
  6. To initiate any motion between pair of surfaces, we need a certain minimum force. Also, after the motion begins, it is constantly opposed by some natural force.
  7. This mechanical force between two solid surfaces in contact with each other is called as frictional force.

Question 52.
Explain few examples of friction.
Answer:

  1. A rolling ball comes to rest after covering a finite distance on playground because of friction.
  2. Our foot ware is provided with designs at the bottom of its sole so as to produce force of opposition to avoid slipping. It is difficult to walk without such opposing force. When we try to walk fast on polished flooring at home with soap water spread on it. There is a possibility of slipping due to lack of force of friction.
  3. Relative motion between solids and fluids (i.e. liquids and gases) is also opposed naturally by friction, eg.: a boat on the surface of water experiences opposition to its motion.

Question 53.
Explain the origin of friction.
Answer:

  1. If smooth surfaces are observed under powerful microscope, many irregularities and projections are observed.
  2. Friction arises due to interlocking of these irregularities between two surfaces in contact.
  3. The surfaces can be made extremely smooth by polishing to avoid irregularities but then case also, friction does not decrease but may increase.
  4. Hence the interlocking of irregularities is not the real cause of friction.
  5. According to modem theory, cause of friction is the force of attraction between molecules of two surfaces in actual contact in addition to the. force due to the interlocking between the two surfaces.
  6. When one body is in contact with another body, the real microscopic area in contact is very small due to irregularities in contact.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 38
  7. Due to small area, pressures at points of contact is very high. Hence there is strong force of attraction between the surfaces in contact.
  8. When the surfaces in contact become more and more smooth, the actual area of contact goes on increasing.
  9. Due to this, the force of attraction between the molecules increases and hence the friction also increases.

Question 54.
State the following terms:

  1. Cohesive force
  2. Adhesive force

Answer:

  1. When two Surfaces are of the same material, the force of attraction between them is called cohesive force.
  2. When two surfaces are of different materials, the force of attraction between them is called adhesive force.

Question 55.
Explain the concept of static friction.
Answer:

  1. Consider a wooden block placed on a horizontal surface as shown in the figure and small horizontal force F is applied to it.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 39
  2. The block does not move with this force as it cannot overcome the frictional force between the block and horizontal surface.
  3. In this case the force of static friction is equal to F and balances it.
  4. The frictional force which balances applied force when the body is static is called force of static friction. In other words, static friction prevents sliding motion.
  5. If we keep increasing F, a stage will come
    • For F < Fmax, the force of static friction is equal to F.
    • when for F = Fmax, the object will start moving.
    • For F ≥ Fmax, the kinetic friction comes into play.
  6. Static friction opposes impending motion i.e. the motion that would take place in absence of frictional force under the applied force.

Question 56.
Define limiting force of friction.
Answer:
Just before the body starts sliding over another body, the value of frictional force is maximum, it is called as limiting force of friction.

Question 57.
Explain the concept of kinetic friction.
Answer:

  1. Once the sliding of block on the surface starts the force of friction decreases.
  2. The force required to keep the body sliding steadily is thus less than the force required to just start its sliding.
  3. The force of friction that comes into play when a body is in steady state of motion over another surface is called kinetic fòrce of friction.
  4. Friction between two surfaces in contact when one body is actually sliding over the other body, is called kinetic friction or dynamic friction.

Question 58.
Why ball bearings are used in machines?
Answer:

  1. For same pair of surfaces, the force of static friction is greater than the force of kinetic friction while the force of kinetic friction is greater than force of rolling friction.
  2. As ball bearing undergo rolling friction and rolling friction is the minimum, ball bearings are used to reduce friction in parts of machines to increase its efficiency.

Question 59.
The coefficient of static friction between a block of mass 0.25 kg and a horizontal surface is 0.4. Find the horizontal force applied to it.
Solution:
Given: μs = 0.4, m = 0.25 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Force (FL)
Formula: FL = μsN = μs(mg)
Calculation: From formula,
FL = 0.4 × 0.25 × 9.8 = 0.98 N
Answer:
The horizontal force applied to it is 0.98 N.

Question 60.
Calculate the force required to move a block of mass 20 kg resting on a horizontal surface, if μs = 0.3 and g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, μs = 0.3, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find. Force required (F)
Formula: FS = μsN = μsmg
Calculation: From formula,
FS = 3 × 20 × 9.8 = 58.8N
Answer:
The force required to move the block is 58.8 N.

Question 61.
A block of mass 40 kg resting on a horizontal surface just begins to slide when a horizontal force of 120 N is applied to it. Once the motion starts, It can be maintained by a force of 80 N. Determine the coefficients of static friction and kinetic friction (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: FL= 120N, Fk = 80N, m = 40 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2

To find:

i. Coefficient of static friction (μs)
ii. Coefficient of kinetic friction (μk)

Formulae:

i. μs = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{N}}\)
ii. μk = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{k}}}{\mathrm{N}}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i) we get.
N = mg = 40 × 9.8 = 392 N
∴ μs = \(\frac{F_{L}}{N}\) = \(\frac{120}{392}\) = 0.306
From formula (ii) we get,
∴ μk = \(\frac{F_{k}}{N}\) = \(\frac{80}{392}\) = 0.204
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of static friction is 0.306.
  2. The coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.204.

Question 62.
A 20 kg metal block is placed on a horizontal surface. The block just begins to slide when horizontal force of 100 N is applied to it. Calculate the coefficient of static friction. If coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.4, then find minimum force to maintain its uniform motion.
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, FL = 100 N, μk = 0.4

To find:

i. Coefficient of static friction (μs)
ii. Minimum force required (Fk)

Formulae:

i. μs = \(\frac{F_{L}}{N}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{mg}}\)
ii. μs = \(\frac{F_{k}}{N}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
μs = \(\frac{100}{20 \times 9.8}\) = 0.5102
From formula (ii),
Fk = μkN = μk × mg = 0.4 × 20 × 9.8
∴ Fk = 78.4 N
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of static friction is 0.5102.
  2. The minimum force required is 78.4 N.

Question 63.
The Mariana trench is located in the Pacific Ocean and at one place it is nearly 11 km beneath the surface of water. The water pressure at the bottom of the trench is about 1.1 × 108 Pa. A steel ball of initial volume 0.32 m3 is dropped into the ocean and falls to the bottom of the trench. What is the change in the volume of the ball when it reaches the bottom? (K = 1.6 × 1011 N/m2)
Answer:
Given: V = 0.32 m3, K = 1.6 × 1011 N/m2,
PW= 1.1 × 108 Pa, Patm = 1.01 × 105 Pa
∴ dP = PW – Patm = 1.1 × 108 – 1.01 × 105 ≈ 1.1 × 108 Pa
As, bulk modulus is given as,
K = V × \(\frac{d P}{d V}\)
∴ dV = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \times \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\) = \(\frac{\left(1.1 \times 10^{8}\right) \times 0.32}{1.6 \times 10^{11}}\)
∴ dV = 2.2 × 10-4 m3
The change in the volume of the ball when it reaches the bottom will be 2.2 × 10-4 m3.

Question 64.
Two spheres A and B having same volume are dropped from same height in ocean. Sphere A is made up of brass and sphere B is made up of steel. Will there be same change in volume of spheres at a certain depth inside water? What will be the ratio of change in volumes of the two spheres at this depth?
Answer:

  1. Brass and copper have different elastic moduli. Hence, there won’t be same change in the volume of spheres at a certain depth inside water.
  2. As two spheres are dropped from same height and are at same depth in water pressure exerted on them remains same.
    ∴ dPA = dPB = dP
    VA = VB = V
  3. If dVA and dVB be the change in volume of two spheres A and B then,
    dVA = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) and dVB = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
  4. Ratio of change in volume,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 40
    where, KA and KB are bulk modulus of material of spheres A and B respectively.

Question 65.
What is the basis of deciding the thickness of metallic ropes used in crane to lift the heavy weight?
Answer:

  1. The thickness of the metallic ropes used in cranes is decided on the basis of the elastic limit of the material of the rope and the factor of safety.
  2. To lift a load upto 104 kg, the rope is made for a factor of safety of 10.
  3. It should not break even when a load of (original load × factor of safety = 104 × 10) 105 kgf i.e., 105 × 9.8 N is applied on it.
  4. If ‘r’ is the radius of the rope, then maximum stress = \(\frac{10^{5}}{\pi r^{2}}\).
  5. The maximum stress (ultimate stress) should not exceed the breaking stress (5 to 20 × 108 N/m2) as well as elastic limit of steel Ys(30 × 107 N/m2).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 41
  6. In order to have flexibility, the rope is made up of large number of thin wires twisted together.

Question 66.
Multiple choice questions

Which one of the following substances possesses the highest elasticity?
(A) Rubber
(B) Glass
(C) Steel
(D) Copper
Answer:
(C) Steel

Question 1.
S.I unit of stress is
(A) Newton/ metre
(B) Newton/ metre2
(C) Newton2/metre
(D) Newton/metre3
Answer:
(B) Newton/ metre2

Question 2.
A wire is stretched to double of its length. The strain is
(A) 2
(B) 1
(C) zero
(D) 0.5
Answer:
(B) 1

Question 3.
A and B are two steel wires and the radius of A is twice that of B. If they are stretched by the same load, then the stress on B is ____.
(A) four times that of A
(B) two times that of A
(C) three times that of A
(D) same as that of A
Answer:
(A) four times that of A

Question 4.
Two wires of the same material have radii rA and rB respectively. The radius of wire A is twice the radius of wire B. If they are stretched by same load then stress on wire B is ___
(A) equal to that of A
(B) half that of A.
(C) two times that of A.
(D) four times that of A.
Answer:
(D) four times that of A.

Question 5.
The length of a wire increases by 1% by a load of 2 kg wt. The linear strain produced in the wire will be
(A) 0.02
(B) 0.001
(C) 0.01
(D) 0.002
Answer:
(C) 0.01

Question 6.
A wire of length ‘L’, radius ‘r’ when stretched with a force ‘F’ changes in length by l’. What will be the change in length of a wire of same material having length ‘2L’ radius ‘2r and stretched by a force ‘2F’?
(A) l/2
(B) l
(C) 2l
(D) 4l
Answer:
(B) l

Question 7.
A force of 100 N produces a change of 0.1% in a length of wire of area of cross section 1 mm2. Young’s modulus of the wire is ____
(A) 105 N/m2
(B) 109 N/m2
(C) 1011 N/m2
(D) 1012 N/m2
Answer:
(C) 1011 N/m2

Question 8.
A copper wire (Y = 1 × 1011 N/m2) of length 6 m and a steel wire (Y = 2 × 1011 N/m2) of length 4 m each of cross-section 10-5 m2 are fastened end to end and stretched by a tension of 100 N. The elongation produced in the copper wire is
(A) 0.2 mm
(B) 0.4 mm
(C) 0.6 mm
(D) 0.8 mm
Answer:
(C) 0.6 mm

Question 9.
When a force is applied to the free end of a metal wire, metal wire undergoes
(A) longitudinal and lateral extension.
(B) longitudinal extension and lateral contraction.
(C) longitudinal contraction and lateral extension.
(D) longitudinal and lateral contraction.
Answer:
(B) longitudinal extension and lateral contraction.

Question 10.
A force of 1 N doubles the length of a cord having cross-sectional area 1 mm2. The Young’s modulus of the material of cord is
(A) 1 N m-2
(B) 0.5 × 106 N m-2
(C) 106 N m-2
(D) 2 × 106 N m-2
Answer:
(C) 106 N m-2

Question 11.
In equilibrium the tensile stress to which a wire of radius r is subjected by attaching a mass ‘m’ is ____.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 12.
When load is applied to a wire, the extension is 3 mm, the extension in the wire of same length but half the radius by the same load is
(A) 0.75 mm
(B) 6 mm
(C) 1.5 mm
(D) 12.0 mm
Answer:
(D) 12.0 mm

Question 13.
The S.I. unit of compressibility is ____.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}^{2}}{\mathrm{~N}}\)
(B) Nm2
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{m}^{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{kg}}{\mathrm{m}^{3}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}^{2}}{\mathrm{~N}}\)

Question 14.
When the pressure applied to one litre of a liquid is increased by 2 × 106 N/m2. Its volume decreases by 1 cm3. The bulk modulus of the liquid is
(A) 2 × 109 N/m2
(B) 2 × 103 dyne/cm2
(C) 2 × 103 N/m2
(D) 0.2 × 109 N/m2
Answer:
(A) 2 × 109 N/m2

Question 15.
A cube of aluminium of each side 0.1 m is subjected to a shearing force of 100 N. The top face of the cube is displaced through 0.02 cm with respect to the bottom face. The shearing strain would be
(A) 0.02
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.005
(D) 0.002
Answer:
(D) 0.002

Question 16.
A wire has Poisson’s ratio of 0.5. It is stretched by an external force to produce a longitudinal strain of 2 × 10-3. If the original diameter was 2 mm, the final diameter after stretching is
(A) 2.002 mm
(B) 1.998 mm
(C) 0.98 mm
(D) 1.999 mm
Answer:
(B) 1.998 mm

Question 17.
The compressibility of a substance is the reciprocal of ___.
(A) Young’s modulus
(B) Bulk modulus
(C) Modulus of rigidity
(D) Poisson’s ratio
Answer:
(B) Bulk modulus

Question 18.
For which of the following is the modulus of rigidity highest?
(A) Aluminium
(B) Quartz
(C) Rubber
(D) Water
Answer:
(B) Quartz

Question 19.
An elongation of 0.2% in a wire of cross-section 10-4 m2 causes a tension of 1000 N. Then its Young’s modulus is
(A) 6 × 108 N/m2
(B) 5 × 109 N/m2
(C) 108 N/m2
(D) 107 N/m2
Answer:
(B) 5 × 109 N/m2

Question 20.
Within the elastic limit, the slope of graph between stress against strain gives ____
(A) compressibility
(B) Poisson’s ratio
(C) modulus of elasticity
(D) extension
Answer:
(C) modulus of elasticity

Question 21.
Solids which break or rupture before the elastic limits are called
(A) brittle
(B) ductile
(C) malleable
(D) elastic
Answer:
(A) brittle

Question 22.
Substances which break just after their elastic limit is reached are ___.
(A) ductile
(B) brittle
(C) malleable
(D) plastic
Answer:
(B) brittle

Question 23.
Which of the following substances is ductile?
(A) glass
(B) high carbon steel
(C) Steel
(D) copper
Answer:
(D) copper

Question 24.
The Young’s modulus of a material is 1011 Nm-2 and its Poisson’s ratio is 0.2. The modulus of rigidity of the material is
(A) 0.42 × 1011 N/m2
(B) 0.42 × 1014 N/m2
(C) 0.42 × 1016 N/m2
(D) 0.42 × 1018 N/m2
Answer:
(A) 0.42 × 1011 N/m2

Question 25.
Two pieces of wire A and B of the same material have their lengths in the ratio 1:2, and their diameters are in the ratio 2:1. If they are stretched by the same force, their elongations will be in the ratio
(A) 2 : 1
(B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 8
(D) 8 : 1
Answer:
(C) 1 : 8

Question 26.
Young’s modulus of material of wire is ‘Y’ and strain energy per unit volume is ‘E’, then the strain is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 42
Answer:
(C) \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{Y}}}\)

Question 27.
Strain energy per unit volume is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 43
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{(\text { stress })^{2}}{\mathrm{Y}}\)

Question 28.
The strain energy per unit volume of the wire under increasing load is
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (stress)2 × strain
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × stress × (strain)2
(C) 0.5 × stress × strain
(D) 0.5 × (strain)2 × \(\frac{1}{Y}\)
Answer:
(C) 0.5 × stress × strain

Question 29.
The energy stored per unit volume of a strained wire is
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (load) × (extension)
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{Y}{(\text { strain })^{2}}\)
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Y × (strain)2
(D) Stress × strain
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Y × (strain)2

Question 30.
If work done in stretching a wire by 1 mm is 2 J, the work necessary for stretching another wire of same material, but with double the radius and half the length by 1 mm in joule is
(A) 1/4
(B) 4
(C) 8
(D) 16
Answer:
(D) 16

Question 31.
When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5 kg wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The work done during the extension of wire is
(A) 0.16 J
(B) 0.016 J
(C) 1.6 J
(D) 16 J
Answer:
(B) 0.016 J

Question 32.
A body lies on a table. Its weight is balanced by the ___.
(A) frictional force
(B) normal force
(C) force causing motion on the body
(D) surface of the table
Answer:
(B) normal force

Question 33.
The friction that exists between the surface of two bodies in contact when one body is sliding over the other, is called ___.
(A) rolling friction
(B) friction
(C) kinetic friction
(D) static friction.
Answer:
(C) kinetic friction

Question 34.
Limiting force of static friction does NOT depend on
(A) actual area of contact.
(B) geometrical area of contact.
(C) interlocking between surfaces in contact.
(D) intermolecular forces of attraction between molecules of the two surfaces.
Answer:
(C) interlocking between surfaces in contact.

Question 35.
In case of coefficient of static friction (µs), kinetic friction (µk) and rolling friction (µr), which of the following relation is true
(A) µs > µk > µr
(B) µs > µr > µk
(C) µr > µs > µk
(D) µr > µk > µs
Answer:
(A) µs > µk > µr

Question 36.
A body of weight 50 N is placed on a smooth surface. If the force required to move the body on the surface is 30 N, the coefficient of friction is
(A) 0.6
(B) 0.4
(C) 0.3
(D) 0.8
Answer:
(A) 0.6

Question 37.
A wooden block of 50 kg is at rest on the table. A force of 70 N is required to just slide the block. The coefficient of static friction is
(A) \(\frac{6}{7}\)
(B) \(\frac{5}{7}\)
(C) \(\frac{7}{35}\)
(D) \(\frac{1}{7}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{7}\)

Question 38.
When a block of mass M is suspended by a long wire of length L, the length of the wire becomes (L + l). The elastic potential energy stored in the extended wire is:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\)MgL
(C) Mgl
(D) MgL
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl
Hint: elastic potential energy: \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × L = \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl

Question 67.
A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of 4 kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 π ms-2, What will be the tensile stress that would be developed
(A) 6.2 × 106 N m-2
(B) 5.2 × 106 N m-2
(C) 3.1 × 106 N m-2
(D) 4.8 × 106 N m-2
Answer:
(C) 3.1 × 106 N m-2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 44

Question 68.
A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms-1. Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is closest to:
(A) 106 N m-2
(B) 104 N m-2
(C) 108 Nm-2
(D) 103 N m-2
Answer:
(A) 106 N m-2
Hint: d = 6 mm = 0.006 m, l = 42 cm = 0.42 m, ∆l = 20 cm = 0.2 m, m = 0.02 kg, v = 20 m/s
Energy stored in the catapult,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 45

Question 69.
The stress-strain curves are drawn for two different materials X and Y. It is observed that the ultimate strength point and the fracture point are close to each other for material X but are far apart for material Y. We can say that materials X and Y are likely to be (respectively),
(A) Plastic and ductile
(B) Ductile and brittle
(C) Brittle and ductile
(D) Brittle and plastic
Answer:
(C) Brittle and ductile
Hint: Ductile materials have a fracture strength lower than the ultimate Tensile strength (i.e., the points are far apart.) whereas in brittle materials, the fracture strength is equivalent to ultimate tensile strength (i.e., the points are close.)
∴ Material X is brittle and Y is ductile in nature.

Question 70.
The compressibility of water is ‘o’ per unit atmospheric pressure. The decrease in its volume ‘V’ due to atmospheric pressure ‘P’ will be
(A) \(\frac{\sigma \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\sigma P}{\mathrm{~V}}\)
(C) σPV
(D) \(\frac{\sigma}{\mathrm{PV}}\)
Answer:
(C) σPV

Question 71.
Two wires are made of the same material and have the same volume. The first wire has cross-sectional area A and the second wire has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of the first wire is increased by ∆l on applying a force F, how much force is needed to stretch the second wire by the same amount?
(A) 9 F
(B) 6 F
(C) 4 F
(D) F
Answer:
(A) 9 F
Hint: As material is same, Young’s modulus of two wires is same.
Also, volume of both wires is same.
V1 = V2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 46

Question 72.
A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in the radius of the sphere, \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dr}}{\mathrm{r}}\right)\),is:
where negative sign indicates volume decreases with increase in pressure.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathbf{3} \mathrm{Ka}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathrm{Ka}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{Ka}}{\mathrm{mg}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{Ka}}{3 \mathrm{mg}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathbf{3} \mathrm{Ka}}\)
Hint:
Bulk modulus is given as,
K = \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV} / \mathrm{V}}\right)\)
where negative sign indicates volume decreases with increase in pressure.
∴ Fractional decrease in volume will be,
\(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\)
If area of cross-section of cylinder is a, then,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 47

Question 73.
Two metal wires ‘P’ and ‘Q’ of same length and material are stretched by same load. Their masses are in the ratio m1 : m2. The ratio of elongations of wire ‘P’ to that of’Q’ is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 48
Answer:
(C) m2 : m1
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 49

Question 74.
The increase in energy of a metal bar of length ‘L’ and cross-sectional area ‘A’ when compressed with a load ‘M’ along its length is (Y = Young’s modulus of the material of metal bar)
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{2 \mathrm{AY}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{F}^{2} \mathbf{L}}{\mathbf{2 A Y}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{AY}}\)
(D) \(\frac{F^{2} L^{2}}{2 A Y}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{F}^{2} \mathbf{L}}{\mathbf{2 A Y}}\)
Hint:
U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{AY}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}^{2} \mathrm{~L}}{2 \mathrm{AY}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 1.
Mention some main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. Every massive object in the universe experiences a gravitational force.
  2. It is the force of mutual attraction between any two objects by virtue of their masses.
  3. It is always an attractive force with infinite range.
  4. It does not depend upon the intervening medium.
  5. It is much weaker than other fundamental forces. Gravitational force is 10 times weaker than the strong nuclear force.

Question 2.
State and explain Kepler’s law of orbits.
Answer:
Statement:
All planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun with the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse.
Explanation:

  1. The figure M shows the orbit of a around the planet P Sun.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 1
  2. Here, S and S’ are the foci of the ellipse and the Sun is situated at S.
  3. P is the closest point along the orbit from S and is called perihelion.
  4. A is the farthest point from S and is called aphelion.
  5. PA is the major axis whose length is 2a. PO and AO are the semimajor axes with lengths ‘a’ each.
    MN is the minor axis whose length is 2b. MO and ON are the semiminor axes with lengths ‘b’ each.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 3.
State and prove Kepler’s law of equal areas.
Answer:
Statement:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 2
The line that joins a planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
Explanation:
i)Kepler observed that planets move faster when they are nearer to the Sun while they move slower when they are farther from the Sun.

ii) Suppose the Sun is at the origin. The position of planet is denoted by \(\vec{r}\) and its momentum is denoted by \(\vec{p}\) (component ⊥ \(\vec{r}\)).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 35
vi) For central force the angular momentum is conserved. Hence, from equations (4) and (5),
\(\frac{\overrightarrow{\Delta \mathrm{A}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = constant
This proves the law of areas.

Question 4.
What is a central force?
Answer:
A central force on an object is a force which is always directed along the line joining the position of object and a fired point usually taken to the origin of the coordinate system.

Question 5.
State and explain Kepler’s law of periods.
Answer:
Statement:
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of the semimajor axis of the ellipse traced by the planet.
Explanation:
If r is length of semi major axis then, this law states that.
T2 × r3 or \(\frac{\mathrm{T}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\) = constant

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Solved Examples

Question 6.
What would be the average duration of year if the distance between the Sun and the Earth becomes
i) thrice the present distance.
ii) twice the present distance.
Solution:
i) Consider r1 be the present distance between the Earth and Sun
We know, T1 = 365 days.
When the distance is made thrice, r2 = 3r1
According to Kepler’s law of period,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 3
i) The duration of the year would be 1897 days when distance is made thrice.
ii) The duration of the year would be 1032 days when distance is made twice.

Question 7.
What would have been the duration of the year if the distance between the Earth and the Sun were half the present distance?
Solution:
Given: r2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{1}}{2}\)
∴ \(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}=\frac{1}{2}\)
To find. Time period (T2)
Formula: \(\left(\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}\right)^{3}\)
Calculation: We know. T1 = 365 days
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 36
= 365 × 0.3536
= 129.1
T2 = 129.1 days
The duration of the year would be 129.1 days.

Question 8.
Calculate the period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun. The ratio of the radius of Jupiter’s orbit to that of the Earth’s orbit is 5.
(Period of revolution of the Earth is 1 year.)
Solution:
Given: \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{J}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{E}}}=\frac{5}{\mathrm{l}}\), TE = 1 year
To find: Period of revolution of Jupiter (TJ)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
\(\left(\frac{T_{J}}{T_{E}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{J}}{r_{E}}\right)^{3}\)
∴ TJ = 53/2
= 5 x \(\sqrt {5}\)
= 11.18 years.
Period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun is 11.18 years.

Question 9.
A Saturn sear is 29.5 times the Earth’s year. How far is the Saturn from the Sun if the Earth is 1.50 × 108 km away from the Sun?
Solution:
Given: TS = 29.5 TE,
rE = 1.50 × 108 km
To find: Distance of Saturn form the Sun (rS)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 37
∴ rS = 14.32 × 108 km
Saturn is 14.32 × 108 km away from the Sun.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 10.
The distances of two planets from the Sun are 1013 m and 1012 m respectively. Find the ratio of time periods of the two planets.
Solution:
Given: r1 = 1013 m, r2 = 1012 m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 4

Question 11.
Heavy and light objects are released from same height near the Earth’s surface. What can we conclude about their acceleration?
Answer:
Heavy and light objects, when released from the same height, fall towards the Earth at the same speed., i.e., they have the same acceleration.

Question 12.
Explain how Newton concluded that gravitational force F ∝ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Answer:
Before generalising and stating universal law of gravitation, Newton first studied the motion of moon around the Earth.

  1. The known facts about the moon were,
    • the time period of revolution of moon around the Earth (T) = 27.3 days.
    • distance between the Earth and the moon (r) = 3.85 × 105 km.
    • the moon revolves around the Earth in almost circular orbit with constant angular velocity ω.
  2. Thus, the centripetal force experienced by moon (directed towards the centre of the Earth) is given by,
    F = mrω2 …………… (1)
    Where, m = mass of the moon
  3. From Newton’s laws of motion,
    F = ma
    ∴ a = rω2 ……………… (2)
  4. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 5
  5. This is the acceleration of the moon directed towards the centre of the Earth.
  6. This acceleration is much smaller than the acceleration felt by bodies near the surface of the Earth (while falling on Earth).
  7. The value of acceleration due to Earth’s gravity at the surface is 9.8 m/s2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 6
  8. Newton therefore concluded that the acceleration of an object towards the Earth is inversely proportional to the square of distance of object from the centre of the Earth.
    ∴ a ∝ \(\frac{1}{r^{2}}\)
    x. As, F = ma
    Therefore, the force exerted by the Earth on an object of mass m at a distance r from it is
    F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Similarly, an object also exerts a force on the Earth which is
    FE ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Where M is the mass of the Earth. .
  9. According to Newton’s third law of motion, F = FE. Thus, F is also proportional to the mass of the Earth. From these observations, Newton concluded that the gravitational force between the Earth and an object of mass m is F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 13.
Discuss the vector form of gravitational force between two masses with the help of diagram.
Answer:

  1. Consider two point masses m1 and m2 having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\) from origin O respectively as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 7
  2. The position vector of mass m2 with respect to m1 is given by, \(\vec{r}_{2}-\vec{r}_{1}=\vec{r}_{21}\)
  3. Similarly, position vector of mass m1 with respect to m2 is, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{1}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\)
  4. Let \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{21}}\right|\) Then, the force acting on mass m2 due to mass m1 will be given as,
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\right)\)
    where, \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is the unit vector from m1 to m2.
    The force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}\) is directed from m2 to m1.
  5. Similarly, force experienced by m1 due to m2 is given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\right)\)
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\)
    [Note: As \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is defined as unit vector from m1 to m2, conceptually force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\) is directed from m2 lo m1.]

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 14.
Why Is the law of gravitation known as universal law of gravitation?
Answer:
The law of gravitation is applicable to all material objects in the universe. Hence it is known as the universal law of gravitation.

Question 15.
Give formula for the gravitational force due to a collection of masses and represent it diagrammatically.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 8
For a collection of point masses, the force on any one of them is the vector sum of the gravitational forces exerted by all the other point masses.
For n particles, force on ith mass \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{i}}=\sum_{\mathrm{j}=1 \atop \mathrm{j} \neq \mathrm{i}}^{n} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{ij}}\)
where, \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{ij}}\) is the force on ith particle due to jth particle.

Question 16.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction due to a hollow, thin spherical shell of uniform density on a point mass situated inside it.
Answer:

  1. Let us consider the case when the point mass A, is at the centre of the hollow thin shell.
  2. In this case as every point on the shell is equidistant from A, all points exert force of equal magnitude on A but the directions of these forces are different.
  3. Consider the forces on A due to two diametrically opposite points on the shell.
  4. The forces on A due to them will be of equal magnitude but will be in opposite directions and will cancel each other.
  5. Thus, forces due to all pairs of points diametrically opposite to each other will cancel and there will be no net force on A due to the shell.
  6. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  7. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  8. Thus, some part of the shell may be closer to point A, but its mass is less. Remaining part will then have larger mass but its centre of mass is away from A.
  9. In this way, mathematically it can be shown that the net gravitational force on A is still zero, so long as it is inside the shell.
  10. Hence, the gravitational force at any point inside any hollow closed object of any shape is zero.

Question 17.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction between a hollow spherical shell or solid sphere of uniform density and a point mass situated outside the shell / sphere.
Answer:

  • Gravitational force caused by different regions of shell can be resolved into components along the line joining the point mass to the centre and along a direction perpendicular to this line.
  • The components perpendicular to this line cancel each other and the resultant force remains along the line joining the point to the centre.
  • Mathematical calculations show that, this resultant force on this point equals the force that would get exerted by the shell whose entire mass is situated at its centre.

Solved Problems

Question 18.
The gravitational force between two bodies is 1 N. If distance between them is doubled, what will be the gravitational force between them?
Solution:
Let m1 and m2 be masses of the given two bodies. If they are r distance apart initially, then the force between them will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 9
The force between two bodies reduces to 0.25 N.

Question 19.
Calculate the force of attraction between two metal spheres each of mass 90 kg, if the distance between their centres is 40 cm. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 90 kg, m2 = 90 kg,
r = 40 cm = 40 × 10-2 m.
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Force of attraction (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Calculation.
From formula,
F = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 90 \times 90}{\left(40 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{6.67 \times 8100}{1600} \times 10^{-7}\)
∴ F = 3.377 × 10-6 N
The force of attraction between the two metal spheres is 3.377 × 10-6 N.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 20.
Three particles A, B, and C each having mass m are kept along a straight line with AB = BC = 1. A fourth particle D is kept on the perpendicular bisector of AC at a distance ¡ from B. Determine the gravitational force on D.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 10
From figure,
distance of particle D, from particles A and C is.
ADCD = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{AB}^{2}+\mathrm{BD}^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(l)^{2}+(l)^{2}}=l \sqrt{2}\)
Gravitational force on particle D is the vector sum of forces due to particles A, B, and C. Gravitational force due to A,
FA = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gmm}}{(l \sqrt{2})^{2}}=\frac{\mathrm{Gm}^{2}}{2 l^{2}}\) = along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{DA}}\)
This force can he resolved into horizontal and vertical components using rectangular unit vectors as shown in figure.
From figure,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 11
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 12
Negative sign indicates net force is acting along DB.
The net force acting on particle D is \(\frac{\mathbf{G m}^{2}}{l^{2}}\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}+1\right)\) directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{D B}}\).

[Note: When force, in given case is resolved into its components, its horizontal component contains cos argument while vertical component contains sine argument.]

Question 21.
Three balls of masses 5 kg each are kept at points P(1, 2, 0) Q(2, 3, 0) and R(2, 2, 0). Find the gravitational force exerted on the ball at point R.
Solution:
The net force acting on ball placed at R will be vector sum of forces acting due to balls at P and Q.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 13
= 2.358 × 10-9 N
The net force acting on the ball at point R will be 2.358 × 10-9 N.

Question 22.
For what purpose Cavendish balance is used?
Answer:
Cavendish balance is used to find the magnitude of the gravitational constant G.

Question 23.
Describe the construction of Cavendish balance with the help of neat labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. The Cavendish balance consists of a light rigid rod. It is supported at the centre by a fine vertical metallic fibre about 100 cm long.
  2. Two small spheres, s1 and s2 of lead having equal mass m and diameter about 5 cm are mounted at the ends of the rod and a small mirror M is fastened to the metallic fibre as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 14
  3. The mirror can be used to reflect a beam of light onto a scale and thereby measure the angel through which the wire will be twisted.
  4. Two large lead spheres L1 and L2 of equal mass M and diameter of about 20 cm are kept close to the small spheres on opposite side as shown in figure.

Question 24.
Describe the working of the experiment performed to measure the value of gravitational constant.
Answer:

  1. In the experiment performed to find the magnitude of gravitational constant (G), Cavendish balance is used.
  2. The large spheres in the balance attract the nearby smaller spheres by equal and opposite force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\). Hence, a torque is generated without exerting any net force on the bar.
  3. Due to the torque the bar turns and the suspension wire gets twisted till the restoring torque due to the elastic property of the wire becomes equal to the gravitational torque.
  4. If r is the initial distance of separation between the centres of the large and the neighbouring small sphere, then the magnitude of the force between them is, F = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
  5. If length of the rod is L, then the magnitude of the torque arising out of these forces is
    τ = FL = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L
  6. At equilibrium, it is equal and opposite to the restoring torque.
    ∴ G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L = Kθ
    Where, K is the restoring torque per unit angle and θ is the angle of twist.
  7. By knowing the values of torque τ1 it and corresponding angle of twist a, the restoring torque per unit twist can be determined as K = τ1/α.
  8. Thus, in actual experiment measuring θ and knowing values of τ, m, M and r, the value of G can be calculated from equation (2).

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
Derive the expression for the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. The Earth is an extended object and can be assumed to be a uniform sphere.
  2. If the mass of the Earth is M and that of any point object is m, the distance of the point object from the centre of the Earth is r then the force of attraction between them is given by,
    F = \(\text { G } \frac{M m}{r^{2}}\) …. (1)
  3. If the point object is not acted upon by any other force, it will be accelerated towards the centre of the Earth under the action of this force. Its acceleration can be calculated by using Newton’s second law,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2),
    ma = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    ∴ Acceleration due to the gravity of the Earth
    \(=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \times \frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    This is denoted by g.
  5. If the object is close to the surface of the Earth, r ≈ R, then,
    gEarth’s surface = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)

Question 26.
Explain why the Earth doesn’t appear to move even though the object of mass m (m << M) kept on the Earth exerts equal and opposite gravitational force on it.
Answer:

  1. An object of mass m (much smaller than the mass of the Earth) is attracted towards the Earth and falls on it.
  2. At the same time, the Earth is also attracted by the equal and opposite force towards the mass m.
  3. However, its acceleration towards m will be,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 38
  4. As m << M, aEarth << g and is nearly zero. As, a result, practically only the mass m moves towards the Earth and the Earth doesn’t appear to move.

Solved Examples

Question 27.
Calculate mass of the Earth from given data, Acceleration due to gravity g = 9.81 m/s2, Radius of the Earth RE = 6.37 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Solution:
Given: g = 9.81 m/s2, RE = 6.37 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Mass of the Earth (ME)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 39
= antilog {0.9912 + 0.8041 + 0.8041 – 0.8241) × 1023
= antilog {1.7753} × 1023
= 59.61 × 1023
= 5.961 × 1024 kg
Mass of the Earth is 5.961 × 1024 kg.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 28.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth from the given data. (Mass of the Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, Radius of the Earth = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given. M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Tofind. Acceleration due to gravity (g)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 40
The acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth is 9.77 m/s2.

Question 29.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon if mass of the moon is 1/80 times that of the Earth and diameter of the moon is 1/4 times that of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Mm = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{E}}}{80}\), Rm = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{4}\), g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon (gm)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: For moon, from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 41
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Question 30.
Find the acceleration due to gravity on a planet that is 10 times as massive as the Earth and with radius 20 times of the radius of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2).
Solution:
Given: MP = 10 × Mass of the Earth = 10 ME,
RP = 20 × radius of the Earth = 20 RE, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet (gP)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 42
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 31.
Acceleration due to gravity on the Earth is g. A planet has mass and radius half that of the Earth. How much will be percentage change in the acceleration due to gravity on the planet?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 43
The percentage change in acceleration due to gravity between the planet and the Earth will be 100%.

Question 32.
Explain the graph showing variation of acceleration due to gravity with altitude and depth.
Answer:
The value of acceleration due to gravity is calculated to be maximum at the surface of the Earth. The value goes on decreasing with
i) increase in depth below the Earth’s surface. [varies linearly with (R – d) = r]

ii) increase in height above the Earth’s surface. [varies inversely with (R + h)2 = r2].
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 44
Graph of g, as a function of r, the distance from the centre of the Earth, is plotted as shown in figure.
For r< R,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
if r = R – d,
g(r) = g\(\left(\frac{r}{R}\right) \Rightarrow g(r) \propto r\)
Hence, the graph shows a straight line passing through origin and having slope \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{R}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 45
which is represented in the graph.

Question 33.
Why does the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth?
Answer:
Acceleration at depth d due to gravity is given
by,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
As, at centre of the Earth d = R ⇒ gd = 0.
Hence, the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth.

Question 34.
Discuss the variation of acceleration due to gravity at poles and equator due to latitude of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Effective acceleration due to gravity at P is given as,
    g’ = g – Rω2cos2θ.
  2. As the value of θ increases, cos θ decreases. Therefore g’ will increase as we move away from equator towards any pole due to the rotation of the Earth.
  3. At equator θ = 0°
    ∴ cos θ = 1
    ∴ g’e = g – Rω2
    The effective acceleration due to gravity (g’e) is minimum at equator, as here it is reduced by Rω2
  4. At poles θ = 90° cos θ = 0
    ∴ g’p = g – Rω2 cos θ
    = g – 0
    = g
    There is no reduction in acceleration due to gravity at poles, due to the rotation of the Earth as the poles are lying on the axis of rotation and do not revolve.

Question 35.
If g = 9.8 m/s2 on the surface of the Earth, find its value at h = \(\frac{\mathbf{R}}{\mathbf{2}}\) from the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: g = 9.8 m/s2, h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Acceleration due to gravity (gh)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{h}}}{\mathrm{g}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}^{2}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^{2}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 46
At h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\) from the surface of the Earth, the value of g is 4.35 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 36.
At what distance above the surface of Earth the acceleration due to gravity decreases by 10% of its value at the surface? (Radius of Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 90% of g i.e., \(\frac{g_{h}}{g}\) = 0.9,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Distance above the surface of the Earth (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 47

Question 37.
Find the altitude at which the acceleration due to gravity is 25% of that at the surface of the Earth.
(Radius of the Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 25% of g = \(\frac{25}{100} \times \mathrm{g}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\), R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height (h)
Formula: gh = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\) = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
(R + h)2 = 4R2
R + h = 2R
∴ h = 2R – R
∴ h = R
∴ h = 6400 km

Question 38.
A hole is drilled half way to the centre of the Earth. A body is dropped into the hole. How much will it weigh at the bottom of the hole if the weight of the body on the Earth’s surface is 350 N?
Solution:
Given: W = mg = 350 N, d = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Weight at certain depth (Wd)
Formula: gd = \(\mathrm{g}\left[1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right]\)
Calculation: Since Wd = mgd,
from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 48

Question 39.
Assuming the Earth to be a homogeneous sphere, determine the density of the Earth from following data. (g = 9.8 m/s2, G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given g = 9.8 m/s2,
G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Density (ρ)
Formula: g = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R} \rho \mathrm{G}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 49

Question 40.
If the Earth were a perfect sphere of radius 6.4 × 106 m rotating about its axis with the period of one day (8.64 × 104 s), what is the difference in acceleration due to gravity from poles to equator?
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, T = 8.64 × 104 s
To find: Difference in acceleration due to gravity (gP – gE)
Formula: g’ = g – Rω2 cos2θ
Calculation: Since ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\)
∴ ω = \(\frac{2 \times 3.14}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\) = \(\frac{6.28}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 0.7268 × 10-4
ω = 7.268 × 10-5 rad/s
At poles, θ = 90°
From formula,
gP = g – Rω2cos2 (90°)
= g – 0 ….(∵ cos 90° = 0)
∴ gP = g …. (i)
At equator, θ = 0°,
∴ gE = g – Rω2cos2
gE = g – Rω2 …. (ii)
Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i), we have,
gP – gE = g – (g – Rω2)
∴ gP – gE = Rω2
= 6.4 × 106 × (7.268 × 10-5)2
= 6.4 × 106 × 52.82 × 10-10
= 338 × 10-4
∴ gP – gE = 3.38 × 10-2 m/s2

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 41.
The Earth is rotating with angular velocity ω about its own axis. R is the radius of the Earth. If Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, calculate the weight of a body of mass 100 gram at latitude 25°. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, θ = 25°,
m = 0.1 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Weight (W)

Formulae:
i) g’ = g – Rω2 cos2 θ
ii) W = mg

Calculation:
From formula (i),
g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 – cos2 (25°)]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 × (0.9063)2]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – 0.02781
∴ g’ = 9.772 m/s2
From formula (ii),
W = 0.1 × 9.772
∴ W = 0.9772 N

Question 42.
If the angular speed of the Earth is 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s and radius of the Earth is 6,400 km, calculate the change in weight of 1 kg of mass taken from equator to pole.
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, ω = 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s
To find: Change in weight (∆W)
Formulae:
i) ∆g = gp – geq = Rω2
ii) ∆W = m∆g

Calculation: From formula (i) and (ii),
∆W = m(Rω2)
= 1 × 6.4 × 106 × (7.26 × 10-5)2
= 3373 × 10-5 N

Question 43.
Define potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy is the work done against conservative force (or forces) in achieving a certain position or configuration of a given system.

Question 44.
Explain with examples the universal law which states that “Every system always configures itself in order to have minimum potential energy or every system tries to minimize its potential energy”.
Answer:
Example 1:

  1. A spring in its natural state, possesses minimum potential energy. Whenever we stretch it or compress it, we perform work against the conservative force.
  2. Due to this work, the relative distances between the particles of the system change i.e., configuration changes and potential energy of the spring increases.
  3. The spring finally regains its original configuration of minimum potential energy on removal of the applied force.
    This explains that the spring always try to rearrange itself in order to attain minimum potential energy.

Example 2:

  1. When an object is lying on the surface of the Earth, the system of that object and the Earth has minimum potential energy.
  2. This is the gravitational potential energy of the system as these two are bound by the gravitational force. While lifting the object to some height, we do work against the conservative gravitational force.
  3. In its new position, the object is at rest due to balanced forces. However, now, the object has a capacity to acquire kinetic energy, when allowed to fall.
  4. This increase in the capacity is the potential energy gained by the system. The object falls on the Earth to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy on dropping it from the new position.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 45.
Obtain an expression for change in gravitational potential energy of any object displaced from one point to another.
Answer:
i) Work done against gravitational force in displacing an object through a small displacement, stored in the system in the form of increased potential energy of the system.
∴ dU = –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dr}}\)
Negative sign appears because dU is the work done against the gravitational force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\).

ii) For displacement of the object from an initial position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{i}}}\) to the final position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}}\), the change in potential energy ∆U, can be obtained by integrating dU.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 50

 

iii) Gravitational force of the Earth, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}}\) = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\) where \(\hat{r}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).
Negative sign appears here because \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) is directed towards centre of the Earth and opposite to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).

iv) For Earth and mass system,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 51
Hence, change in potential energy corresponds to the work done against conservative forces.

Question 46.
Using expression for change in potential energy, show that gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and the Earth with separation of r is, –\(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\text { r }}\)
Answer:

  1. Change in P.E. for a system of Earth and mass is given by,
    ∆U = GMm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
  2. For gravitational force, point of zero potential energy is taken to be at r = ∞.
  3. Hence, U(ri) = 0 at ri = ∞
    Final point rf is the point where the potential energy of the system is to be determined.
  4. At rf = r
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 52
    This is gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and Earth of mass M having separation r (between their centres of mass).

Question 47.
Derive the formula for increase in gravitational potential energy of a Earth – mass system when the mass is lifted to a height h provided h << R.
Answer:

  1. If the object is on the surface of Earth, r = R
    U1 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
    If the object is lifted to height h above the surface of Earth, the potential energy becomes _ GMm 12 ~~ R+h
    U2 = –\(\frac{G M m}{R+h}\)
  2. Increase in the potential energy is given by
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 53
  3. If g is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Earth. GM = gR2
    ∴ ∆U = mgh\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)\) … (1)
  4. Equation (1) gives the work to be done to raise an object of mass rn to a height h, above the surface of the Earth.
  5. If h << R, we can use R + h ≈ R.
    ∴ ∆U = mgh
    Thus, mgh is increase in the gravitational potential energy of the Earth – mass system if an object of mass m is lifted to a height h, provided h << R.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 48.
Write a short note on gravitational potential.
Answer:
The gravitational potential energy of the system of Earth and any mass m at a distance r from the centre of the Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 54
The factor –\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = (VE)r is defined as the
gravitational potential of Earth at distance r from its centre.

As the potential depends only upon mass of the Earth and location of the object, it is same for any mass m bound to the Earth.

Question 49.
Explain the relation between the gravitational potential energy and the gravitational potential.
Answer:

  1. In terms of potential, we can write the potential energy of the Earth-mass system as, Gravitational potential energy (U) = Gravitational potential (Vr) × mass (m)
  2. Thus, gravitational potential is gravitational potential energy per unit mass.
    ∴ Vr = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
  3. For any conservative force field, the concept of potential can be defined on similar lines.
  4. Gravitational potential difference between any two points in gravitational field can be written as,
    V2 – V1 = \(\frac{U_{2}-U_{1}}{m}\)
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{dW}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
    This is the work done (or change in potential energy) per unit mass.
  5. Therefore, in general, for a system of any two masses m1 and m2, separated by distance r, we can write,
    U = –\(\frac{\mathrm{G} \mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
    = (V1)m2
    = (V2)m1
    Here V1 and V2 are gravitational potentials at r due to m1 and m2 respectively.

Solved Exmaples

Question 50.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is raised from height RE above the Earth’s surface to 5/2 RE above the Earth’s surface? RE and ME are the radius and mass of the Earth respectively.
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
Here, ri = RE + RE = 2 RE
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 55
[Note: Answer calculated above is in accordance with textual methods of calculation.]

Question 51.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is placed on the surface of the Earth from height R above the Earth’s surface?
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{r}}\)
Here, ri = R + R = 2R
Similarly, rf = R
∴ ∆U = GMEm \(\left[\frac{1}{2 R}-\frac{1}{R}\right]\) = GMEm\(\left(-\frac{1}{2 R}\right)\)
∴ ∆U = –\(\frac{\mathbf{G} \mathbf{M} \mathbf{m}}{\mathbf{2 R}}\)
Negative sign indicates that potential energy is decreasing.

Question 52.
Determine the gravitational potential of a body of mass 80 kg whose gravitational potential energy is 5 × 109 J on the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: m = 80 kg, U = 5 × 109 J
To find: Gravitational potential (V)
Formula: V = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
V = \(\frac{5 \times 10^{9}}{80}=\frac{25}{4}\) × 107
= 6.25 × 107 J kg-1
Potential of the body at the surface of the Earth is 6.25 × 107 J kg-1.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 53.
Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the surface of the Earth.
(Average density of Earth = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, radius of Earth R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: ρ = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Escape velocity (ve)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 27
= 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 8.759 × 10-4
∴ ve = 11.21 × 103 m/s = 11.21 km/s
The escape velocity of a body is 11.21 km/s.

Question 54.
What is a satellite?
Answer:
An object which revolves in an orbit around a planet is called as satellite.
Example:

  • Moon is a natural satellite of the Earth.
  • INSAT is an artificial satellite of the Earth.

Question 55.
Write a short note on Polar satellites.
Answer:

  1. Polar Satellites are placed in lower polar orbits.
  2. They are at low altitude 500 km to 800 km.
  3. Period of revolution of polar satellite is nearly 85 minutes, so it can orbit the Earth 16 time per day.
  4. They go around the poles of the Earth in a north-south direction while the Earth rotates in an east-west direction about its own axis.
  5. The polar satellites have cameras fixed on them. The camera can view small stipes of the Earth in one orbit. In entire day the whole Earth can be viewed strip by strip.
  6. Polar region and equatorial regions close to it can be viewed by these satellites.
  7. Polar satellites are used for weather forecasting and meteorological purpose. They are also used for astronomical observations and study of Solar radiations.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 56.
Derive the expression for the critical velocity of a satellite revolving close to the surface of the Earth in terms of acceleration due to gravity.
Answer:

  1. When the satellite is revolving close to the surface of the Earth, the height is very small as compared to the radius of the Earth.
  2. Hence the height can be neglected and radius of the orbit is nearly equal to R, i.e., R + h ≈ R
  3. The critical speed of the satellite then becomes,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  4. G is related to acceleration due to gravity by the relation,
    g = \(\frac{G M}{R^{2}}\)
    ∴ GM = gR2
  5. Thus, critical speed in terms of acceleration due to gravity, neglecting the air resistance, can be obtained as,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{gR}^{2}}{\mathrm{R}}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)

Question 57.
From an inertial frame of reference, explain the apparent weight for a person standing in a lift having zero acceleration.
Answer:

  1. A passenger inside a lift experiences only two forces:
    • Gravitational force mg directed vertically downwards and
    • normal reaction force N directed vertically upwards, exerted by the floor of the lift.
  2. As these forces are oppositely directed, the net force in the downward direction will be F = ma – N.
  3. Though the weight of a passenger is the gravitational force acting upon it, the person experiences his weight only due to the normal reaction force N exerted by the floor.
  4. A lift has zero acceleration when the lift is at rest or is moving upwards or downwards with constant velocity.
  5. Thus, a net force acting on the passenger inside the lift will be,
    F = 0 = mg – N
    ∴ mg = N
    Hence, in this case the passenger feels his normal weight mg.

Question 58.
What happens to the apparent weight of the person inside the lift moving with net upward acceleration?
Answer:

  1. The lift is said to be moving with net upward acceleration in two possible conditions:
    • when the lift just starts moving upwards or
    • is about to stop at a lower floor during its downward motion.
  2. As the net acceleration is upwards, the upward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = N – mg
    ∴ N = mg + ma
    ∴ N > mg
  3. Thus, for a passenger inside this lift, his apparent weight is more than his actual weight when the lift was not accelerated.

Question 59.
Why does a passenger feel lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion?
Answer:

  1. When the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion it has a net downward acceleration.
  2. As the net acceleration is downwards, the downward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = mg – N
    ∴ N = mg – ma
    i.e., N < mg
    Hence, a passenger feels lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion.

Question 60.
When does a weighing machine will record zero for a passenger in a lift?
Answer:
If the cables of the lift are cut, the downward acceleration of the lift, ad = g. In this case, we get,
N = mg – mad = 0
Thus, there will not be any feeling of weight and the weighing machine will record zero.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 61.
Define time period of a satellite.
Obtain an expression for the period of a satellite in a circular orbit round the Earth. Show that the square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the orbital radius.
Answer:
Definition:
The time taken by a satellite to complete one revolution around the Earth is called its time period.
Expression for time period:
i) Consider, m = mass of satellite, h = altitude of satellite. Thus, r = R + h = radius of orbit of the satellite.
ii) In one revolution, distance traced by satellite is equal to circumference of its circular orbit.
iii) If T is the time period of satellite, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 28
Since π2, G and M are constant,
∴ T2 ∝ r3
Hence, square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the radius of its orbit.

vi) Taking square roots on both the sides of equation (4), we get,
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{r}^{3}}{\mathrm{GM}}}\)
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
This is the required expression for period of satellite orbiting around the Earth in circular path.

Question 62.
For an orbiting satellite very close to surface of the Earth, show that T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{g}}}\).
Answer:

  1. Time period of an orbiting satellite at certain height is given by, T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
  2. If satellite is orbiting very close to the Earth’s surface, then h ≈ 0
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 29

Solved Examples

Question 63.
Show that the critical velocity of a body revolving in a circular orbit very close to the surface of a planet of radius R and
mean density ρ is 2R\(\sqrt{\frac{G \pi \rho}{3}}\).
Solution:
Since the body is revolving very close to the surface of a planet,
∴ h << R
R = radius of planet
ρ = mean density of planet
Critical velocity of a body very close to Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 30

Question 64.
Find the orbital speed of the satellite w hen satellite is revolving round the Earth in circular orbit at a distance 9 × 106 m from its centre. (Given: Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: r = 9 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Orbital speed (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 31
∴ vc = 6.668 × 103 m/s
The orbital speed of the satellite is 6.668 × 103 m/s.

Question 65.
Taking radius of the Earth as 6400 km and g at the Earth’s surface as 9.8 m/s2, calculate the speed of revolution of a satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface.
Solution:
Given: R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Critical velocity (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
vc = \(\sqrt{9.8 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\sqrt{98 \times 64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 7\(\sqrt{2}\) × 8 ×102
= 7.92 × 103 m/s
The speed of revolution of the satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface is 7.92 × 103 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 66.
The critical velocity of a satellite revolving around the Earth is 10 km/s at a height where gh = 8 m/s 2. Calculate the height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth. (R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: vc = 10 km/s = 10 × 103 m/s,
gh = 8 m/s3, R = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height of the satellite (h)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{g_{\mathrm{h}}(R+h)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
10 × 103 = \(\sqrt{8 \times(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
Squaring both the sides, we get,
100 × 106 = 8(R + h)
∴ 8(R + h) = 100 × 106
∴ R + h = \(\frac{100}{8}\) × 106
∴ h = 12.5 × 106 – R
= 12.5 × 106 – 6.4 × 106
= 6.1 × 106m
∴ h = 6100 km
The height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth is 6100 km.

Question 67.
An artificial satellite revolves around a planet in circular orbit close to its surface. Obtain the formula for period of the satellite in terms of density p and radius R of planet.
Solution:
Time period of a satellite revolving around the planet at certain height is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 15

Question 68.
Calculate the period of revolution of a polar satellite orbiting close to the surface of the Earth. Given R = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: For satellite close to Earth surface,
R + h ≈ R
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period of satellite (T)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
Calculation: From Formula,
T = 2 × 3.14 × \(\sqrt{\frac{6.4 \times 10^{6}}{9.8}}\)
= 6.28 × 8.081 × 102
= 5.075 × 103 sec
≈ 85 min
The time period of satellite very close to the Earth’s surface is nearly 85 minute.

Question 69.
A satellite orbits around the Earth at a height equal to R of the Earth. Find its period. (R = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: h = R = 6.4 × 106m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 33
The time period of the satellite is 1.435 × 104 s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 70.
Calculate the height of the communication satellite. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
For communication satellite, T = 24 × 60 × 60 s,
Given: M = 6 × 1024 kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m
To find: Height (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 34
The height of the communication satellite is 35910 km.

Question 71.
How will you ‘weigh the Sun’, that is estimate its mass? The mean orbital radius of the Earth around the Sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
Solution:
Given: r = 1.5 × 108 × 103m,
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
To find: Mass (M)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{r^{3}}{G M}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
M = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} r^{3}}{G T^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{4 \times(3.14)^{2}\left(1.5 \times 10^{11}\right)^{3}}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right)(365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^{2}}\)
∴ M = 2.01 × 1030kg
The mass of the Sun is 2.01 × 1030 kg.
[Trick: To ‘weigh the Sun’, i.e., estimate its mass, one needs to know the period of one of its planets and the radius of the planetary orbit.]

Question 72.
Calculate the B.E. of a satellite of mass 2000 kg moving in an orbit very close to the surface of the Earth. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 2 × 103 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
R = 6.4 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
M = 6 × 1024 kg
To find: Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formula: For satellite very close to Earth,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 2 \times 10^{3}}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 6.25 × 1010 joule
The binding energy of the satellite is 6.25 × 1010 joule.

Question 73.
Find the binding energy of a body of mass 50 kg at rest on the surface of the Earth. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
M = 6 × 1024 kg, m = 50 kg
To find: Binding energy (B.E.)
Formula: B.E. = \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 50}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\frac{2001}{6.4}\) × 107
∴ B.E. = 3.127 × 109 J
The binding energy of the body 3.127 × 109 J.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 74.
Find the total energy and binding energy of an artificial satellite of mass 1000 kg orbiting at height of 1600 km above the Earth’s surface.
(Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: h = 1600 km = 1.6 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024kg
To find:
i) Total Energy (T.E.)
ii) Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formulae: i. T.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
ii. B.E. = -T.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
T.E = – \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2(6.4+1.6) \times 10^{6}}\)
= –\(\frac{40020 \times 10^{7}}{2 \times 8}\)
∴ T.E. = -2.501 × 1010J
From formula (ii),
B.E. = 2.501 × 1010 J
i) The total energy of the artificial satellite is -2.501 × 1010 J.
ii) The binding energy of the artificial satellite is 2.501 × 1010 J.

Question 75.
Determine the binding energy of satellite of mass 1000 kg revolving in a circular orbit around the Earth when it is close to the surface of Earth. Hence find kinetic energy and potential energy of the satellite. (Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, radius of Earth = 6400 km; gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024 kg,
R = 6400 km, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find:
i) Binding Energy (B.E.)
ii)Kinetic Energy (K.E.)
iii) Potential Energy (P.E.)

Formulae: For satellite very close to Earth,
i) B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
ii) K.E.= B.E.
iii) P.E. = -2 K.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (ii),
K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010
∴ K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (iii),
P.E. = -2(3.1265 × 1010)
∴ P.E. = -6.2530 × l010J
i) The binding energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
ii) The kinetic energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
iii) The potential energy of the satellite is -6.2530 × 1010J.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 76.
How are Kepler’s law of periods and Newton’s law of gravitation related?
Answer:
Consider a planet of mass m revolving around the Sun of mass M in a circular orbit.
Let,
r = radius of the circular orbit of the planet.
T = Time period of revolution of planet around the Sun.
ω = angular velocity of planet.
F = Centripetal force exerted by the Sun on the planet.
Centripetal force is given by,
F = mrω2;
But ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)
∴ F = mr (\(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\))2
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{T}^{2}}\) …(i)
According to Kepler’s third law,
T2 ∝ r3
T2 = Kr3 ……….. (where, K = constant) (ii)
Substituting equation (ii) in equation (i),
F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{Kr}^{3}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) ….(∵ \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}}\) is a constant quantity)
Since, the gravitational attraction between the Sun and the planet is mutual, force exerted by the planet on the Sun will be proportional to the mass M of the Sun.
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
The above equation represents Newton’s law of gravitation. In this manner, Newton’s law of gravitation is derived from Kepler’s law of periods.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 77.
Represent graphically the variation of total energy, kinetic energy and potential energy of a satellite with its distance from the centre of the Earth.
Answer:
For a satellite,
Potential energy (U) = \(\)
Kinetic energy (K) = \(\) and
Total energy (E) = \(\), where, r = R + h
Also, U and E remain negative whereas K remains positive.
Hence, the graph will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 1.1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Kepler’s law of equal areas is an outcome of
(A) conservation of energy
(B) conservation of linear momentum
(C) conservation of angular momentum
(D) conservation of mass
Answer:
(C) conservation of angular momentum

Question 2.
Amongst given statements, choose the correct statement.
(I) Kepler derived the laws of planetary motion.
(II) Newton provided the reason behind the laws of planetary motion.
(A) (I) is correct.
(B) (II) is correct.
(C) Both (I) and (II) are correct.
(D) Neither (I) nor (II) is correct.
Answer:
(B) (II) is correct.

Question 3.
The figure shows the motion of a planet satellite in terms of mean density of Earth. around the Sun in an elliptical orbit with Sun at the focus. The shaded areas A and B are also shown in the figure which can be assumed to be equal. If t1 and t2 represent the time for the planet to move from a to b and d to c respectively, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 16
(A) t1 < t2
(B) t1 >t2
(C) t1 = t2
(D) t1 ≤ t2
Answer:
(C) t1 = t2

Question 4.
A planet is revolving around a star in a circular orbit of radius R with a period T. If the gravitational force between the planet and the star is proportional to R-3/2, then
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2
(B) T2 ∝ R-7/2
(C) T2 ∝ R3/2
(D) T2 ∝ R4
Answer:
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2

Question 5.
Time period of revolution of a satellite around a planet of radius R is T. Period of revolution around another planet whose radius is 3R is
(A) T
(B) 9T
(C) 3T
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T
Answer:
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T

Question 6.
Newton’s law of gravitation is called universal law because
(A) force is always attractive.
(B) it is applicable to lighter and heavier bodies.
(C) it is applicable at all times,
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.
Answer:
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.

Question 7.
If the mass of a body is M on the surface of the Earth, the mass of the same body on the surface of the moon is
M
(A) 6M
(B) \(\frac{M}{6}\)
(C) M
(D) Zero
Answer:
(C) M

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 8.
Which of the following statements about the gravitational constant is true?
(A) It has no units.
(B) It has same value in all systems of units.
(C) It is a force.
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.
Answer:
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.

Question 9.
The gravitational force between two bodies is ______
(A) attractive at large distance only
(B) attractive at small distance only
(C) repulsive at small distance only
(D) attractive at all distances large or small
Answer:
(D) attractive at all distances large or small

Question 10.
Mass of a particle at the centre of the Earth is
(A) infinite.
(B) zero.
(C) same as at other places.
(D) greater than at the poles.
Answer:
(C) same as at other places.

Question 11.
Which of the following is not a property of gravitational force?
(A) It is an attractive force.
(B) It acts along the line joining the two bodies.
(C) The forces exerted by two bodies on each other form an action-reaction pair.
(D) It has a very finite range of action.
Answer:
(D) It has a very finite range of action.

Question 12.
If the distance between Sun and Earth is made two third times of the present value, then gravitational force between them will become
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)times
(B) \(\frac{2}{3}\)times
(C) \(\frac{1}{3}\)times
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times

Question 13.
The gravitational constant G is equal to 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2 in vacuum. Its value in a dense matter of density 1010 g/cm3 will be
(A) 6.67 × 10-1 N m2/kg2
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
(C) 6.67 × 10-10 N m2/kg2
(D) 6.67 × 10-21 N m2/kg2
Answer:
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2

Question 14.
Acceleration due to gravity above the Earth’s surface at a height equal to the radius of the Earth is ______
(A) 2.5 m/s2
(B) 5 m/s2
(C) 9.8 m/s2
(D) 10 m/s2
Answer:
(A) 2.5 m/s2

Question 15.
If R is the radius of the Earth and g is the acceleration due to gravity on the Earth’s surface, the mean density of the Earth is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 2
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~g}}{4 \pi \mathrm{RG}}\)

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 16.
Variation of acceleration due to gravity (g) with distance x from the centre of the Earth is best represented by (R → Radius of the Earth)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 3
Answer:
(D)

Question 17.
Which of the following statements is not correct for the decrease in the value of acceleration due to gravity?
(A) As we go down from the surtce of the Earth towards its centre.
(B) As we go up from the surface of the Earth.
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.
(D) As the rotational velocity of the Earth is increased.
Answer:
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.

Question 18.
Calculate angular velocity of Earth so that acceleration due to gravity at 60° latitude becomes zero. (Radius of Earth = 6400 km, gravitational acceleration at poles = 10 m/s2, cos60° = 0.5)
(A) 7.8 × 10-2 rad/s
(B) 0.5 × 10-3 radis
(C) 1 × 10-3 radis
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s
Answer:
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s

Question 19.
The gravitational potential energy per unit mass at a point gives ________ at that point.
(A) gravitational field
(B) gravitational potential
(C) gravitational potential energy
(D) gravitational force
Answer:
(B) gravitational potential

Question 20.
A satellite is orbiting around a planet at a constant height in a circular orbit. If the mass of the planet is reduced to half, the satellite would
(A) fall on the planet.
(B) go to an orbit of smaller radius.
(C) go to an orbit of higher radius,
(D) escape from the planet.
Answer:
(D) escape from the planet.

Question 21.
How does the escape velocity of a particle depend on its mass?
(A) m2
(B) m
(C) m0
(D) m-1
Answer:
(C) m0

Question 22.
Escape velocity on a planet is ve. If radius of the planet remains same and mass becomes 4 times, the escape velocity becomes
(A) 4ve
(B) 2ve
(C) ve
(D) 0.5 ve
Answer:
(B) 2ve

Question 23.
If the escape velocity of a body on Earth is 11.2 km/s, the escape velocity of the body thrown at an angle 45° with the horizontal will be
(A) 11.2 km/s
(B) 22.4 km/s
(C) \(\frac{11.2}{\sqrt{2}}\)km/s
(D) 11.2 \(\sqrt{2}\) km/s
Answer:
(A) 11.2 km/s

Question 24.
Potential energy of a body in the gravitational field of planet is zero. The body must be
(A) at centre of planet.
(B) on the surface of planet.
(C) at infinity.
(D) at distance equal to radius of Earth.
Answer:
(C) at infinity.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
If gravitational force of Earth disappears, what will happen to the satellite revolving round the Earth?
(A) Satellite will come back to Earth.
(B) Satellite will continue to revolve.
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.
(D) Satellite will start falling towards centre.
Answer:
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.

Question 26.
If ve and vo represent the escape velocity and orbital velocity of a satellite corresponding to a circular orbit of radius R respectively, then
(A) ve = vo
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve
(C) ve = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)vo
(D) ve and vo are not related
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve

Question 27.
If the kinetic energy of a satellite is 2 × 104 J, then its potential energy will be
(A) – 2 × 104 J
(B) 4 × 104 J
(C) -4 × 104 J
(D) -104J
Answer:
(C) -4 × 104 J

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
A body weighs 200 N on the surface of the Earth. How much will it weigh half way down to the centre of the Earth?
(A) 250 N
(B) 100 N
(C) 150 N
(D) 200 N
Answer:
(B) 100 N
Hint:
Acceleration due to gravity at depth d,
gd = g (1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
= g(1 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)) …(∵ d = \(\frac{1}{2}\))
∴ gd = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)
Weight of the body at depth d = R/2,
Wd = mgd = m × g/2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 200
∴ Wd = 100 N

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 2.
The work done to raise a mass m from the surface of the Earth to a height h, which is equal to the radius of the Earth, is:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\) mgR
(C) mgR
(D) 2mgR
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
Hint:
Initial potential energy on Earth’s surface,
Ui = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Final potential energy at height h = R
Uf = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
Work done, W = Uf – Ui
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 4
∴ W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR

Question 3.
The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h, at a height 6RE (RE is radius of Earth) from surface of Earth. The time period of another satellite whose height is 2.5 RE from surface will be,
(A) \(\frac{12}{2.5}\)h
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(C) 12\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(D) \(\frac{24}{2.5}\)h
Answer:
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
Hint:
By Kepler’s third law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 6

Question 4.
Assuming that the gravitational potential energy of an object at infinity is zero, the change in potential energy (final – initial) of an object of mass m, when taken to a height h from the surface of Earth (of radius R), is given by,
(A) \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(B) – \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
(D) mgh
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
Hint:
Potential energy of object of mass m on the surface of Earth,
P.E = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Potential energy of object of mass m at a height h from the surface of the Earth,
P.E.’ = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)
∴ Change in potential energy
= P.E.’ – P.E.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 7

Question 5.
A body mass ‘m’ is dropped from height \(\), from Earth’s surface, where ‘R’ is the radius of Earth. Its speed when it will hit the Earth’s surface is (ve = escape velocity from Earth’s surface)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 8
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{v}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 9
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 10

Question 6.
According to Kepler’s Law, the areal velocity of the radius vector drawn from the Sun to any planet always
(A) decreases.
(B) first increases and then decreases.
(C) remains constant.
(D) increases.
Answer:
(C) remains constant.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 7.
A body is thrown from the surface of the Earth with velocity ‘u’ m/s. The maximum height in m above the surface of the Earth upto which it will reach is (R = radius of Earth, g = acceleration due to gravity)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 11
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{u^{2} R}{2 g R-u^{2}}\)
Hint:
(T.E.) on surface = (T.E.) at height ‘h’
∴ (K.E.)1 + (P.E.)1 = (K.E.)2 + (P.E.)2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 12
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 13

Question 8.
A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ above the surface of the Earth of radius ‘R’. The speed of the satellite in its orbit is one-fourth the escape velocity from the surface of the Earth. The relation between ‘h’ and ‘R’ is
(A) h = 2R
(B) h = 3R
(C) h = 5R
(D) h = 7R
Answer:
(D) h = 7R
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 14

Question 9.
Two astronauts are floating in gravitational free space after having lost contact with their spaceship. The two will:
(A) keep floating at the same distance between them.
(B) move towards each other.
(C) move away from each other.
(D) will become stationary.
Answer:
(B) move towards each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 1.
‘Rest and motion are relative concepts.’ Explain the statement with an example.
Answer:

  1. A body can be described to be at rest or in motion with respect to a system of co¬ordinate axes known as the frame of reference.
  2. A body is in motion if it changes its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference. On the other hand, a body is at rest if it does not change its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference.
  3. An object can be said to be at rest with respect to a frame of reference while the same object can be said to be in motion with respect to a different frame of reference.
    Example: In a running train, all the travellers in the train are in a state of rest if the train is taken as the frame of reference. On the other hand, all the travellers in the train are in a state of motion if ground (or platform) is taken as the frame of reference.
  4. Thus, motion and rest always need a frame of reference to be described. Hence, rest and motion are relative concepts.

Question 2.
Explain how acceleration and initial velocity decides the trajectory of a motion.
Answer:

  1. The resultant motion is linear if:
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) = 0 (starting from rest) and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is in any direction.
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration a is in line with the initial velocity (same or opposite direction).
  2. The resultant motion is circular if initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is perpendicular to the velocity throughout.
  3. The resultant motion is parabolic if the initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) is not in line with the acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) = constant.
    e.g., the trajectory of a projectile motion.
  4. Similarly, various other combinations of initial velocity and acceleration will result into more complicated motions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 3.
State Newton’s first law of motion.
Answer:
Statement: Every inanimate object continues to be in a state of rest or of uniform unaccelerated motion along a straight line, unless it is acted upon by an external, unbalanced force.

Question 4.
An astronaut accidentally gets separated out of his small spaceship accelerating in inter stellar space at a constant rate of 100 m s-2. What is the acceleration of the astronaut the instant after he is outside the spaceship? (Assume that there are no nearby stars to exert gravitational force on him.) (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Assuming absence of stars in the vicinity, the only gravitational force exerted on astronaut is by the spaceship.
  2. But this force is negligible.
  3. Hence, once astronaut is out of the spaceship net external force acting on him can be taken as zero.
  4. From the first law of motion, the acceleration of astronaut is zero.

Question 5.
Give the magnitude and direction of the net force acting on:

  1. a drop of rain falling down with a constant speed.
  2. a cork of mass 10 g floating on water.
  3. a kite skilfully held stationary in the sky.
  4. a car moving with a constant velocity of 30 kmh-1 on a rough road.
  5. a high speed electron in space far from all gravitating objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields. (NCERT)

Answer:

  1. The drop of rain falls down with a constant speed, hence according to the first law of motion, the net force on the drop of rain is zero.
  2. Since the 10 g cork is floating on water, its weight is balanced by the up thrust due to water. Therefore, net force on the cork is zero.
  3. As the kite is skilfully held stationary in the sky, in accordance with first law of motion, the net force on the kite is zero.
  4. As the car is moving with a constant velocity of 30 km/h on a road, the net force on the car is zero.
  5. As the high-speed electron in space is far from all material objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields, it doesn’t accelerate and moves with constant velocity. Hence, net force acting on the electron is zero.

Question 6.
State Newton’s second law of motion and its importance.
Answer:
Statement: The rate of change of linear momentum of a rigid body is directly proportional to the applied (external unbalanced) force and takes place in the direction of force.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
Where, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = Force applied
p = m\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = linear momentum

Importance of Newton’s second law:

  1. It gives mathematical formulation for quantitative measure of force as rate of change of linear momentum.
  2. It defines momentum instead of velocity as the fundamental quantity related to motion.
  3. It takes into consideration the resultant unbalanced force on a body which is used to overcome Aristotle’s fallacy.

Question 7.
Explain why a cricketer moves his hands backwards while holding a catch. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. In the act of catching the ball, by drawing hands backward, cricketer allows longer time for his hands to stop the ball.
  2. By Newton’s second law of motion, force applied depends on the rate of change of momentum.
  3. Taking longer time to stop the ball ensures smaller rate of change of momentum.
  4. Due to this the cricketer can stop the ball by applying smaller amount of force and thereby not hurting his hands.

Question 8.
Large force always produces large change in momentum on a body than a small force. Is this correct?
Answer:
No. From Newton’s second law, we have.
\(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{F}\) …. (i)
dP = Fdt …. (ii)
From equation (ii), we can infer that a small force acting for a longer time can produce same change in momentum of a body as a large force acting in the same direction for a short time. Hence, the given statement is incorrect.

Question 9.
Newton’s first law is contained in the second law. Prove it.
Answer:

  1. From Newton’s second law of motion, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}(\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}})\)
  2. For a given body, mass m is constant.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\)
  3. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = zero, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) is constant. Hence if there is no force, velocity will not change. This is nothing but Newton’s first law of motion.

Question 10.
State Newton’s third law of motion
Answer:
Statement: To every action (force) there is always an equal and opposite reaction force).

Question 11.
State the importance of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s third law of motion defines action and reaction as a pair of equal and opposite forces acting along the same line.
  2. Action and reaction forces always act on different objects.

Question 12.
State the consequences of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Two interacting bodies exert forces which are always equal in magnitude, have the same line of action and are opposite in direction, upon each other. Thus, forces always occur in pairs.
  2. If a body A exerts an action force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}}\) on body B, then body B also exerts an equal and opposite reaction force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) on body A, simultaneously.
  3. Body A experiences the force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) only and
    body B experiences the force \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}} only.
  4. Both the forces, action and reaction act at the same instant.
  5. Both the forces always act on different bodies. Hence, they never cancel each other.
  6. Both the forces do not necessarily arise due to contact i.e., they can be non-contact forces. Example: Repulsive forces between two magnets.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 13.
If a constant force of 800 N produces an acceleration of 5 m/s2 in a body, what is its mass? If the body starts from rest, how much distance will it travel in 10 s?
Solution:
Given: F = 800 N, a = 5 m/s2, u = 0, t = 10 s
To find: mass (m), distance travelled (s)
Formulae:

i. F = ma
ii. s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{at}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
∴ m = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{800}{5}\) = 160 kg
From formula (ii),
s = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 5 × (10)2 [∵ u = 0]
∴ s = 250 m
Answer:
Mass of the body is 160 kg and the distance travelled by the body is 250 m.

Question 14.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3 kg changes its speed from 2 m s-1 to 3.5 m/s in 25 s. The direction of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: u = 2 ms-1, m = 3 kg,
v = 3.5 m s-1, t = 25s
To find: Force (F)
Formula: F = ma
Calculation: Since, v = u + at
∴ 3.5 = 2 + a × 25
a = \(\frac{3.5-2}{25}\) = 0.06 m s-2
From formula,
F = 3 × 0.06 = 0.18 N
Since, the applied force increases the speed of the body, it acts in the direction of the motion.
Answer:
The applied force is 0.18 N along the direction of motion.

Question 15.
A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of mass 20 kg moving initially with a speed of 15 ms-1. How long does the body take to stop? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, u = 15ms-1, v = 0,
F = – 50 N (retarding force)
To find: Time (t)
Formula: v = u + at
Calculation: Since, F = ma
∴ a = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{-50}{20}\) = -2.5 m s-2
From formula,
0 = 15 + (-2.5) × t
∴ t = 6s
Answer:
Time taken to stop the body is 6 s.

Question 16.
A hose pipe used for gardening is ejecting water horizontally at the rate of 0.5 m/s. Area of the bore of the pipe is 10 cm2. Calculate the force to be applied by the gardener to hold the pipe horizontally stationary.
Solution:
Let ejecting water horizontally be considered as the action force on the water, then the water exerts a backward force (called recoil force) on the pipe as the reaction force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 1
Where, V = volume of water ejected
A = area of cross section of bore = 10 cm2
ρ = density of water = 1 g/cc
l = length of the water ejected in time t
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} l}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = v = velocity of water ejected
= 0.5 m/s = 50 cm/s
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}} \mathrm{v}\)
= (Aρv) v
= Aρv2
= 10 × 1 × 502
∴ F = 25000 dyne = 0.25 N
Answer:
The gardener must apply an equal and opposite force of 0.25 N.

Question 17.
What does the term frame of reference mean?
Answer:
A system of co-ordinate axes with reference to which the position or motion of an object is described is called a frame of reference.

Question 18.
Explain the terms inertial and non-inertial frame of reference.
Answer:

  1. Inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which Newton ‘s first law of motion is applicable is called inertia/frame of reference.
    • A body moves with a constant velocity (which can be zero) in the absence of a net force. The body does not accelerate.
    • Example: A rocket in inter-galactic space (gravity free space between galaxies) with all its engine shut.
  2. Non-inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which an object suffers acceleration in absence of net force is called non-inertial frame of reference.
    • The body undergoes acceleration.
    • Example: If a car just start its motion from rest, then during the time of acceleration the car will be in a non-inertial frame of reference.

Question 19.
State the limitations of Newton’s laws of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable in a non-inertial (accelerated) frame of reference.
  2. Newton’s laws are only applicable to point objects.
  3. Newton’s laws are only applicable to rigid bodies.
  4. Results obtained by applying Newton’s laws of motion for objects moving with speeds comparable to that of light do not match with the experimental results and Einstein special theory of relativity has to be used.
  5. Newton’s laws of motion fail to explain the behaviour and interaction of objects having atomic or molecular sizes, and quantum mechanics has to be used.

Question 20.
Name the different types of fundamental forces in nature.
Answer:
Fundamental forces in nature are classified into four types:

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Electromagnetic force
  3. Strong nuclear force
  4. Weak nuclear force

Question 21.
Define gravitational force. Give its examples.
Answer:
Force of attraction between two (point) masses separated by a distance is called as gravitational force.
F = \(\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
where ‘G’ is constant called the universal gravitational constant = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2

Examples:

  1. The motion of moon, artificial satellites around the earth and motion of planets around the sun is due to gravitational force of attraction.
  2. The concept of weight of a body in the earth’s gravitational field is due to gravitational force exerted by the earth on a body.

Question 22.
Write down the main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. It is always attractive.
  2. It is the weakest of the four basic forces in nature.
  3. Its range is infinite.
  4. Structure of the universe is governed by this force.

Question 23.
Write a note on electromagnetic (EM) force.
Answer:
Electromagnetic force:

  1. The attractive and repulsive force between electrically charged particles is called electromagnetic force.
  2. It can be attractive or repulsive.
  3. It is stronger than the gravitational force.
  4. Example: force of friction, normal reaction, tension in strings, collision forces, elastic forces, fluid friction etc. are electromagnetic in nature.
  5. Reaction forces are a result of the action of electromagnetic forces.
  6. Since majority of forces are electromagnetic in nature, our life is practically governed by these forces.

Question 24.
Write a note on strong and weak nuclear force.
Answer:

  1. Strong nuclear force: The strong force which binds protons and neutrons (nucleons) together in the nucleus of an atom is called strong nuclear force.
    Characteristics of strong nuclear force:

    • It is a very strong attractive force.
    • It is a short range force of the order of 10-14 m.
    • it is charge independent.
  2. Weak nuclear force: The force of interaction between subatomic particles which results in the radioactive decay of atoms is called weak nuclear force.

Characteristics of weak nuclear force:

  • It acts between any two elementary particles (pair of subatomic particles).
  • It is a stronger force than gravitational force.
  • It is much weaker than electromagnetic force or strong nuclear force.
  • It is a short range force of the order of 10-16m.

Question 25.
Three identical point masses are fixed symmetrically on the periphery of a circle. Obtain the resultant gravitational force on any point mass M at the centre of the circle. Extend this idea to more than three identical masses symmetrically located on the periphery. How far can you extend this concept?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 2
i. Consider three identical points A, B and C of mass m on the periphery of a circle of radius r. Mass M is at the centre of the circle.
Gravitational forces on M due to these masses are attractive and are given as,
In magnitude, \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MA}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MB}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MC}}=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

ii. Forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MB}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MC}}\) are resolved along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) and perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\). Components perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) cancel each other. Components along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) are,
FMB cos 60° = FMC cos 60° = \(\frac{1}{2} F_{M A}\) each.

Magnitude of their resultant is FMA and its direction is opposite to that of FMA. Thus, the
resultant force on mass M is zero. For any even number of equal masses, the force due to any mass m is balanced (cancelled) by diametrically opposite mass. For any odd number of masses, the components perpendicular to one of them cancel each other while the components parallel to one of these add up in such a way that the resultant is zero for any number of identical masses m located symmetrically on the periphery.

As the number of masses tends to infinity, their collective shape approaches circumference of the circle, which is nothing but a ring. Thus, the gravitational force exerted by a ring mass on any other mass at its centre is zero.

iii. This concept can be further extended to three-dimensions by imagining a uniform hollow sphere to be made up of infinite number of such rings with a common diameter. Thus, the gravitational force for any mass kept at the centre of a hollow sphere is zero.

Question 26.
A car of mass 1.5 ton is running at 72 kmph on a straight horizontal road. On turning the engine off, it stops in 20 seconds. While running at the same speed, on the same road, the driver observes an accident 50 m in front of him. He immediately applies the brakes and just manages to stop the car at the accident spot. Calculate the braking force.
Solution:
Given: m = 1.5 ton = 1500 kg,
u = 72 kmph = 72 × \(\frac{5}{18} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)m/s = 20 m
s-1 (on turning engine off),
v = 0, t = 20 s, s = 50 m
To find: Braking force (F)

Formula:

i. v = u + at
ii. v2 – u2 = 2as
iii. F = ma

Calculation:
On turning the engine off,
From formula (i),
a = \(\frac{0-20}{20}\) = -1 m s-2
This is frictional retardation (negative acceleration).
After seeing the accident,
From formula (ii),
a1 = \(\frac{0^{2}-20^{2}}{2(50)}\) = -4 m s-2
This retardation is the combined effect of braking and friction
∴ braking retardation =4 – 1 = 3 m s-2
From formula (iii), the braking force, F = 1500 × 3 = 4500 N
Answer:
The braking force is 4500 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 27.
A body constrained to move along the z-axis of a coordinate system is subject to a constant force F given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N where \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are unit vectors along the x, y and z axis of the system respectively. What is the work done by this force in moving the body a distance of 4 m along the z-axis? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
To find: work done (W)

Formula: W = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \((-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}) \cdot(4 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\)
= \(12 \hat{\mathrm{k}} \cdot \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = 12 J
Answer:
The work done by the force is in moving the body 12 J.

Question 28.
Over a given region, a force (in newton) varies as F = 3x2 – 2x + 1. In this region, an object is displaced from x1 = 20 cm to x2 = 40 cm by the given force. Calculate the amount of work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 3x2 – 2x + 1, x1 = 20 cm = 0.2 m,
x2 = 40 cm = 0.4 m.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
W = \(\int_{x_{1}}^{x_{2}} F \cdot d x=\int_{0.2}^{0.4}\left(3 x^{2}-2 x+1\right) d x\)
= [x3 – x2 + x]0.4
= [0.43 – 0.42 + 0.4] – [0.23 – 0.22 + 0.2]
= 0.304 – 0.168 = 0.136 J
The work done is 0.136 J.

Question 29.
A position dependent force f = 7 – 2x + 3x2 newton acts on a small body of mass 2 kg and displaces from x = 0 m to x = 5 m, calculate the work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 7 – 2x + 3x2, x = 0 at A and x = 5 at B.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 3
∴ W = 135 J
Answer:
The work done is 135 J.

Question 30.
State the principle of work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force and explain.
OR
Show that work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy
Answer:
Principle: Decrease in the potential energy due to work done by a conservative force is entirely converted into kinetic energy. Vice versa, for an object moving against a conservative force, its kinetic energy decreases by an amount equal to the work done against the force.

Work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force:

  1. Consider an object of mass m moving with velocity u experiencing a constant opposing force F which slows it down to v during displacement s.
  2. The equation of motion can be written as, v2 – u2 = -2as (negative acceleration for
    opposing force.)
    Multiplying throughout by \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}\), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = (ma)s …. (1)
  3. According to Newton’s second law of motion,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = F.s
  5. But, \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2= Kf = final K.E of the body,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 = Ki = initial K.E of the body. and, work done by the force = F.s
    ∴ work done by the force = kf – ki
    = decrease in K.E of the body.
  6. Thus, work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy.

Question 31.
Explain the work-energy theorem in case of an accelerating conservative force along with a retarding non-conservative force.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object dropped from some point at height h.
  2. While coming down its potential energy decreases.
    ∴ Work done = decrease in P.E of the body.
  3. But, in this case, some part of the energy is used in overcoming the air resistance. This part of energy appears in some other forms such as heat, sound, etc. Thus, the work is not entirely converted into kinetic energy. In this case, the work-energy theorem can mathematically be written as,
    ∴ ∆ PE = ∆ K.E. + Wair resistance
    ∴ Decrease in the gravitational P.E. = Increase in the kinetic energy + work done against non-conservative forces.

Question 32.
A liquid drop of 1.00 g falls from height of cliff 1.00 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m s-1. What is the work done by the unknown force? (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1.0 g = 1.0 × 10-3 kg,
h = 1 km = 103 m, v = 50 ms-1
To find: Work done (Wf)
Formula: Wf = ∆ K.E – Wg

Calculation:

i. The change in kinetic energy of the drop
∆ K.E = (K.E.)final (K.E.)initial
∴ ∆ K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}-0\)
= \(\frac{1}{2} \times 1.0 \times 10^{-3} \times(50)^{2}\)
∴ ∆ K.E.= 1.25 J

ii. Work done by the gravitational force is,
Wg = mgh = 1.0 × 10-3 × 9.8 × 103 = 9.8 J
∴ Wg = 9.8J
From formula,
Wf = ∆K.E. – Wg = 1.25 – 9.8
Wf = -8.55 J
Answer:
Work done by the unknown force is – 8.55 J.

Question 33.
A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line with velocity y = ax3/2, where a = 5 m1/2s-1. What is the work done by the net force during its displacement from x = 0 to x = 2m? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: M = 0.5 kg, y = ax3/2,
where a = 5 m-1/2s-1
Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of the body, when x = 0 and x = 2 m respectively. Then,
v1 = 5 × 03/2 = 0, v2 = 5 × 23/2 = \(10 \sqrt{2}\) m
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: Work done = Increase in kinetic energy
W = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{M}\left(\mathrm{v}_{2}^{2}-\mathrm{v}_{1}^{2}\right)\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 0.5 × [latex](10 \sqrt{2})^{2}-0^{2}[/latex]
∴ W = 50J
Answer:
Work done by the net force on the body is 50 J.

Question 34.
A particle of mass 12 kg is acted upon by a force f = (100 – 2x2) where f is in newton and ‘x’ is in metre. Calculate the work done by this force in moving the particle x = 0 to x = -10 m. What will be the speed at x = 10 m if it starts from rest?
Solution:
Given: F = 100 – 2x2
at A, x = 0 and at B, x = -10 m
To find: Work done (W), speed (v)

Formulae:

i. W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot d s\)
ii. W = K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overline{d s}=\int_{x=0}^{x=-10} F d x\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 4
Answer:

  1. Work done by the force on the particle is 333.3 J.
  2. The speed of the particle at x = 10 will be 7.45 m/s.

Question 35.
Define free body diagram. In the figure given below, draw the free body diagrams for mass of 2 kg, 4 kg and 5 kg and hence state their force equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 5
Answer:
i. The diagram showing the forces acting on only one body at a time along-with its acceleration is called a free body diagram.

ii. The free body diagram for the mass of 2 kg is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 6
Free body diagram for 2 kg mass
The force equation is given as,
2a = T3 – 2g

iii. The free body diagram for the mass of 4 kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 7
The force equation is given as, 4a = T1 + 4g – T2

iv. The free body diagram for the mass of 5kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 8

The force equation for the mass of 5 kg is given as,
N + F sin 60° = 5g, along the vertical direction.
T1 + 10 = F cos 60°, along the horizontal direction (Considering the mass is in equilibrium).

Question 36.
Figure shows a fixed pulley. A massless inextensible string with masses m1 and m2 > m1 attached to its two ends is passing over the pulley. Such an arrangement is called an Atwood machine. Calculate accelerations of the masses and force due to the tension along the string assuming axle of the pulley to be frictionless.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 9
Solution:
Method I: As m2 > m1, mass m2 is moving downwards and mass m1 is moving upwards.
Net downward force = F = (m2) g – (m1) g
= (m2 – m1)g
the string being inextensible, both the masses travel the same distance in the same time. Thus, their accelerations are equal in magnitude (one upward, other downward). Let it be a.
Total mass in motion, M = m2 + m1
∴ a = \(\frac{F}{M}=\left(\frac{m_{2}-m_{1}}{m_{2}+m_{1}}\right) g\) …. (i)

For mass m1, the upward force is the force due to tension T and downward force is mg. It has upward acceleration a. Thus, T – m1g = m1a
∴ T = m1(g + a)
Using equation (i), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 10
From the free body equation for the first body,
T – m1g = m1a .. (i)

From the free body equation for the second body,
m2g – T = m2a … (ii)
Adding (i) and (ii), we get,
a = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}-\mathbf{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}+\mathrm{m}_{1}}\right) \mathbf{g}\) ….(iii)
Solving equations. (ii) and (iii) for T, we get,
T = m2(g – a) = \(\left(\frac{2 m_{1} m_{2}}{m_{1}+m_{2}}\right) g\)

Question 37.
Write a note on elastic collision.
Answer:

  1. Collision between two bodies in which kinetic energy of the entire system is conserved along with the linear momentum is called as elastic collision.
  2. In an elastic collision,
    \(\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}=\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\)
  3. In an elastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {‘initial }}=\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {. final }}\)
  4. An elastic collision is impossible in daily life.
  5. However, in many situations, the interatomic and intermolecular collisions are considered to be elastic.

Question 38.
Write a note on inelastic collision.
Answer:

  1. A collision is said to be inelastic if there is a loss in the kinetic energy during collision, but linear momentum is conserved.
  2. In an inelastic collision, m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2.
  3. In an inelastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.initial }} \neq \sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.final }}\)
  4. The loss in kinetic energy is either due to internal friction or vibrational motion of atoms causing heating effect.

Question 39.
Define perfectly inelastic collision. Give an example of it.
Answer:

  1. Collision in which the colliding bodies stick together after collision and move with a common velocity is called perfectly inelastic collision.
  2. The loss in kinetic energy is maximum in perfectly elastic collision.
  3. Example: Lump of mud thrown on a wall sticks to the wall due to the loss of kinetic energy.

Question 40.
In case of an elastic head on collision between two bodies, derive an expression for the final velocities of the bodies in terms of their masses and velocities before collision.
Answer:
Head on elastic collision of two spheres:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 11

i. Consider two rotating smooth bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 respectively moving
along the same straight line.

ii. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) = initial velocity of the sphere A before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = initial velocity of the sphere B before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) = velocity of the sphere A after collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) = velocity of the sphere B after collision.

iii. After the elastic collision, the spheres separate and move along the same straight line without rotation.

iv. According to the law of conservation of momentum,
m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) ….(i)
According to the law of conservation of energy (as kinetic energy is conserved during elastic collision),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 12

v. Since kinetic energy is a scalar quantity, the terms involved in the above equations are scalars.

vi. The equation (1) can be written in scalar form as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 13

vii. Also the equation (2) can be written as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 14

viii. Now dividing equation (4) by (3) we get,
(u1 + v1) = (u2 + v2)
∴ u1 + v1 = u2 + v2
∴ v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 … (5)

ix. Comparing equation (3) and (5),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 15
Equations, (6) and (7), represent the final velocities of two spheres after collision.

Question 41.
Are you aware of elasticity of materials? Is there any connection between elasticity of materials and elastic collisions?
Answer:
(Students should answer the question as per their understanding).

Question 42.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for their final velocities in terms
of their masses, initial velocities and coefficient of restitution.
Answer:
If e is the coefficient of restitution, the final velocities after an inelastic, head on collision are given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 16

Question 43.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 17
ii. As e < 1, (1 – e2) is always positive. Thus, there is always a loss of kinetic energy in an inelastic collision.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 44.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. Obtain an expression for the magnitude of impulse.
Answer:
i. When two bodies undergo collision, the linear momentum delivered by the first body to the second body must be equal to the change in momentum or impulse of the second body and vice versa.
∴ Impulse,
|J| = |∆p1| = |∆p2|
= |m1v1 – m1u1| = |m2v2 – m2u2| ….(1)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 18
In equation (1) and solving, we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 19

Question 45.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, perfectly inelastic, head-on collision. Derive an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. Let two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 move with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\), respectively such that particle A collides head on with particle B i.e., u1 > u2.

ii. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the particles stick together and move with a common velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) after the collision along the same straight line.
loss in kinetic energy = total initial kinetic energy – total final kinetic energy.

iii. By the law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2)v
∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{u}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2}}\)

iv. Loss of Kinetic energy,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 20

iv. Both the masses and the term (u1 – u2)2 are positive. Hence, there is always a loss in a perfectly inelastic collision. For a perfectly inelastic collision, as e = 0, the loss is maximum.

Question 46.
Distinguish between elastic and inelastic collision.
Answer:

No. Elastic Collision Inelastic Collision
i. In an elastic collision, both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. In an inelastic collision, momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved.
ii. The total kinetic energy after collision is equal to the total kinetic energy before collision. The total kinetic energy after the collision is not equal to the total kinetic energy before collision.
iii. Coefficient of restitution (e) is equal to one. Coefficient of restitution (e) is less than one. For a perfectly inelastic collision coefficient of restitution is equal to zero.
iv. Bodies do not stick together in elastic collision. Bodies stick together in a perfectly inelastic collision.
v. Sound, heat and light are not produced. Sound or light or heat or all of these may be produced.

Question 47.
Explain elastic collision in two dimensions.
Answer:
i. Suppose a particle of mass mi moving with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}\), undergoes a non head-on collide with another particle of mass m2 and initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 21

ii. Let us consider two mutually perpendicular directions; Common tangent at the point of impact, along which there is no force (or no change of momentum).
Line of impact which is perpendicular to the common tangent through the point of impact, in the two-dimensional plane of initial and final velocities.

iii. Applying the law of conservation of linear momentum along the line of impact, we have, m1u1 cos α1 + m2u2 cos α2 = m1v1 cos β1 + m2v2 cos β2
As there is no force along the common tangent,
m1u1 sin α1 = m1u1 sin β1 and m2u2 sin α2 = m2v2 sin β2
iv. Coefficient of restitution (e) along the line of impact is given as
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 22

Question 48.
Two bodies undergo a two-dimensional collision. State an expression for the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact and the loss in kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. For two bodies undergoing a two-dimensional collision, the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact is given as, Magnitude of the impulse, along the line of impact,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 23

ii. The loss in the kinetic energy is given as Loss in the kinetic energy = ∆ (K.E.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 24

Question 49.
0ne marble collides head-on with another identical marble at rest. If the collision is partially inelastic, determine the ratio of their final velocities in terms of coefficient of restitution e.
Solution:
According to conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
As m1 = m2, we get, u1 + u2 = v1 + v2
∴ If u2 = 0, we get, v1 + v2 = u1 ….. (i)
Coefficient of restitution,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 25

Question 50.
A 10 kg mass moving at 5 m/s collides head- on with a 4 kg mass moving at 2 m/s in the same direction. If e = \(\frac{1}{2}\), find their velocity after impact.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 4 kg
u1 = 5 m/s, u2 = 2 m/s, e = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
To find: Velocity after impact (v1 and v2)

Formulae:

i. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
ii. e = \(\left(\frac{v_{2}-v_{1}}{u_{1}-u_{2}}\right)\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
10 × 5 + 4 × 2 = 10v1 + 4v2
∴ 5v1 + 2v2 = 29 … (1)

From formula (ii),
v2 – v1 = e(u1 – u2) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (5 – 2) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
∴ 2v2 – 2v1 = 3 … (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we have
∴ v1 = \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and v2 = \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s
Answer:
The respective velocities of the two masses are \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s.

Question 51.
A metal ball falls from a height 1 m on a steel plate and jumps upto a height of 0.81 m. Find the coefficient of restitution.
Solution:
As the ball falls to the steel plate P.E changes to kinetic energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 26
As ground is stationary, both its initial and final velocities are zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 27

Question 52.
Two bodies of masses 5 kg and 3 kg moving in the same direction along the same straight line with velocities 5 m s-1 and 3 m s-1 respectively suffer one-dimensional elastic collision. Find their velocities after the collision.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 5kg, u1 = 5ms-1, m2 = 3kg, u2 = 3 m s-1
To find: velocities after collision (v1 and v2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 281
Answer:
The velocities of the two bodies after collision are 3.5 m/s and 5.5 m/s.

Question 53.
A 20 g bullet leaves a machine gun with a velocity of 200 m/s. If the mass of the gun is 20 kg, find its recoil velocity. If the gun fires 20 bullets per second, what force is to be applied to the gun to prevent recoil?
Solution:
Given: m1 = 20g = 0.02 kg, m2 = 20 kg, v1 = 200 m/s, t = \(\frac{1}{20}\) s,
To find: Recoil velocity (v2), applied force (F)

Formulae:

i. v2 = \(-\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}}\)
ii. F = ma

Calculation: From formula (i),
∴ v2 = \(-\frac{0.02}{20} \times 200\)
= -0.2 m/s

Negative sign shows that the machine gun moves in a direction opposite to that of the bullet.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 29
From formula (ii),
∴ F = m2 × a = 20 × 4 = 80N
Answer:
The recoil velocity of gun is 0.2 m/s and the required force to prevent recoil is 80 N.

Question 54.
A shell of mass 3 kg is dropped from some height. After falling freely for 2 seconds, it explodes into two fragments of masses 2 kg and 1 kg. Kinetic energy provided by the explosion is 300 J. Using g = 10 m/s2, calculate velocities of the fragments. Justify your answer if you have more than one options.
Solution:
Total mass = m1 + m2 = 3 kg
Initially, when the shell falls freely for 2 seconds, v = u+ at = 0 + 10(2) = 20 ms-1 = u1 = u2
According to conservation of linear momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 30
There are two possible answers since the positions of two fragments can be different as explained below.
Case 1: v1 = 30 m s-1 and v2 = 0 with the lighter fragment 2 above.
Case 2: v1 = 10 m s-1 and v2 = 40 m s-1 with the lighter fragment 2 below, both moving downwards.

Question 55.
Bullets of mass 40 g each, are fired from a machine gun at a rate of 5 per second towards a firmly fixed hard surface of area 10 cm2. Each bullet hits normal to the surface at 400 m/s and rebounds in such a way that the coefficient of restitution for the collision between bullet and the surface is 0.75. Calculate average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to this firing.
Solution:
For the collision,
u1 = 400 m s-1, e = 0.75
For the firmly fixed hard surface, u2 = v2 = 0
e = 0.75 = \(\frac{v_{1}-v_{2}}{u_{2}-u_{1}}=\frac{v_{1}-0}{0-400}\)
∴ v1 = -300 m/s.
Negative sign indicates that the bullet rebounds in exactly opposite direction.
Change in momentum of each bullet = m(v1 – u1)
The same momentum is transferred to the surface per collision in opposite direction.
∴ Momentum transferred to the surface, per collision,
p = m (u1 – v1) = 0.04(400 – [-300]) = 28 Ns
The rate of collision is same as rate of firing.
∴ Momentum received by the surface per second, \(\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = average force experienced by the surface = 28 × 5 = 140 N

This is the average force experienced by the surface of area A = 10 cm2 = 10-3 m2
∴ Average pressure experienced,
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{140}{10^{-3}}\) = 1.4 × 105 N m-2
∴ P ≈ 1.4 times the atmospheric pressure.
Answer:
The average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to the firing is 140 N and 1.4 × 105 N m-2 respectively.

Question 56.
A shell of mass 0.020 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 m s-1, what is the recoil speed of the gun? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 0.02 kg, m2 = 100 kg, v1 = 80 m s-1
To find: Recoil speed (v2)
Formula: m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Calculation: Initially gun and shell are at rest.
∴ m1u1 + m2u2 = 0
Final momentum = m1v1 – m2v2
Using formula,
0 = 0.02 (80) – 100(v2)
∴ v2 = \(\frac{0.02 \times 80}{100}\) = 0.016 ms-1
Answer:
The recoil speed of the gun is 0.016 m s-1.

Question 57.
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 6 m s-1 collide and rebound with the same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each bail due to the other? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 0.05 kg. u = 6 m/s, v = -6 m/s
To find: Impulse (J)
Formula: J = m (v – u)
calculation: From formula,
J = 0.05 (-6 – 6) = -0.6 kg m s-1
Answer:
Impulse received by each ball is -0.6 kg m s-1.

Question 58.
A bullet of mass 0.1 kg moving horizontally with a velocity of 20 m/s strikes a target and brought to rest in 0.1 s. Find the impulse and average force of impact.
Solution:
Given: m = 0.1 kg, u = 20 m/s, t = 0.1 s
To find: Impulse (J), Average force (F)

Formulae:

i. J = mv – mu
ii. F = \(m \frac{(v-u)}{t}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i).
J = m(v – u) = 0.1 (0 – 20) = -2 Ns
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}=\frac{2}{0.1}=20 N\)
Answer:
Magnitude of impulse is 2 Ns, average force of impact is 20 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 59.
A batsman deflects a ball by an angle of 45° without changing its initial speed which is equal to 54 km/h. What is the impulse imparted to the ball? (Mass of the ball is 0.15 kg) (NCERT)
Answer:
Let the point B represents the position of bat. The ball strikes the bat with velocity v along the path AB and gets deflected with same velocity along BC. such that ∠ABC = 45°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 31
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 32
Thus, impulse imparted to the ball is 4.157 kg ms-1

Question 60.
A cricket ball of mass 150 g moving with a velocity of 12 m/s is turned back with a velocity of 20 m/s on hitting the bat. The force of the ball lasts for 0.01 s. Find the average force exerted on the ball by the bat.
Solution:
m = 0.150 kg, v = 20 m/s,
u = -12 m/s and t = 0.01 s
To find: Average force (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}\)
Calculation: From formula,
F = \(\frac{0.150[20-(-12)]}{0.01}\) = 480 N
Answer:
The average force exerted on the ball by the bat is 480 N.

Question 61.
Mass of an Oxygen molecule is 5.35 × 10-26 kg and that of a Nitrogen molecule is 4.65 × 10-26 kg. During their Brownian motion (random motion) in air, an Oxygen molecule travelling with a velocity of 400 m/s collides elastically with a nitrogen molecule travelling with a velocity of 500 m/s in the exactly opposite direction. Calculate the impulse received by each of them during collision. Assuming that the collision lasts for
1 ms, how much is the average force experienced by each molecule?
Solution:
Let, m1 = mO = 5.35 × 10-26 kg,
m2 = mN = 4.65 × 10-26 kg,
∴ u1 = 400 ms-1 and u2 = -500 ms-1 taking direction of motion of oxygen molecule as the positive direction.
For an elastic collision,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 34
Hence, the net impulse or net change in momentum is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 35
Answer:
The average force experienced by the nitrogen molecule and the oxygen molecule are
-4.478 × 10-20 N and 4.478 × 10-20 N.

Question 62.
Explain rotational analogue of the force. On what factors does it depend? Represent it in vector form.
Answer:

  1. Rotational analogue of the force is called as moment of force or torque.
  2. It depends on the mass of the object, the point of application of the force and the angle between direction of force and the line joining the axis of rotation with the point of application.
  3. In its mathematical form, torque or moment of a force is given by
    \(\vec{\tau}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)
    where \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is the applied force and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) is the position vector of the point of application of the force from the axis of rotation.

Question 63.
Illustrate with an example how direction of the torque acting on any object is determined.
Answer:
i. Consider a laminar object with axis of rotation perpendicular to it and passing through it as shown in figure (a).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 36

ii. Figure (b) indicates the top view of the object when the rotation is in anticlockwise direction
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 37

iii. Figure (c) shows the view from the top, if rotation is in clockwise direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 38

iv. The applied force \(\vec{F}\) and position vector \(\vec{r}\) of the point of application of the force are in the plane of these figures.

v. Direction of the torque is always perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors \(\vec{r}\) and \(\vec{F}\) and can be obtained from the rule of cross product or by using the right-hand thumb rule.

vi. In Figure (b), it is perpendicular to the plane of the figure and outwards while in the figure (c), it is inwards.

Question 64.
State the equation for magnitude of torque and explain various cases of angle between the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).
Answer:
Magnitude of torque, \(\tau\) = r F sin θ
where θ is the smaller angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).

Special cases:

  1. If θ = 90°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)max = rF. Thus, the force should be applied along normal direction for easy rotation.
  2. If θ = 0° or 180°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)min = 0. Thus, if the force is applied parallel or anti-parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\), there is no rotation.
  3. Moment of a force depends not only on the magnitude and direction of the force, but also on the point where the force acts with respect to the axis of rotation. Same force can have different torque as per its point of application.

Question 65.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{4} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) is applied at a point (3, 4, -2). Find its torque about the point (-1, 2, 4).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 39

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 66.
Define couple. Show that moment of couple is independent of the points of application of forces.
Answer:
A pair of forces consisting of two forces of equal magnitude acting in opposite directions along different lines of action is called a couple.

  1. Figure shows a couple consisting of two forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) of equal magnitudes and opposite directions acting along different lines of action separated by a distance r.
  2. Position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\). Similarly, the position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\).
  3. Torque or moment of the couple is then given mathematically as
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 40
  4. From the figure, it is clear that r12 sinα = r21 sin β = r.
  5. If \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\right|\) = F, the magnitude of torque is given by
    \(\tau=\mathrm{r}_{12} \mathrm{~F}_{1} \sin \alpha\) = \(r_{21} F_{2} \sin \beta=r F\)
  6. It clearly shows that the torque corresponding to a given couple, i.e., the moment of a given couple is constant, i.e., it is independent of the points of application of forces.

Question 67.
The figure below shows three situations of a ball at rest under the action of balanced forces. Is the bail in mechanical equilibrium? Explain how the three situations differ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 41
Answer:

  1. In all these cases, as the ball is at rest under the action of balanced forces i.e, there is no net force acting on it. Hence, it is in mechanical equilibrium.
    However, potential energy-wise, the three situations show the different states of mechanical equilibrium.
  2. Stable equilibrium: In situation (a), potential energy of the system is at its local minimum. If it is disturbed slightly from its equilibrium position and released, it tends to recover its position. In this situation, the ball is most stable and is said to be in stable equilibrium.
  3. Unstable equilibrium: In situation (b), potential energy of the system is at its local maximum. If it is slightly disturbed from its equilibrium position, it moves farther from that position. This happens because initially, if disturbed, it tries to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy. In this situation, the ball is said to be in unstable equilibrium.
  4. Neutral equilibrium: in situation (e), potential energy of the system is constant over a plane and remains same at any position. Thus, even if the ball is disturbed, it still remains in equilibrium, practically at any position. In this situation, the ball is in neutral equilibrium.

Question 68.
Two weights 5 kg and 8 kg are suspended from a uniform rod of length 10 m and weighing 3 kg. The distances of the weights from one end are 2 m and 7 m. Find the point at which the rod balances.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 42
Let the rod balance at a point P, x m from the end A of the rod AB. The suspended weight and the centre of gravity of the rod G is shown in the figure.
P = 5 + 3 + 8 = 16kg
Taking moments about A,
16 × x = 5 × 2 + 3 × 5 + 8 × 7
16x = 10 + 15 + 56 = 81
∴ x = \(\frac{81}{16}\) = 5.1 m
Answer:
The rod balances at 5.1 m from end A.

Question69.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5 g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick? (NCERT)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 43
Consider the metre scale AB. Let its mass be concentrated at C at 50 cm. mark. Upon placing coins, balancing point of the scale and the coins system is shifted to C’ at 45 cm mark.
For equilibrium about C’
10(45 – 12) = m (50 – 45)
m = \(\frac{10 \times 33}{5}\) = 66g
Answer:
The mass of the metre scale is 66 g.

Question 70.
The diagram shows a uniform beam of length 10 m, used as a balance. The beam is pivoted at its centre. A 5.0 N weight is attached to one end of the beam and an empty pan weighing 0.25 N Is attached to the other end of the beam.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 44
i. What is the moment of couple at pivot?
ii. If pivot is shifted 2 ni towards left, then what will be moment of couple at new position?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 45
Answer:

  1. The moment of couple at center is 23.75 N-m.
  2. The moment of couple at new position is 13.25 N-m.
    ∴ For equilibrium,
    40 × x = 20 × 0.5
    ∴ x = \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25 m

Hence, the total distance walked by the person is 1.25 m.

Ans
The person can walk 1.25 m before the plank topples.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 71.
Define centre of mass.
Answer:
Centre of mass of a body is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.

Question 72.
Derive an expression for the position of centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
System of n particles;
i. Consider a system of n particles of masses m1, m2, …, mn having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\),….., \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{n}}\) from the origin O.
The total mass of the system is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 46
Centre of mass for n particles

ii. Position vector \(\vec{r}\) of their centre of mass from the same origin is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 47

iii. If the origin is at the centre of mass, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) = 0
∴ \(\sum_{1}^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{i}}\) = 0,

iv. In this case, \(\sum_{1}^{n} m_{i} \vec{r}_{i}\) gives the moment of masses (similar to moment of force) about the centre of mass.

v. If (x1, x2, …… xn), (y1, y2, …..yn), (z1, z2, …. zn) are the respective x, y and z – coordinates of (r1, r2,…….. rn) then x,y and z – coordinates of the centre of mass are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 48

vi. Continuous mass distribution: For a continuous mass distribution with uniform density, the position vector of the centre of mass is given by,
r = \(\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{\int d m}=\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{M}\)
Where \(\int \mathrm{dm}=\mathrm{M}\) is the total mass of the object.

vii. The Cartesian coordinates of centre of mass are
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 49

Question 73.
State the expression for velocity of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let v1, v2,…..vn be the velocities of a system of point masses m1, m2, … mn. Velocity of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 50
x, y and z components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}\) can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{v} \mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 74.
State the expression for acceleration of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let a1, a2,…. an be the accelerations of a system of point masses m1, m2 … mn.
Acceleration of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 51
x, y and z components of can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{a} d m}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 75.
State the characteristics of centre of mass.
Answer:

  1. Centre of mass is a hypothetical point at which entire mass of the body can be assumed to he concentrated.
  2. Centre of mass is a location, not a physical quantity.
  3. Centre of mass is particle equivalent of a given object for applying laws of motion.
  4. Centre of mass is the point at which applied force causes only linear acceleration and not angular acceleration.
  5. Centre of mass is located at the centroid, for a rigid body of uniform density.
  6. Centre of mass is located at the geometrical centre, for a symmetric rigid body of uniform density.
  7. Location of centre of mass can be changed only by an external unbalanced force.
  8. Internal forces (like during collision or explosion) never change the location of centre of mass.
  9. Position of the centre of mass depends only upon the distribution of mass, however, to describe its location we may use a coordinate system with a suitable origin.
  10. For a system of particles, the centre of mass need not coincide with any of the particles.
  11. While balancing an object on a pivot, the line of action of weight must pass through the centre of mass and the pivot. Quite often, this is an unstable equilibrium.
  12. Centre of mass of a system of only two particles divides the distance between the particles in an inverse ratio of their masses, i.e., it is closer to the heavier mass.
  13. Centre of mass is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.
  14. If there is an axial symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass lies on the axis of symmetry.
  15. If there are multiple axes of symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass is at their point of intersection.
  16. Centre of mass need not be within the body.
    Example: jumper doing fosbury flop.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 76.
The mass of moon is 0.0 123 times the mass of the earth and separation between them is 3.84 × 108 m. Determine the location of C.M as measured from the centre of the earth.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 52
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 53
Answer:
The location of centre of mass as measured from the center of the earth is 4.67 × 106 m.

Question 77.
Three particles of masses 3 g, 5 g and 8 g are situated at point (2, 2, 2), (-3, 1, 4) and (-1, 3, -2) respectively. Find the position vector of their centre of mass.
Solution:
m1 = 3 g, m2 = 5 g, m3 = 8 g, x1 = 2, y1 = 2, z1 = 2
x2 = -3, y2 = 1, z2 = 4,
x3 = -1, y3 = 3, z3 = -2
Let (X, Y, Z) be co-ordinates of C.M., then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 54
The co-ordinates of the C.M. are \(\left(-\frac{17}{16}, \frac{35}{16}, \frac{5}{8}\right)\)
Answer:
The position vector of the C.M. is \(-\frac{17}{16} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\frac{35}{16} \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\frac{5}{8} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

Question 78.
In the HCl molecule, the separation between the nuclei of the two atoms is about 1.27 Å (1 Å = 10-10 m). Find the approximate location of the CM of the molecule, given that a chlorine atom is about 35.5 times as massive as a hydrogen atom and nearly all the mass of an atom is concentrated in its nucleus. (NCERT)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 55
Claculation: From formula
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 56
Answer:
The location of centre of mass from the nucleus of hydrogen atom is 1.235 A.

Question 79.
Three thin walled uniform hollow spheres of radii 1 cm, 2 cm and 3 cm are so located that their centres are on the three vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC having each side 10 cm. Determine centre of mass of the system.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 57
Solution:
Mass of a thin walled uniform hollow sphere is proportional to its surface area. (as density is constant) hence proportional to r2.

Thus, if mass of the sphere at A is mA = m, then mB = 4m and mC = 9m. By symmetry of the spherical surface, their centres of mass are at their respective centres, i.e., at A, B and C. Let us choose the origin to be at C, where the largest mass 9m is located and the point B with mass 4m on the positive x-axis. With this, the co-ordinates of C are (0, 0) and that of B are (10, 0). If A of mass m is taken in the first quadrant, its co-ordinates will be \([5,5 \sqrt{3}]\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 58

Question 80.
Locate the centre of mass of three particles of mass m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 2 kg and m3 = 3 kg at the corner of an equilateral triangle of each side of 1 m.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 60
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 61
Answer:
The centre of mass of the system of three particles lies at \(\left(\frac{2}{3} m, \frac{\sqrt{3}}{6} m\right)\) with respect to the particle of mass 1 kg as the origin.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 81.
A letter ‘E’ is prepared from a uniform cardboard with shape and dimensions as shown in the figure. Locate its centre of mass.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 62
Solution:
As the sheet is uniform, each square can be taken to be equivalent to mass m concentrated at its respective centre. These masses will then be at the points labelled with numbers 1 to 10, as shown in figure. Let us select the origin to be at the left central mass m5, as shown and all the co-ordinates to be in cm.

By symmetry, the centre of mass of m1, m2 and m3 will be at m2 (1, 2) having effective mass 3m. Similarly, effective mass 3m due to m8, m9 and m10 will be at m9 (1, -2). Again, by symmetry, the centre of mass of these two (3m each) will have co-ordinates (1, 0). Mass m6 is also having co-ordinates (1, 0). Thus, the
effective mass at (1, 0) is 7m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 63
Using symmetry for m4, m5 and m7, there will be effective mass 3m at the origin (0, 0). Thus, effectively, 3m and 7m are separated by 1 cm along X-direction. Y-coordinate is not required.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 64

Question 82.
A hole of radius r is cut from a uniform disc of radius 2r. Centre of the hole is at a distance r from centre of the disc. Locate centre of mass of the remaining part of the disc.
Solution:
Before cutting the hole, c.în. of the full disc was at its centre. Let this be our origin O. Centre of mass of the cut portion is at its centre D. Thus, it is at a distance x1 = r form the origin. Let C be the centre of mass of the
remaining disc, which will he on the extension of the line DO at a distance x2 = x from the origin. As the disc is uniform, mass of any of its part is proportional to the area of that part.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 65
Thus, if m is the mass of the cut disc, mass of the entire disc must be 4m and mass of the remaining disc will be 3m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 66

Alternate method: (Using negative mass):

Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) be the position vector of the centre of mass of the uniform disc of mass M. Mass m is with centre of mass at position vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) from the centre of the disc be cut out from the complete disc. Position vector of the centre of mass of the remaining disc is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 67

Question 83.
Define centre of gravity of a body. Under what conditions the centre of gravity and centre of mass coincide?
Answer:

  1. centre of gravity of a body is the point around which the resultant torque due to force of gravity on the body is zero.
  2. The centre of mass coincides with centre of gravity when the body is in a uniform gravitational field.

Question 84.
Explain how to find the location of centre of mass or centre of gravity of a laminar object.
Answer:

  1. A laminar object is suspended from a rigid support at two orientations.
  2. Lines are drawn on the object parallel to the plumb line as shown in the figure.
  3. Plumb line is always vertical, i.e., parallel to the line of action of gravitational force.
  4. Intersection of the lines drawn is then the point through which line of action of the gravitational force passes for any orientation. Thus, it gives the location of the c.g. or c.m.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 68

Question 85.
Why do cricketers wear helmet and pads while playing? Is it related with physics?
Answer:
Helmet and pads used by cricketers protects the head, using principles of physics.

  1. The framing between the interior of the helmet and pads increases the time over which the impulse acts on the head resulting into reduction of force.
    (Impulse = force × time = constant)
  2. The pads spread the force applied by the ball over a wider area reducing pressure at a point.

Question 86.
The diagram shows four objects placed on a flat surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 69
The centre of mass of each object is marked M. Which object is likely to fall over?
Answer:
Object C will fall because its centre of mass is not exactly at centre, in turn applying more force on one side of the object resulting in to unbalance force. Whereas, in other objects center of mass is exactly at center resulting into zero rotational or translational motion maintaining their equilibrium.

Question 87.
A boy is about to close a large door by applying force at A and B as shown. State with a reason, which of the two positions, A or B, will enable him to close the door with least force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 70
Answer:
Boy has to apply more force at point B as compared to point A, because point B is at least distance from the hinge of the door while point A is at maximum distance from hinge of the door. Opening of door applies a moment, which is. given by,
M = F × perpendicular distance
F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { distance }}\)
More is the distance from the axis of rotation less will be the force.

Question 88.
How is a seat belt useful for safety?
Answer:
When car hits another car or an object with high speed it applies a high impulse on the driver and due to inertia driver tends to move in forward direction towards the steering. Seat belts spreads the force over large area of the body and holds the driver and protects him from crashing at the steering.

Question 89.
According to Newton’s third law of motion for every action there is equal and opposite reaction, why two equal and opposite forces don’t cancel each other?
Answer:
Forces of action and reaction always act on different bodies, hence they never cancel each other.

Question 90.
Linear momentum depends on frame of reference, but principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference. Why?
Answer:
Observers in different frame find different values of linear momentum of a system, hence linear momentum depends upon frame of reference, but each would observe that the value of linear momentum does not change with time (provided the system is isolated), hence principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference.

Question 91.
Multiple choice Questions

Question 1.
A body of mass 2 kg moving on a horizontal surface with initial velocity of 4 m s-1 comes to rest after two seconds. If one wants to keep this body moving on the same surface with a velocity of 4 m s-1, the force required is
(A) 2 N
(B) 4 N
(C) 0
(D) 8 N
Answer:
(B) 4 N

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
What force will change the velocity of a body of mass 1 kg from 20 m s-1 to 30 m s-1 in two seconds?
(A) 1N
(B) 5 N
(C) 10 N
(D) 25 N
Answer:
(B) 5 N

Question 3.
A force of 5 newton acts on a body of weight 9.80 newton. What is the acceleration produced in m/s2?
(A) 0.51
(B) 1.96
(C) 5.00
(D) 49.00
Answer:
(C) 5.00

Question 4.
A body of mass m strikes a wall with velocity v and rebounds with the same speed. Its change in momentum is
(A) 2 mv
(B) mv/2
(C) – mv
(D) Zero
Answer:
(A) 2 mv

Question 5.
A force of 6 N acts on a body of mass 1 kg initially at rest and during this time, the body attains a velocity of 30 m/s. The time for which the force acts on a body is
(A) 10 second
(B) 8 second
(C) 7 second
(D) 5 second
Answer:
(D) 5 second

Question 6.
A bullet of mass 10 g is fired from a gun of mass 1 kg with recoil velocity of gun = 5 m/s. The muzzle velocity will be
(A) 30 km/min
(B) 60 km/min
(C) 30 m/s
(D) 500 m/s
Answer:
(D) 500 m/s

Question 7.
The velocity of rocket with respect to ground is v1 and velocity of gases ejecting from rocket with respect to ground is v2 Then velocity of gases with respect to rocket is given by
(A) v2
(B) v1 + v2
(C) v1 × v2
(D) v1
Answer:
(B) v1 + v2

Question 8.
Two bodies A and B of masses 1 kg and 2 kg moving towards each other with velocities 4 m/s and 1 m/s suffers a head on collision and stick together. The combined mass will
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.
(B) move in direction of motion of heavier mass.
(C) not move.
(D) move in direction perpendicular to the line of motion of two bodies.
Answer:
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.

Question 9.
Which of the following has maximum momentum?
(A) A 100 kg vehicle moving at 0.02 m s-1.
(B) A 4 g weight moving at 1000 cm s-1’.
(C) A 200 g weight moving with kinetic energy of 10-6 J
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.
Answer:
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.

Question 10.
A bullet hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a horizontal frictionless table. What is conserved?
(A) Momentum alone.
(B) K.E. alone.
(C) Momentum and K.E. both.
(D) P.E. alone.
Answer:
(A) Momentum alone.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 11.
The force exerted by the floor of an elevator on the foot of a person standing there, is more than his weight, if the elevator is
(A) going down and slowing down.
(B) going up and speeding up.
(C) going up and slowing down.
(D) either (A) and (B).
Answer:
(D) either (A) and (B).

Question 12.
If E, G and N represents the magnitudes of electromagnetic, gravitational and nuclear forces between two electrons at a given separation, then,
(A) N = E = G
(B) E < N < G (C) N > G < E (D) E > G > N
Answer:
(D) E > G > N

Qestion 13.
For an inelastic collision, the value of e is
(A) greater than 1
(B) less than 1
(C) equal to 1
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) less than 1

Question 14.
A perfect inelastic body collides head on with a wall with velocity y. The change in momentum is
(A) mv
(B) 2mv
(C) zero
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(A) mv

Question 15.
Two masses ma and rnb moving with velocitics va and vb in opposite direction collide
elastically and after the collision ma and mb move with velocities vb and va respectively. Then the ratio mamb is
(A) \(\frac{v_{a}-v_{b}}{v_{a}+v_{b}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}+\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
(C) 1
(D) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) 1

Question 16.
The frictional force acts _____.
(A) in direction of motion
(B) against the direction of motion
(C) perpendicular to the direction of motion
(D) at any angle to the direction of motion
Answer:
(B) against the direction of motion

Question 17.
A marble of mass X collides with a block of mass Z, with a velocity Y. and sticks to it. The final velocity of the system is
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{Y}}{\mathrm{X}+\mathrm{Y}} \mathrm{Y}\)
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)
(C) \(\frac{X+Y}{Z}\)
(D) \(\frac{X+Z}{X}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)

Question 18.
Two balls lying on the same plane collide. Which of the following will be always conserved?
(A) heat
(B) velocity
(C) kinetic energy
(D) linear momentum.
Answer:
(D) linear momentum.

Question 19.
A body is moving with uniform velocity of 50 km h-1, the force required to keep the body in motion in SI unit is
(A) zero
(B) 10
(C) 25
(D) 50
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 20.
A coolie holding a suitcase on his head of 20 kg and travels on a platform. then work done in joule by the coolie is
(A) 198
(B) 98
(C) 49
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 21.
Out of the following forces, which force is non-conservative?
(A) gravitational
(B) electrostatic
(C) frictional
(D) magnetic
Answer:
(C) frictional

Question 22.
The work done in conservative force is ____.
(A) negative
(B) zero
(C) positive
(D) infinite
Answer:
(B) zero

Question 23.
The angle between the line of action of force and displacement when no work done (in degree) is
(A) zero
(B) 45
(C) 90
(D) 120
Answer:
(C) 90

Question 24.
If the momentum of a body is doubled, its KE. increases by
(A) 50%
(B) 300%
(C) 100%
(L)) 400%
Answer:
(B) 300%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 25.
In perfectly inelastic collision, which is conserved?
(A) P.E. only
(B) K.E. only
(C) momentum only
(D) K.E. and momentum
Answer:
(C) momentum only

Question 26.
In case of elaine collision, which s
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.
(B) Momentum conserved and K.E. not conserved,
(C) Momentum not conserved and K.E. conserved.
(D) Momentum and K.E. both not conserved,
Answer:
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.

Question 27.
Pseudo force is true only in
(A) frame of reference which is at rest
(B) inertial frame of reference.
(C) frame of reference moving with constant velocity.
(D) non-inertial frame of reference
Answer:
(D) non-inertial frame of reference

Question 28.
A men weighing 90kg carries a stone of 20 kg to the top of the building 30m high. The work done by hint is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(A) 80 J
(B) 100 J
(C) 980 J
(D) 29,400 J
Answer:
(D) 29,400 J

Question 29.
A weight lifter is holding a weight of 100 kg on his shoulders for 45 s, the amount of work done by him in joules is
(A) 4500
(B) 100
(C) 45
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 30.
If m is the mass of a body and E its K.E..then its linear momentum is
(A) \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{\mathrm{E}}\)
(B) \(2 \sqrt{\mathrm{m}} \mathrm{E}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{m} E\)
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)

Question 31.
Torque applied is masimum when the angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is
(A) 90°
(B) 180°
(C) 0°
(D) 45°
Answer:
(A) 90°

Question 92.
A particle moving with velocity \(\vec{v}\) is acted by three forces shown by the vector triangle PQR. The velocity of the particle will:
(A) remain constant
(B) change according to the smallest force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{QR}}\)
(C) increase
(D) decrease
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 71
Hint: As the three forces acting on a particle represents a triangle (i.e., a closed loop)
∴ Fnet = 0
∴ m \(\vec{a}\) = 0
∴ m\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
∴ v remains constant
Answer:
(A) remain constant

Question 93.
A force F = 20 + 10y acts on a particle in y-direction where F is in newton and y in meter. Work done by this force to move the particle from y = 0 to y = 1 m is:
(A) 25J
(B) 20J
(C) 30J
(D) SJ
Hint: Work done by variable force, W = \(\int_{y_{\text {initial }}}^{y_{\text {final }}} \mathrm{Fdy}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 72
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 73
Answer:
(A) 25J

Question 94.
Body A of mass 4m moving with speed u collides with another body B of mass 2m, at rest. The collision is head on and elastic in nature. After the collision the fraction of energy lost by the colliding body A is:
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)
(B) \(\frac{5}{9}\)
(C) \(\frac{1}{9}\)
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)
Hint:
Fractional loss of K.E. of colliding bodies,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 74
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Question 95.
An object of mass 500 g, initially at rest, is acted upon by a variable force whose X-component varies with X in the manner shown. The velocities of the object at the points X = 8 m and X = 12 m, would have the respective values of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 75
(A) 18m/s and 20.6 m/s
(B) 18 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(C) 23 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s
Hint: From work-energy theorem
∆ K.E. = work = area under F-x graph
From x = 0 to x = 8m
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = (5 × 20) + (3 × 10)
∴ \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = 100 + 30
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 76
Answer:
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s

Question 96.
The centre of mass of two particles system lies
(A) at the midpoint on the line joining the two particles.
(B) at one end of line joining the two particles.
(C) on the line perpendicular in the line joining two particles.
(D) on the line joining the Iwo particles.
Answer:
(D) on the line joining the two particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 97.
A block of mass m is placed on a smooth inclined wedge ABC of inclination θ as shown in the figure. The wedge is given an acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation between a and θ for the block to remain stationary on the wedge is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 77
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 78
The mass of block is given to be m. It will remain stationary if forces acting on it are in equilibrium i.e., ma cos θ = mg sin θ
Here, ma = Pseudo force on block.
∴ a = g tan θ
Answer:
a = g tan θ

Question 98.
A moving block having mass m, collides with another stationary block having mass 4m. The lighter block comes to rest after collision, When the initial velocity of the lighter block is v, then the value of coefficient of restitution
(e) will
(A) 0.5
(B) 0.25
(C) 0.8
(D) 0.4
Hint:
Given: m1 = m, m2 = 4m, u1 = v, u2 = 0, v1 = 0 According to law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
mv + 4m × 0 = m × 0 + 4mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 79
Answer:
(B) 0.25

Question 99.
In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0 strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final total kinetic energy is 50% greater than the original kinetic energy, the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two particles, after collision, is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 80
Hint:
According to law of conservation of momentum,
mv0 = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 81
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2} \mathbf{v}_{0}\)

Question 100.
The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32 × 10-27 kg. If 1023 hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall of area 2 cm2 at an angle of 45° to the normal and rebound elastically with a speed of 103 m/s, then the pressure on the wall is nearly:
(A) 2.35 × 102 N/m2
(B) 4.70 × 102 N/m2
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2
(D) 4.70 × 103 N/m2
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 82
Answer:
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2

Question 101.
A bomb at rest explodes into 3 parts of same mass. The momentum of two parts is -3P\(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) and 2P\(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) respectively. The magnitude of momentum of the third part is
(A) P
(B) \(\sqrt{5} \mathrm{P}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{11} \mathrm{P}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 83
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)

Question 102.
A sphere of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity V collides head-on on another sphere of same mass which is at rest. The ratio of final velocity of second sphere to the initial velocity of the first sphere is (e is coefficient of restitution and collision is inelastic)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 84
Hint:
Initial momentum = mv
Final momentum = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 85
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{e}+1}{2}\)

Question 103.
Two blocks A and B of masses 3m and m respectively are connected by a massless and inextensible string. The whole system is suspended by a massless spring as shown in figure. The magnitudes of acceleration of A and B immediately after the string is cut, are respectively:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 86
Hint:
Tension in spring before cutting the strip,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 87
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{3}\), g

Question 104.
A time dependent force F = 6t acts on a particle of mass 1 kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the force during the first 1 sec. will be
(A) 9 J
(B) 18 J
(C) 4.5 J
(D) 22 J
Hint:
F = 6t
m = 1 kg
∴ a = 6t
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 88
Answer:
(C) 4.5 J

Question 105.
Consider a drop of rain water having mass Ig falling from a height of 1 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m/s. Take ‘g’ constant with a value 10 m/s2. The work done by the
(i) gravitational force and the
(ii) resistive force of air is:
(A) (i) -10 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(B) (i) 1.25 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(C) (i) 100 J
(ii) 8.75 J
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J
Hint: Work done by gravitation force is given by (Wg)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 89
Answer:
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 1.
Explain the term: Displacement.
Answer:
Displacement:

  1. Displacement of a particle for a time interval is the difference between the position vectors of the object in that time interval.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{2}}\) be the position vectors of a particle at time t1 and t2 respectively. Then the displacement \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\) in time ∆t = (t2 – t\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}) is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}\)
  3. Dimensions of displacement are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0].
  4. Displacement is a vector quantity.
  5. Example:
    • For an object that has travelled through 1 m from time t1 to t2 along the positive X-direction, the magnitude of its displacement is I m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • On the other hand, for an object that has travelled through I m from time t1 to t1 along the positive Y-direction, the magnitude of its displacement remains the same i.e., I m but the direction of the displacement is along the positive Y-axis.

Question 2.
Explain the term: Path length.
Answer:

  1. Path length is the actual distance travelled by the particle during its motion.
  2. It is a scalar quantity.
  3. Dimensions of path length are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0]
  4. Example:
    • If an object travels along the X-axis from x = 3 m to x = 6 m then the distance travelled is 3 m. In this case the displacement is also 3 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • However, if the object now comes back to x 5, then the distance through which the object has moved increases to 3 + I = 4 m. Its initial position was x 3 m and the final position is now x = 5 m and thus, its displacement is ∆x = 5 – 3 = 2 m, i.e., the magnitude of the displacement is 2 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • If the object now moves to x =1, then the distance travelled, i.e., the path length increases to 4 + 4 = 8 m while the magnitude of displacement becomes 3 – 1 = 2 m and its direction is along the negative X-axis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
Explain the terms:
i. Average velocity
ii. Instantaneous velocity
iii. Average speed
iv. Instantaneous speed
Answer:
i) Average velocity:

  1. Average velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of an object is the displacement (\(\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\)) of the object during the time interval (∆t) over which average velocity is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average velocity = (\(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time interval }}\))
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{av}}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}_{2}-\mathrm{t}_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
  3. Average velocity is a vector quantity.
  4. Its SI unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0L1T-1]
  5. For example, if the positions of an object are x +4 m and x = +6 m at times t = O and t = 1 minute respectively, the magnitude of its average velocity during that time is Vav = (6 – 4)1(1 – 0) = 2 m per minute and its direction will be along the positive X-axis.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\) = 2 i m/min
    Where, i = unit vector along X-axis.

ii) Instantaneous velocity:

  1. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\)) is the limiting value of ¡he average velocity of the object over a small time interval (∆t) around t when the value of lime interval goes to zero.
  2. It is the velocity of an object at a given instant of time.
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
    where \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) derivative of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\) with respect to t.

iii) Average speed:

  1. Average speed of an object is the total path length (distance) travelled by the object during the time interval over which average speed is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Total path length }}{\text { Total time interval }}\)
  3. Average speed is a scalar quantity.
  4. Its S.I. unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0V1T-1].
  5. In rectilinear motion;
    • If the motion of the object is only in one direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be equal to the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be equal to the average speed.
    • If the motion of the object reverses its direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be less then the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be less than the average speed.

iv) Instantaneous speed:
The instantaneous speed is the limiting value of the average speed of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.

Question 4.
Distinguish between uniform rectilinear motion and non-uniform rectilinear motion.
Answer:

No. Uniformly rectilinear motion Non-uniform rectilinear motion
i. The object is moving with constant velocity. The object is moving with variable velocity.
ii. The average and instantaneous velocities are same. The average and instantaneous velocities are different.
iii. The average and instantaneous speeds are the same. The average and instantaneous speeds are different.
iv. The average and instantaneous speeds are equal to the magnitude of the velocity. The average speed will be different from the magnitude of average velocity.

Question 5.
Explain the terms:

  1. Acceleration
  2. Average acceleration
  3. Instantaneous acceleration

Answer:

  1. Acceleration:
    • Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
    • It is a vector quantity.
    • Dimension: [M0L1T-2]
    • If a particle moves with constant velocity, its acceleration is zero.
  2. Average acceleration:
    • Average acceleration is the change in velocity divided by the total time required for the change.
    • If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{1}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{2}}}\) are the velocities of the T particle at time t1 and t2 respectively, then the change in velocity is \(\) and time required for this change is ∆t = t2 – t1
      ∴ \(\vec{a}_{a v}=\frac{\vec{v}_{2}-\vec{v}_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \vec{v}}{\Delta t}\)
  3. Instantaneous acceleration:
    • The instantaneous acceleration a is the limiting value of the average acceleration of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.
      \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\text {inst }}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{t}}\)
    • Instantaneous acceleration is the slope of the tangent to the velocity-time graph at a position corresponding to given instant of time.
      [Note: Generally, when the term acceleration is used, it is an instantaneous acceleration.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
Draw and explain the position-time graph of:

  1. An object at rest.
  2. An object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis.
  3. An object moving with uniform velocity along negative x-axis.
  4. An object moving with non-uniform velocity.
  5. An object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed.

Answer:

  1. The position-time graph of an object at rest:
    • For an object at rest, the position-time graph is a horizontal straight line parallel to time axis.
    • The displacement of the object is zero as there is no change in the object’s position.
    • Slope of the graph is zero, which indicates that velocity of the particle is zero.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 1
  2. The position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis:
    • When an object moves, the position of the particle changes with respect to time.
    • Since velocity is constant, displacement is proportional to elapsed time.
    • The graph is a straight line with positive slope, showing that the velocity is along the positive x-axis.
    • In this case, as the motion is uniform, the average velocity and instantaneous velocity are equal at all times.
    • Speed is equal to the magnitude of the velocity.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 2
  3. Position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along negative x- axis:
    • The graph is a straight line with negative slope, showing that the velocity is along the negative x-axis.
    • Displacement decreases with increase in time.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 3
  4. Position-time graph of a particle moving with non-uniform velocity;
    • When the velocity of an object changes with time, slope of the graph is different at different points. Therefore, the average and instantaneous velocities are different.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t1 to t4 around time t0 = slope of line AB.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t2 to t3 = slope of line CD
    • On further reducing the time interval around t0, it can be deduced that, instantaneous interval at t0 = the slope of the tangent PQ at t0.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 4
  5. Position-time graph of an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed:
    For an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed, the direction of velocity changes from positive to negative and vice versa over fixed intervals of time.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 5

Question 7.
Explain the velocity-tune graphs of an object:
i) Moving with zero acceleration.
ii) Moving with constant positive acceleration.
iii) Moving with constant negative acceleration.
iv) Moving with non-uniform acceleration.
Answer:
i) Object is moving with zero acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 6
  2. As the acceleration is zero, the graph will be a straight line parallel to time axis.
  3. Velocity of the particle is constant as the acceleration is zero.
  4. Magnitude of displacement of object from t1 to t2 = v0 × (t2 – t1) shaded area under velocity-time graph.

ii) Object is moving with constant positive acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity increases with increase in time. as acceleration is positive (along the direction of velocity).
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) = positive acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 7

iii) Object is moving with constant negative acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity decreases with increase in time as acceleration is negative (opposite to the direction of velocities).
  3. The area tinder the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement 0f the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) negative acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 8

iv. Object is moving with non-uniform acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 9
  2. Velocity-time graph is non-linear.
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval area under the velocity-time curve =
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 10
    = x(t2) – x(t1)
    = displacement of the object from t1 to t2.

Question 8.
A ball thrown vertically upwards from a point P on earth reaches a point Q and returns back to earth striking at a point R. Draw speed-time graph to depict the motion of the ball (Neglect air resistance).
Answer:

  • Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 11
  • A ball which is thrown up with a certain initial speed goes up with decreasing speed to a certain height where its speed becomes zero.
  • Now, during its downward motion, the speed goes on increasing from zero and reaches its initial value when it strikes the ground.
  • The speed-time graph for the motion of a ball is as shown in the figure.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
Figure shows velocity-time graph for various situations. What does each graph indicate?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 12
Answer:

  1. Initial velocity, u > 0. Also, velocity is constant with time. Hence, acceleration is zero.
  2. As finite initial velocity is increasing with time, acceleration, a > 0 and is constant.
  3. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is increasing with time so, acceleration a is positive. But it is decreasing in magnitude with time.
  4. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is linearly increasing with time. Hence, starting from rest acceleration is constant.
  5. Initial velocity, u = 0. Acceleration and velocity is increasing with time.
  6. Initial velocity u > 0. Velocity decreases and ultimately comes to rest. Hence, acceleration a < 0.

Question 10.
‘The distances travelled by an object starting from rest and having a positive uniform acceleration in successive seconds are in the ratio 1:3:5:7….’ Prove it.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object under free fall, Initial velocity u = 0, acceleration a = g
  2. The distance travelled by the object in equal time intervals t0 can be given by the second law of motion as,
    s = ut0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
  3. Distance travelled in the first time interval to,
    s1 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt02 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
    Substituting \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\) = A, we have s1 = At02
  4. Distance travelled in the time interval 2t0 = A (2t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the second t0 interval, s2 = A(4t02 – t02) = 3At0\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2} = 3s1
  5. Distance travelled in the time interval 3t0 = A(3t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the third to interval,
    s3 = A (9t02 – 4t02) = 5 At02 = 5s1
  6. On continuing, it can be seen that the distances travelled, (s1 : s2 : s3 ….) are in the ratio (1 : 3 : 5 :….)

Question 11.
Explain the concept of relative velocity along a straight line with the help of an example.
Answer:

  1. Consider two trains A and B moving on two parallel tracks in the same direction.
  2. Case 1: Train B overtakes train A.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving slower than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of train B with respect to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is much smaller than the velocity of train A.
  3. Case 2: Train A overtakes train B.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving faster than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of the train B w.r.t. to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is larger than the velocity of train A.
  4. If \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{B}}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\).
  5. Similarly the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{B}-\vec{v}_{A}\).
    Thus, relative velocity of an object w.r.t. another object is the difference in their velocities
  6. If two objects start form the same point at t = 0, with different velocities, distance between them increases with time in direct proportion to the relative velocity between them.

Solved Problems

Question 12.
A person walks from point P to point Q along a straight road ¡n 10 minutes, then turns back and returns to point R which ¡s midway between P and Q after further 4 minutes. If PQ is 1 km, find the average speed and velocity of the person in going from P to R.
Solution:
Given: time taken (t) = 10 + 4 = 14 minutes,
distance (s) = PQ + QR = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5 km,
displacement = PQ – QR = 1 – 0.5 = 0.5km
To find: Average speed, average velocity (v)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 13
The average speed and average velocity of the person is 6.42 km/hr and 2.142 km/hr respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 13.
A car moves at a constant speed of 60 km/hr for 1 km and 40 km/hr for next 1 km. What ¡s the average speed of the car?
Solution:
Given. v1 = 60 km/hr, x1 = 1 km,
v2 = 40 km/hr, x2 = 1 km
To find: Average speed of car (Vav)
Formula: vav = \(\frac{\text { total path length }}{\text { total time interval }}\)
Calculation: From given data,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 14
∴ Average speed of car = 48 km/hr
The average speed of the car is 48 km/hr

Question 14.
A stone is thrown vertically upwards from the ground with a velocity 15 m/s. At the same instant a ball is dropped from a point directly above the stone from a height of 30 m. At what height from the ground will the stone and the ball meet and after how much time? (Use g = 10 m/s2 for ease of calculation).
Solution:
Let the stone and the ball meet after time t0. From second equation of motion, the distances travelled by the stone and the ball in that time is given as,
Sstone = 15 t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
Sball = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
When they meet. Sstone + Sball = 30
∴ 15t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 = 30
t0 = \(\frac{30}{15}\) = 2 s
∴ Sstone = 15 (2) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) (10) (2)2 = 30 – 20 = 10 m
The stone and the ball meet at a height of 10 m after time 2s.

Question 15.
A ball is dropped from the top of a building 122.5 m high. How long will it take to reach the ground? What wilt be its velocity when it strikes the ground?
Solution:
Given: s = h = 122.5 m, u = 0,
a = g = 9.8 ms2
To find: i) Time taken to reach the ground (t)
ii) Velocity of ball when it strikes ground (v)

Formulae: i) s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at2
ii) v = u + gt
Calculation: From formula (i),
122.5 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 t2
t2 = \(\frac{122.5}{4.9}\) = 25
t = \(\sqrt {25}\) = 5 second
From formula (ii),
v = u + gt
v = 0 + 9.8 × 5 = 49 m/s

i) Time taken to reach the ground is 5 s.
ii) Velocity of the ball when it strikes the ground is 49 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The position vectors of three particles are given by
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}=(5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}=(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{3}=\left(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \mathrm{t}^{2} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\right) \mathrm{m}\) as a function of time t.
Determine the velocity and acceleration for each, in SI units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 15
v2 = \(\sqrt{5^{2}+5^{2}}\) = 5\(\sqrt{2}\) m/s
tan θ = \(\frac{5}{5}\) = 1
∴ θ = 45°
Direction of v2 makes an angle of 45° to the horizontal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 16
Thus, third particle is getting accelerated along the y-axis at 20 m/s2.

Question 17.
The initial velocity of an object is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}=5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \hat{\mathrm{j}} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}\). Its constant acceleration is \(\vec{a}=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^{2}\). Determine the velocity and the displacement after 5 s.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 17
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 18

Question 18.
An aeroplane A, is travelling in a straight line with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to Earth. Another aeroplane B, is travelling in the opposite direction with a velocity of 350 km/hr with respect to Earth. What is the relative velocity of A with respect to B? What should be the velocity of a third aeroplane C moving parallel to A, relative to the Earth if it has a relative velocity of 100 km/hr with respect to A?
Solution:
Given: vA = 300 km/hr, vB = 350 km/hr,
vCA = 100 km/hr
To find: i) Velocity of plane A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of aeroplane C (vC)

Formula: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vCA = vC – vA

Calculations: From formula (i),
vAB = vA – vB = 300 – (-350)
∴ vAB = 650 km/hr
From formula (ii),
vC = vCA + vA = 100 + 300 = 400 km/hr

i) The relative velocity of A with respect to B is 650 km/hr.
ii) The velocity of plane C relative to Earth is 400 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 19.
A car moving at a speed 10 m/s on a straight road is ahead of car B moving in the same direction at 6 m/s. Find the velocity of A relative to B and vice-versa.
Solution:
Given: vA = 10 m/s, vB = 6 m/s,
To find: i) Velocity of A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of B relative to A (vB – vA)

Formulae: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vBA = vB – vA

Calculation: From formula (i),
vAB = 10 – 6 = 4 m/s
From formula (ii),
vBA = 6 – 10 = -4 m/s
-ve sign indicates that driver of car A sees the car B lagging behind at the rate of 4 m/s.
∴ vAB = 4 m/s, vBA = -4 m/s

i) Velocity of A relative to B is 4 m/s.
ii) Velocity of B relative to A is -4 m/s.

Question 20.
Two trains 120 m and 80 m in length are running in opposite directions with velocities 42 km/h and 30 km/h respectively. In what time will they completely cross each other?
Solution:
Given: l1 = 120 m, l2 = 80 m,
vA = 42 km/h = 42 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{35}{3}\) m/s,
vB = -30km/h= -30 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{-25}{3}\) m/s
To find: Time taken by trains to cross each other (t)
Formula: Time = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)

Calculation :
Total distance to be travelled
= sum of lengths of two trains
= 120 + 80 = 200m
Relative velocity of A with respect to B is vAB,
vAB = vA – vB
= \(\frac{35}{3}\) – (\(\frac{-25}{3}\))
= \(\frac{60}{3}\)
∴ vAB = 20m/S
From formula,
∴ Time taken to cross each other (t) = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)
= \(\frac{200}{20}\)
= 10 s
Time taken by the two trains to cross each other is 10 s.

Question 21.
A jet aeroplane travelling at the speed of 500 km/hr ejects its products of combustion at speed of 1500 km/hr relative to jet plane. What is the relative velocity of the latter with respect to an observer on the ground?
Solution:
Let us consider the positive direction of motion towards the observer on the ground.
Suppose \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) be the velocities of the aeroplane and relative velocity of combustion products w.r.t. aeroplane respectively.

∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) = 1,500 km/hr (towards the observer on the ground) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = 500 km/hr (away from the observer on the ground)
∴ – \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = -500 km/ hr (towards the observer on the ground)

Let \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) be the velocity of the combustion products towards the observer on ground then,
\(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} j}=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} }=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
= 1500 + (-500)
= 1000 km/hr
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) = 1000 km/hr
The relative velocity of the combustion products w.r.t. the observer is 1000 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 22.
Derive the expression for average velocity and instantaneous velocity for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object to be at point A at time t1 in an x—y plane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 19
ii) At time t1, the position vector of the object is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 20
vii) The instantaneous velocity of the object at point A along the trajectory is along the tangent to the curve at A. This is shown by the vector AB.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 21
Equation (3) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous velocity.

Question 23.
Derive the expression for average acceleration and instantaneous acceleration for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object moving in an x-y plane.
Let the velocity of the particle be \(\vec{v}_{1}\) and \(\vec{v}_{2}\) at time t1 and t2 respectively.
ii) The average acceleration (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of the particle between t1 and t2 is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 22
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 23
Equation (1) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous acceleration.

Question 24.
Explain relative velocity between two objects moving in a plane.
Answer:

  1. If \(\vec{v}_{A}\) and \(\vec{v}_{B}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\)
  2. Similarly, the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{\text {BA }}=\vec{v}_{\text {B }}-\overrightarrow{v_{A}}\)
  3. Thus, the magnitudes of the two relative velocities are equal and their directions are opposite.
  4. For a number of objects A, B, C, D—Y, Z, moving with respect to the other. The velocity of A relative to Z can be given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AZ}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AB}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{BC}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{CD}}+\ldots+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{XY}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{YZ}}\)
    The order of subscripts is: A → B → C → D → Z

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 25.
Write a note on projectile motion.
Answer:

  1. An object in flight after being thrown with some velocity is called a projectile and its motion is called projectile motion.
  2. Example: A bullet fired from a gun, football kicked in air, a stone thrown obliquely in air etc.
  3. In projectile motion, the object is moving freely under the influence of Earth’s gravitational field.
  4. The projectile has two components of velocity, one in the horizontal i.e., along the x- direction and the other in the vertical i.e., along the y-direction.
  5. As acceleration due to gravity acts only along the vertically downward direction, the vertical component changes in accordance with the laws of motion with ax = 0 and ay = -g.
  6. As no force is acting in the horizontal direction, the horizontal component of velocity remains unchanged.
    [Note: Retarding forces like air resistance etc. are neglected in projectile motion unless otherwise stated.]

Question 26.
Obtain an expression for the time of flight of a projectile.
Answer:
Expression for time of flight:

  1. Consider a body projected with velocity \(\vec{u}\), at an angle θ of projection from point O in the co-ordinate system of the X-Y plane, as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 24
  2. The initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) can be resolved into two rectangular components:
    ux = u cos θ (Horizontal component)
    uy = u sin θ (Vertical component)
  3. Thus, the horizontal component remains constant throughout the motion due to the absence of any force acting in that direction, while the vertical component changes according to, vy = uy + ay t with ay = – g and uy = u sin θ
  4. The components of velocity of the projectile at time t are given by, vx = ux = u cos θ
    vy = uy – gt = u sin θ – gt ………….. (1)
  5. At maximum height.
    vy = 0, t = tA = time of ascent = time taken to reach maximum height.
    ∴ 0 = u sin θ – gtA ……..[From(l)]
    u sin θ = gtA
    tA = \(\frac{\mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………….. (2)
    This is time of ascent of projectile.
  6. The total time in air i.e., time of flight T is given as,
    T = 2tA ………… [From(2)]
    = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………… (3)
    Equation (3) represents time of flight of projectile.

Question 27.
Define Horizontal range of projectile:
Answer:
The maximum horizontal distance travelled by the projectile is called the horizontal range (R) of the projectile.

Solved Examples

Question 28.
An aeroplane Is travelling northward with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to the Earth. Wind is blowing from east to west at a speed of 100 km/hr. What is the velocity of the aeroplane with respect to the wind?
Solution:
Given:
velocity of aeroplane w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{A E}=300 \hat{j}\)
velocity of wind w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{w E}=-100 \hat{i}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 25

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 29.
A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m above the ground and throws a stone horizontally with an initial speed of 15 ms-1. Neglecting air resistance, find the time taken by the stone to reach the ground, and the speed with which it hits the ground. Take = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: h = 490m, ux = 15 ms-1, ay = 9.8 ms-1,
ax = 0
To find: i) Time taken (t)
ii) Velocity (v)

Formulae: i) t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
ii) v = \(\sqrt{v_{x}^{2}+v_{y}^{2}}\)

Calculation: t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 490}{9.8}}\) = 10 s
vx = ux + axt= 15 + 0 × 10 = 15 m/s
uy = uy + ayt = 0 + 9.8 × 10 = 98 m/s
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+98^{2}}\)
= 99.1 m/s
The stone taken 10 s to reach the ground and hits the ground with 99.1 m/s.

Question 30.
A body is projected with a velocity of 40 ms-1. After 2 s it crosses a vertical pole of height 20.4 m. Find the angle of projection and horizontal range of projectile, (g = 9.8 ms-2).
Solution:
Given: u = 40 ms-1, t = 2 s, y = 20.4 m,
ay = -9.8 m/s2

To find: i) Angle of projection (θ)
ii) Horizontal range of projectile (R)

Formulae: i) y = uy t + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ay t2
ii) R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)

Calculation: Taking vertical upward motion of the projectile from point of projection up to the top of vertical pole we have
uy = 40 sinθ,
From formula (i),
∴ 20.4 = 40 sinθ × 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (-9.8) × 22
∴ 20.4 = 80 sinθ – 19.6
or sinθ = \(\frac{(20.4+19.6)}{80}=\frac{1}{2}\)
or θ = 30°.
From formula (ii),
Horizontal range = \(\frac{40^{2}}{9.8}\) sin 2 × 30°
= 141.4 m
The angle of projection is 30°. The horizontal range of projection is 141.4m

Question 31.
A stone is thrown with an initial velocity components of 20 m/s along the vertical, and 15 m/s along the horizontal direction. Determine the position and velocity of the stone after 3 s. Determine the maximum height that it will reach and the total distance travelled along the horizontal on reaching the ground. (Assume g = 10 m/s2)
Solution:
The initial velocity of the stone in x-direction = u cos θ = 15 m/s and in y-direction = u sin θ = 20 m/s
After 3 s, vx = u cos θ = 15 m/s
vy = u sin θ – gt
= 20 – 10(3)
= -10 m/s
10 m/s downwards.
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{x}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+10^{2}}=\sqrt{225+100}=\sqrt{325}\)
∴ v = 18.03m/s
tan α = vy/vx = 10/15 = 2/3
∴ α = tan-1 (2/3) = 33° 41’ with the horizontal.
Sx = (u cos θ)t = 15 × 3 = 45m,
Sy = (u sin θ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt2 = 2o × 3 – 5(3)2
∴ Sy = 15m
The maximum vertical distance travelled is given by,
H = \(\frac{(\mathrm{u} \sin \theta)^{2}}{(2 \mathrm{~g})}=\frac{20^{2}}{(2 \times 10)}\)
∴ H = 20m
Maximum horizontal distance travelled
R = \(\frac{2 \cdot u_{x} \cdot u_{y}}{g}=\frac{2(15)(20)}{10}\) = 60 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 32.
A body is projected with a velocity of 30 ms-1 at an angle of 300 with the vertical.
Find
i) the maximum height
ii) time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range
Solution:
Given:
30 ms-1, θ = 90° – 30° = 60°

To find: i) The maximum height reached (H)
ii) Time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 26
i) The maximum height reached by the body is 34.44 m.
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5.3 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 79.53 m.

Question 33.
A projectile has a range of 50 m and reaches a maximum height of 10 m. What is the e1eation of the projectile?
Solution:
Given: R = 50m, H = 10 m
To find: Elevation of the projectile (θ)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 27
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.8)
∴ θ = 38.66°
The elevation of the projectile is 38.66°

Question 34.
A bullet fired at an angle of 300 with the horizontal hits the ground 3 km away. By adjusting the angle of projection, can one hope to hit a target 5 km away? Assume the muzzle speed to be fixed and neglect air resistance.
Solution:
R = 3km = 3000m, θ = 30°,
Distance of target R’ = 5km
Horizontal range, R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ 3000 = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 60^{\circ}}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}=\frac{3000}{\sin 60^{\circ}}=\frac{3000 \times 2}{\sqrt{3}}\) = 2000\(\sqrt {3}\)
Maximum horizontal range,
Rmax = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}\) = 2000 \(\sqrt {3}\) m
= 2000 × 1.732 = 3464m = 3.46km
Since R’ > Rmax, Target cannot be hit.

Question 35.
Q.54. A ball is thrown at an angle θ and another ball ¡s thrown at an angle (90° – θ) with the horizontal direction from the same point with velocity 39.2 ms-1. The second ball reaches 50 m higher than the first balL find their individual heights. [Take g = 9.8 ms-2]
Solution:
For the first ball: Angle of projection = θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1
H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)
H = \(\frac{(39.2)^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \times 9.8}\) …………… (i)
For the second ball: Angle of projection
= 90° – θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1,
maximum height reached = (H + 50) m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 28
or 2H = 78.4 – 50 = 28.4
∴ H = 14.2 m
∴ Height of first ball = H = 14.2 m
Height of second ball = H + 50 = 14.2 + 50 = 64.2 m

i) Height reached by the first ball is 14.2 m.
ii) Height reached by the second ball is 64.2m.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 36.
A body is thrown with a velocity of 49 m/s at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Find
i) the maximum height attained by it
ii) the time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range.
Solution:
Given: u = 49 m/s. θ = 30°
To find: i) The maximum height attained (H)
ii) The time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 29
i) The maximum height attained by the body is 30.625 m
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 212.2 m.

Question 37.
A fighter plane flying horizontally at a altitude of 1.5 km with a speed of 720 km/h passes directly overhead an anti-aircraft gun. At what angle from the vertical should the gun be fired for the shell with a muzzle velocity of 600 m/s to hit the plane? At what minimum altitude should the pilot fly to avoid being hit? [Take g = 10 m /s2]
Solution:
Given: h = 1.5 km = 1500 m,
u = 600 m/s,
y = 720 km/h = 720 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 200 m/s

To find: i) Angle of firing (θ)
ii) Minimum altitude (H)

Formula: H = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 g}\)

Calculation:
Let the shell hit the plane t seconds after firing,
∴ 600 cos(90 – θ) × t = 200 t
∴ cos(90 – θ) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
∴ 90° – θ = cos-1(\(\frac{1}{3}\))
cos -1(\(\frac{1}{3}\)) = 90° – θ
∴ 70°28’ = 90° – θ
∴ θ = 90° – cos-1 (\(\frac{1}{3}\))
∴ θ = 19°47’ with vertical
To avoid being hit, the plane must be at a minimum height, i.e., maximum height reached by the shell.
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 30
∴ H = 15.9 km

i) Angle made by gun with the vertical is 19°47′.
ii) Minimum altitude at which the pilot should fly is 15.9 km.

Question 38.
A both is thrown with a velocity of 40 m/s in a direction making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Calculate
i) Horizontal range
ii) Maximum height and
iii) Time taken to reach the maximum height.
Solution:
Given: u = 40 m/s, θ = 30°
To find: i) Horizontal range (R)
ii) Maximum height (Hmax)
iii) Time to reach max. height (tA)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 31
i) Horizontal range of the body is 141.4 m.
ii) Maximum height reached by the body is 20.41 m.
iii) Time taken by the body to reach the maximum height is 2.041 s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 39.
If a child launches paper plane with a velocity of 6 m/s2 at an angle θ with vertical.
i) What will be the maximum range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the maximum height of the projectile?
iii) Will the plane hit a lady standing at a distance of 6m?
Solution:
i) Range of projectile to given by.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 32
Hmax = 1.63 m
iii) As maximum range of projectile is 6.53 m and lady is standing 6m away, plane will hit the lady.

Question 40.
Explain the term uniform circular motion.
Answer:

  1. The motion of a body along the circumference of a circle with constant speed is called uniform circular motion.
  2. The magnitude of velocity remains constant and its direction is tangential to its circular path.
  3. The acceleration is of constant magnitude and it is perpendicular to the tangential velocity. It is always directed towards the centre of the circular path. This acceleration is called centripetal acceleration.
  4. The centripetal force provides the necessary centripetal acceleration.
  5. Examples of U.C.M:
    • Motion of the earth around the sun.
    • Motion of the moon around the earth.
    • Revolution of electron around the nucleus of atom.

Question 41.
What is meant by period of revolution of U.C.M. Obtain an expression for the period of revolution of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
The time taken by a particle performing uniform circular motion to complete one revolution is called as period of revolution. It is denoted by T.

Expression for time period:
During period T, particle covers a distance equal to circumference 2πr of circle with uniform speed v.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 33

Question 42.
For a particle performing uniform circular motion, derive an expression for angular speed and state its unit.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object of mass m, moving with a uniform speed v, along a circle of radius r. Let T be the time period of revolution of the object, i.e., the time taken by the object to complete one revolution or to travel a distance of 2πr.
    Thus, T = 2πr/v
    ∴ Speed, v = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\) …………….. (1)
  2. During circular motion of a point object, the position vector of the object from centre of the circle is the radius vector r. Its magnitude is radius r and it is directed away from the centre to the particle, i.e., away from the centre of the circle.
  3. As the particle performs UCM, this radius vector describes equal angles in equal intervals of time.
  4. The angular speed gives the angle described by the radius vector.
  5. During one complete revolution, the angle described is 2π and the time taken is period T. Hence, the angular speed ω is given as, ….[From (1)]
    ω = \(\frac{\text { Angle }}{\text { time }}=\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\right)}{\mathrm{r}}\) …………….. [From (1)]
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  6. The unit of angular speed is radian/second.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 43.
Derive an expression for centripetal acceleration of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
Expression for centripetal acceleration by calculus method:
i) Suppose a particle is performing U.C.M in anticlockwise direction.
The co-ordinate axes are chosen as shown in the figure.
Let,
A = initial position of the particle which lies on positive X-axis
P = instantaneous position after time t
θ = angle made by radius vector
ω = constant angular speed
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) = instantaneous position vector at time t

ii) From the figure,
\(\vec{r}=\hat{i} x+\hat{j} y\)
where, \(\hat{i}\) and \(\hat{j}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 34
iii) Also, x = r cos θ and y = r sin θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 35

iv) Velocity of the particle is given as rate of change of position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 36

vi) From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) ……….. (3)
Negative sign shows that direction of acceleration is opposite to the direction of position vector. Equation (3) is the centripetal acceleration.

vii) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration is given by,
a = ω2r

viii) The force providing this acceleration should also be along the same direction, hence centripetal.
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\mathrm{m} \omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)
This is the expression for the centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion.

ix) Magnitude of F = mω2r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = mωv

Question 44.
Discuss the factors on which time period of conical pendulum depends.
Answer:
Time period of conical pendulum is given by,
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\) …………. (i)
where, l = length of the string
g = acceleration due to gravity
θ = angle of inclination
From equation (i), it is observed that period of conical pendulum depends on following factors.
i) Length of pendulum (l): Time period of conical pendulum increases with increase in length of pendulum, i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt {l}\)
ii) Acceleration due to gravity (g): Time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in g. i.e., T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\)
iii) Angle of inclination (θ): As θ increases, cos θ decreases, hence, time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in θ. (For 0 < θ < π) i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)

Question 45.
Is there any limitation on semi vertical angle in conical pendulum? Give reason.
Answer:
Yes.

  1. For a conical pendulum, Period T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)
    ∴ Tension F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\cos \theta}\)
    Speed v ∝ \(\sqrt{\tan \theta}\)
    With increase in angle θ, cos θ decreases and tan θ increases. For θ = 90°, T = 0, F = ∞ and v = ∞ which cannot be possible.
  2. Also, θ depends upon breaking tension of string, and a body tied to a string cannot be resolved in a horizontal circle such that the string is horizontal. Hence, there is limitation of semi vertical angle in conical pendulum.

Solved Examples

Question 46.
An object of mass 50 g moves uniformly along a circular orbit with an angular speed of 5 rad/s. If the linear speed of the particle is 25 m/s, ¡s the radius of the circle? Calculate the centripetal force acting on the particle.
Solution:
Given: ω = 5 rad/s, v = 25 m/s,
m = 50 g = 0.05 kg
To find: radius (r), centipetal force (F)
Formula: i) v = ωr
ii) F = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
r = v/ω = 25/5 m = 5 m.
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{0.05 \times 25^{2}}{5}\) = 6.25 N.

i) Radius of the circle is 5 m.
ii) Centripetal force acting on the particle is 6.25 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 47.
An object is travelling in a horizontal circle with uniform speed. At t = 0, the velocity is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{u}}=20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) km/s. After one minute the velocity becomes \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}=-20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\). What is the magnitude of the acceleration?
Solution:
Magnitude of initial and final velocities,
u= \(\sqrt{(20)^{2}+(35)^{2}}\) m/s
∴ u = \(\sqrt{1625}\) m/s
∴ u = 40.3 m/s
As the velocity reverses in 1 minute, the time period of revolution is 2 minutes.
T = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{u}}\), giving r = \(\frac{\text { uT }}{2 \pi}\)
Now,
a = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} 2 \pi}{\mathrm{uT}}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{u}}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{2 \times 3.142 \times 40.3}{2 \times 60}\)
= {antilog[log(3.142) + log(40.3) – log(60)]}
= {antilog(0.4972 + 1.6053 – 1.7782)}
= {antilog(0.3243)}
= 2.110.
∴ a = 2.11 m/s2
The magnitude of acceleration is 2.11 m/s2.

Question 48.
A racing car completes 5 rounds of a circular track in 2 minutes. Find the radius of the track if the car has uniform centripetal acceleration of π2/s2.
Solution:
Given: 5 rounds = 2πr(5),
t = 2minutes = 120s
To find: Radius (r)
Formula: acp = ω2r
Calculation: From formula,
acp = ω2r
∴ π2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
But v = \(\frac{2 \pi r(5)}{t}=\frac{10 \pi r}{t}\)
∴ π2 = \(\frac{100 \pi^{2} \mathrm{r}^{2}}{\mathrm{rt}^{2}}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{120 \times 120}{100}\) =144m
The radius of the track is 144 m.

Question 49.
A car of mass 1500 kg rounds a curve of radius 250m at 90 km/hour. Calculate the centripetal force acting on it.
Solution:
Given: m= 1500 kg, r = 250m,
v = 90 km/h = 90 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 25m/s
To find: Centripetal force (FCP)
Formula: FCP = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
FCP = \(\frac{1500 \times(25)^{2}}{250}\)
∴ FCP = 3750 N
The centripetal force acting on the car is 3750 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 50.
A one kg mass tied at the end of the string 0.5 m long is whirled ¡n a horizontal circle, the other end of the string being fixed. The breaking tension in the string is 50 N. Find the greatest speed that can be given to the mass.
Solution:
Given: Breaking tension, F = 50 N,
m = 1 kg, r = 0.5m
To find: Maximum speed (vmax)
Formula: B.T (F) = max. C.F \(\frac{m v_{\max }^{2}}{r}\)
Calculation: From formula,
v2max = \(\frac{F \times r}{m}\)
∴ v2max = \(\frac{50 \times 0.5}{1}\)
∴ vmax = \(\sqrt{50 \times 0.5}\) = 5 m/s
The greatest speed that can be given to the mass is 5 m/s.

Question 51.
A mass of 5 kg is tied at the end of a string 1.2 m long revolving in a horizontal circle. If the breaking tension in the string is 300 N, find the maximum number of revolutions per minute the mass can make.
Solution:
Given: Length of the string, r = 1.2 m,
Mass attached. m = 5 kg,
Breaking tension, T = 300 N
To find: Maximum number of revolutions per minute (nmax)
Formula: Tmax = Fmax = mrω2max
Calculation: From formula,
∴ 5 × 1.2 × (2πn)2 = 300
∴ 5 × 1.2 × 4π2n2 = 300
∴ n2max = \(\frac{300}{4 \times(3.142)^{2} \times 6.0}\) = 1.26618
∴nmax = \(\sqrt{1.26618}\) = 1.125 rev/s
∴ nmax = 1.125 × 60
∴ nmax = 67.5 rev/min
The maximum number of revolutions per minute made by the mass is 67.5 rev /min.

Question 52.
A coin placed on a revolving disc, with its centre at a distance of 6 cm from the axis of rotation just slips off when the speed of the revolving disc exceeds 45 r.p.m. What should be the maximum angular speed of the disc, so that when the coin is at a distance of 12 cm from the axis of rotation, it does not slip?
Solution:
Given. r1 = 6cm, r2 = 12cm, n1 = 45 r.p.m
To Find: Maximum angular speed (n2)
Formula: Max. C.F = mrω2
Calculation: Since, mr1ω12 mr2ω22 [As mass is constant]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 37
The maximum angular speed of the disc should be 31.8 r.p.m.

Question 53.
A stone of mass 0.25 kg tied to the end of a string is whirled in a circle of radius 1.5 m with a speed of 40 revolutions/min in a horizontal plane. What is the tension in the string? What is the maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around if the string can withstand a maximum tension of 200 N?
Solution:
Given: m = 0.25 kg, r.= 1.5 m, Tmax = 200 N,
n = 40 rev. min-1 = \(\frac{40}{60}\) rev s-1
To find: i) Tension (T)
ii) Maximum speed (vmax)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 38
i) The tension in the string is 6.55 N.
ii) The maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around is 34.64 m s-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 54.
In a conical pendulum, a string of length 120 cm is fixed at rigid support and carries a mass of 150 g at its free end. If the mass is revolved in a horizontal circle of radius 0.2 m around a vertical axis, calculate tension in the string. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: l = 120 cm = 1.2rn, r = 0.2m,
m = 150 g = 0.15 kg
To find: Tension in the string (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 39
∴ Substituting in formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 40
Tension in the string is 1.491 N.

Question 55.
A conical pendulum has length 50 cm. Its bob of mass 100 g performs uniform circular motion in horizontal plane, so as to have radius of path 30 cm. Find
i) The angle made by the string with vertical
ii) The tension in the supporting thread and
iii) The speed of bob.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 41
Given: l = 150 cm = 0.5 m, r = 30 cm = 0.3 m,
m = 100 g = 100 × 10-3 kg = 0.1 kg
To find: i) Angle made by the string with vertical (θ)
ii) Tension in the supporting thread (T)
iii) Speed of bob (y)

Formulae: i) tan θ = –\(\frac{r}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
ii) tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{rg}}\)

Calculation: By Pythagoras theorem, l2 = r2 + h2
h2 = l2 – r2
h2 = 0.25 – 0.09 = 0.16
h = 0.4m
i) From formula (1),
tan θ = \(\frac{0.3}{0.4}\) = 0.75
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.75)
θ = 36°52’

ii) The weight of bob is balanced by vertical component of tension T
∴ T cos θ = mg
cos θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{l}=\frac{0.4}{0.5}\) = 0.8
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\cos \theta}=\frac{0.1 \times 9.8}{0.8}\)
∴ T = 1.225 N

iii) From formula (2),
v2 = rg tan θ
∴ v2 = 0.3 × 9.8 × 0.75 = 2.205
∴ v = 1.485 m/s

i) Angle made by the string with vertical is 36°52′. ‘
ii) Tension in the supporting thread is 1.225 N.
iii) Speed of the bob is 1.485 m/s

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 56.
Explain the variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with time for an object under free fall.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 42
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 43

  1. For a free falling object, considering the downward direction as negative, the object is released from rest.
    ∴ initial velocity u = 0 and a = -g = -9.8 m/s2
    ∴ The kinematical equations become,
    v = u + at = 0 – gt = -gt = -9.8t
    s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at2 = o + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(-g)t2 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) 9.8t2
    = -4.9t2
    v2 = u2 + 2as = 0 + 2(-g)s
    = -2gs = -2 × 9.8s
    = -19.6s
  2. These equations give the velocity and the distance travelled as a function of time and also the variation of velocity with distance.
  3. The variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with the time is as shown in figure a, b and c respectively.

Question 57.
The position-time (x – t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their homes P and Q respectively are shown in figure. Choose the correct entries in the brackets below.
i) (A/B) lives closer to the school than (B/A)
ii) (A/B) starts from the school earlier than (B/A)
iii) (A/B) walks faster than (B/A)
iv) A and B reach home at the (same/different) time
v) (A/B) overtakes (B/A) on the road (once/twice)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 44
Answer:

  1. A lives closer to the school than B. This is because, OQ > OP, hence B has to cover larger distance than A.
  2. A starts from the school earlier than B. This is because, A starts at t = 0 whereas B starts at some finite time greater than zero.
  3. As slope of B is greater than that of A, hence B walks faster than A. iv. A and B reach home at different times.
  4. This is because the value of ‘t’ corresponding to P and Q for A and B respectively is different.
  5. B overtakes A on the road once. This is because A and B meet each other only once on their way back home. As B starts from school later than A and walks faster than A, hence B overtakes A once on his way home.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 58.
A bowler throws the ball up to correct distance by controlling his velocity and angle of throw, as shown in the figure given below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 45
i) What will be the range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the height of the projectile from ground?
Answer:

  1. Range of projectile is given by,
    R = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{g}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin (2 \times 30)}{9.8}\)
    R = 3.18 m
  2. Height of projectile is given by,
    H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin ^{2} 30}{2 \times 9.8}\) = 0.46m
    Height achieved by ball from ground is
    H = 0.46 + 1 = 1.46m

i) The range of the projectile is 3.18 m.
ii) The height of the projectile is 1.46 m.

Question 59.
A child takes reading of two cars running on highway, for his school project. He draws a position-time graph of the two cars as shown in the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 46
i) What is the velocity of two cars when they meet together?
ii) What is the difference in velocities of the two cars when they cover their maximum distance?
iii) What will be acceleration of the two cars in first 20 s?
Solution:
i) According to graph, the velocity of two cars when they meet each other are,
x = 70m
t = 308
v = \(\frac{x}{t}=\frac{70}{30}\) = 2.33 m/s

ii) According to graph, for maximum distance.
For 1st car,
x1 = 120m
t1 = 50 s
v1 = \(\frac{x_{1}}{t_{1}}=\frac{120}{50}\)
v1 = 2.4 m/s

For 2nd car,
x2 = 90 m
t2 = 60 s
v2 = \(\frac{x_{2}}{t_{2}}=\frac{90}{60}\)
v2 = 1.5 m/s
Difference in velocities is given by,
v1 – v2 = 2.4 – 1.5 = 0.9 m/s

iii) According to graph,
Acceleration of 1st car in first 20 s
v1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v1 = \(\frac{60}{20}\)
v1 = 3 m/s
a1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{3}{20}\)
a1 = 0.15 m/s2
Acceleration of 2nd car in first 20 s
v2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v2 = \(\frac{40}{20}\)
v2 = 2 m/s
a2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{2}{20}\)
a2 = 0.1 m/s2
Now,
a1 – a2 = 0.15 – 0.1
= 0.05 m/s2

i) The velocity of two cars when they meet together is 2.33 m/s.
ii) The difference in velocities of two cars when they cover maximum distance is 0.9 m/s.
iii) The accelerator of two cars in 20 s is 0.05 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 60.
The speed of a projectile u reduces by 50% on reaching maximum height. What is the range on the horizontal plane?
Solution:
If θ is the angle of projection, then velocity of projectile at height point = u cos θ
u cos θ = \(\frac{50}{100}\) u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) u
or cos θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\) cos 60°
or θ = 60°
Horizontal range,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 47

Question 61.
In projectile motion, vertical motion and horizontal motion are dependent of each other. Yes or No? Justify your answer.
Answer:
No. In projectile motion, the horizontal and vertical motion are independent of each other because both motions don’t affect each other.

Question 62.
In angular projection of a projectile, at highest point, what will be the components of horizontal and vertical velocities?
Answer:
At highest point of angular projection of a projectile, the horizontal component of its velocity is non zero and the vertical component of its velocity is momentarily zero.

Question 63.
What angle will be described between velocity and acceleration at highest point of projectile path?
Answer:
At highest point of projectile path, the angle between velocity and acceleration is 90°.

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 50

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The velocity-time relation of a particle starting from rest is given by v = kt where k = 2 m/s2. The distance travelled in 3 sec is
(A) 9 m
(B) 16 m
(C) 27 m
(D) 36 m
Answer:
(A) 9 m

Question 2.
If the particle is at rest, then the x – t graph can be only
(A) parallel to position – axis
(B) parallel to time – axis
(C) inclined with acute angle
(D) inclined with obtuse angle
Answer:
(B) parallel to time – axis

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
A body is thrown vertically upwards, maximum height is reached, then it will have
(A) zero velocity and zero acceleration.
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.
(C) finite velocity and zero acceleration.
(D) finite velocity and finite acceleration.
Answer:
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.

Question 4.
Which of the following is NOT a projectile?
(A) A bullet fired from gun.
(B) A shell fired from cannon.
(C) A hammer thrown by athlete.
(D) An aeroplane in flight.
Answer:
(D) An aeroplane in flight.

Question 5.
The range of projectile is 1 .5 km when it is projected at an angle of 15° with horizontal. What will be its range when it is projected at an angle of 45° with the horizontal?
(A) 0.75 km
(B) 1.5 km
(C) 3 km
(D) 6 km
Answer:
(C) 3 km

Question 6.
Which of the following remains constant for a projectile fired from the earth?
(A) Momentum
(B) Kinetic energy
(C) Vertical component of velocity
(D) Horizontal component of velocity
Answer:
(D) Horizontal component of velocity

Question 7.
In case of a projectile, what is the angle between the instantaneous velocity and acceleration at the highest point?
(A) 45°
(B) 1800
(C) 90°
(D) 0°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 8.
A player kicks up a ball at an angle θ with the horizontal. The horizontal range is maximum when θ is equal to
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°
Answer:
(B) 45°

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
The greatest height to which a man can throw a stone is h. The greatest distance to which he can throw it will be
(A) h/2
(B) 2h
(C) h
(D) 3h
Answer:
(B) 2h

Question 10.
Two balls are projected at an angle θ and (90° – θ) to the horizontal with the same speed. The ratio of their maximum vertical
heights is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) tan θ : 1
(C) 1 : tan θ
(D) tan2 θ : 1
Answer:
(D) tan2 θ : 1

Question 11.
When air resistance is taken into account while dealing with the motion of the projectile, to achieve maximum horizontal range, the angle of projection should be,
(A) equal to 45°
(B) less than 45°
(C) greater than 90°
(D) greater than 45°
Answer:
(D) greater than 45°

Question 12.
The maximum height attained by projectile is found to be equal to 0.433 of the horizontal range. The angle of projection of this projectile is
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 75°
Answer:
(C) 60°

Question 13.
A projectile is thrown with an initial velocity of 50 m/s. The maximum horizontal distance which this projectile can travel is
(A) 64m
(B) 128m
(C) 5m
(D) 255m
Answer:
(D) 255m

Question 14.
A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500 kmh-1 ejects the burnt gases at the speed of 1400 kmh-1 relative to the jet airplane. The speed of burnt gases relative to stationary observer on the earth is
(A) 2.8 kmh-1
(B) 190 kmh-1
(C) 700 kmh-1
(D) 900 kmh-1
Answer:
(D) 900 kmh-1

Question 15.
A projectile projected with certain angle reaches ground with
(A) double angle
(B) same angle
(C) greater than 90°
(D) angle between 90° and 180°
Answer:
(B) same angle

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The time period of conical pendulum is _________.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 51
Answer:
(C) \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\)

Question 17.
A projectile projected with certain velocity reaches ground with (magnitude)
(A) zero velocity
(B) smaller velocity
(C) same velocity
(D) greater velocity
Answer:
(C) same velocity

Question 18.
The period of a conical pendulum in terms of its length (l), semivertical angle (θ) and acceleration due to gravity (g) is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 52
Answer:
(C) \(4 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{4 \mathrm{~g}}}\)

Question 19.
Consider a simple pendulum of length 1 m. Its bob performs a circular motion in horizontal plane with its string making an angle 600 with the vertical. The period of rotation of the bob is(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 2s
(B) 1.4s
(C) 1.98 s
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) 1.4s

Question 20.
The period of a conical pendulum is
(A) equal to that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(B) more than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(D) independent of length of pendulum.
Answer:
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
Two particles A and B are moving in uniform circular motion in concentric circles of radii rA and rB with speed vA and vB respectively. Their time period of rotation is the same. The ratio of angular speed of A to that of B will be:
(A) rB : rA
(B) 1 : 1
(C) rA : rB
(D) vA : vB
Answer:
(B) 1 : 1
Hint:
Time period of rotation (A and B) is same
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 53

Question 2.
When an object is shot from the bottom of a long smooth inclined plane kept at an angle 60° with horizontal, it can travel a distance x1 along the plane. But when the inclination is decreased to 30° and the same object is shot with the same velocity, it can travel x2 distance. Then x1 : x2 will be:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
(B) 1 : 2\(\sqrt {3}\)
(C) 1 : \(\sqrt {2}\)
(D) \(\sqrt {3}\) : 1
Answer:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
Hint:
v2 = u2 + 2as
∴ v2 = u2 + 2 g sin θ x
sin θ. x = constant
∴ x ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta}\)
∴ \(\frac{x_{1}}{x_{2}}=\frac{\sin \theta_{2}}{\sin \theta_{1}}=\frac{1 / 2}{\sqrt{3} / 2}\) = 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)

Question 3.
A person travelling in a straight line moves with a constant velocity v1 for certain distance x’ and with a constant velocity v2 for next equal distance. The average velocity y is given by the relation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 54
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{2}{v}=\frac{1}{v_{1}}+\frac{1}{v_{2}}\)
Hint:
Let, t’ be the time taken to travel distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v1
∴ t1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\)
Let ‘t2’ be the time taken to travel equal distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 55

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
Two bullets are fired horizontally and simultaneously towards each other from roof tops of two buildings 100 m apart and of same height of 200 m, with the same velocity of 25 m/s. When and where will the two bullets collide? (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) They will not collide
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
(C) After 2 s at a height of 20 m
(D) After 4 s at a height of 120 m
Answer:
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 56
Let the bullets collide at time t
The horizontal displacement x1 and x2 is given by the equation
x1 = ut and x2 = ut
∴ x1 + x2 = 100
∴ 25t + 25t = 100
∴ t = 2s
Vertical displacement ‘y’ is given by
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 22 = 20m
∴ h = 200 – 20= 180m

Question 5.
A toy car with charge q moves on a frictionless horizontal plane surface under the influence of a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\). Due to the force q\(\vec{E}\), its velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s in one second duration. At that instant the direction of the field is reversed. The car continues to move for two more seconds under the influence of this field. The average velocity and the average speed of the toy car between 0 to 3 seconds are respectively
(A) 2 m/s, 4 m/s
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
(C) 1 m/s, 3.5 m/s
(D) 1.5 m/s, 3 m/s
Answer:
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
Hint:
Car at rest attains velocity of 6 m/s in t1 = 1 s.
Now as direction of field is reversed, velocity of car will reduce to 0 m/s in next 1 s. i.e., at t2 = 2 s. But, it continues to move for next one second. This will give velocity of -6 m/s to car at t3 = 3 s.
Using this data, plot of velocity versus time will be
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 57

Question 6.
All the graphs below are intended to represent the same motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 58
Answer:
(D)
Hint:
The graphs (A), (B) and (C) represent the uniformly retarded motion, i.e., velocity decreases uniformly. However, the slope of the curve in graph (D), indicates increasing velocity. Hence, graph (D) is incorrect.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit of radius R in a central force inversely proportional to the nth power of R. If the period of rotation of the particle is T, then:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
(B) T ∝ Rn/2
(C) T ∝ R3/2 for any n
(D) T ∝ R\(\frac{n}{2}\)+1
Answer:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
Hint:
The centripetal force acting on the particle is provided by the central force,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 59

Question 8.
Preeti reached the metro station and found that the escalator was not working. She walked up the stationary escalator in time t1. On other days, if she remains stationary on the moving escalator, then the escalator takes her up in time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on the moving escalator will be:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{t}_{1}+\mathrm{t}_{2}}{2}\)
(B) \(\frac{t_{1} t_{2}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
(D) t1 – t2
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
Hint:
Let velocity of Preeti be v1, velocity of escalator be v2 and distance travelled be L.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs time?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 61
Answer:
(A)
Hint:
If a body is projected in vertically upward direction, then its acceleration is constant and negative. If direction of motion is positive i.e.. vertically up) and initial position of body is taken as origin, then the velocity decreases uniformly. At highest point its velocity is equal to zero and then it accelerates uniformly downwards returning to its reference position.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 1.
Explain the representation of a vector graphically and symbolically.
Answer:

  1. Graphical representation:
    A vector is graphically represented by a directed line segment or an arrow.
    eg.: displacement of a body from P to Q is represented as P → Q.
  2. Symbolic representation:
    Symbolically a vector is represented by a single letter with an arrow above it, such as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). The magnitude of the vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is denoted as |A| or | \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) | or A.

Question 2.
A vector has both magnitude and direction. Does it mean that anything that has magnitude and direction is necessarily a vector?
Answer:

  1. For a physical quantity, only having magnitude and direction is not a sufficient condition to be a vector.
  2. A physical quantity also has to obey vectors law of addition to be termed as vector.
  3. Hence, anything that has magnitude and direction is not necessarily a vector.
    Example: Though current has definite magnitude and direction, it is not a vector.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 3.
Define and explain the following terms:
i. Zero vector (Null vector)
ii. Resultant vector
iii. Negative vectors
iv. Equal vectors
v. Position vector
Answer:
i. Zero vector (Null vector):
A vector having zero magnitude and arbitrary direction is called zero vector. It is denoted as \(\overrightarrow{0}\).
Example: Velocity vector of stationary particle, acceleration vector of a body moving with uniform velocity.

ii. Resultant vector:
The resultant of two or more vectors is defined as that single vector, which produces the same effect as produced by all the vectors together.

iii. Negative vectors:
A negative vector of a given vector is a vector of the same magnitude but opposite in direction to that of the given vector.
Negative vectors are antiparallel vectors.
In figure, \(\vec{b}\) = – \(\vec{a}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 1

iv. Equal vectors:
Two vectors A and B representing same physical quantity are said to be equal if and only if they have the same magnitude and direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 2
In the given figure |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\)|

v. Position vector:
A vector which gives the position of a particle at a point with respect to the origin of chosen co-ordinate system is called position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 3
In the given figure \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}\) represents position vector of \(\vec{P}\) with respect to O.

Question 4.
Whether the resultant of two vectors of unequal magnitude be zero?
Answer:
The resultant of two vectors of different magnitude cannot give zero resultant.

Question 5.
Define unit vector and give its physical significance.
Answer:
Unit vector: A vector having unit magnitude in a given direction is called a unit vector in that direction.
If \(\vec{p}\) is a non zero vector (P ≠ 0) then the unit vector \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) is given by,
\(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{u}_{p} P\)

Significance of unit vector:

i. The unit vector gives the direction of a given vector.

ii. Unit vector along X, Y and Z direction of a rectangular (three dimensional) coordinate is represented by \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) respectively Such that \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{x}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{y}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{z}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
This gives \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{X}}}{\mathrm{X}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Y}}}{\mathrm{X}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Z}}}{\mathrm{Z}}\)

Question 6.
Explain multiplication of a vector by a scalar.
Answer:

  1. When a vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is multiplied by a scalar ‘s’, it becomes ‘s\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}’ whose magnitude is s times the magnitude of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\).
  2. The unit of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is different from the unit of ‘s \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)’.
    For example,
    If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton and s = 5 second, then s\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton × 5 second = 50 Ns.

Question 7.
Explain addition of vectors.
Answer:

  1. The addition of two or more vectors of same type gives rise to a single vector such that the effect of this single vector is the same as the net effect of the original vectors.
  2. It is important to note that only the vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be added.
  3. For example, if two vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting along the same line, then they can be added as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| + |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)|
    |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = 3 + 4 = 7
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 4
    [Note: When vectors are not in the same direction, then they can be added using triangle law of vector addition.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 8.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
It is possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.
Answer:
False.
It is not possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.

Question 9.
Explain subtraction of vectors.
Answer:

  1. When two vectors are anti-parallel (in the opposite direction) to each other, the magnitude
  2. It is important to note that only vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be subtracted.
  3. For example, if two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting in opposite direction, they are subtracted as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = ||\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| – |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)||
    = |3 – 4| = 1 unit, directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 5

Question 10.
How can resultant of two vectors of a type inclined with each other be determined?
Answer:
When two vectors of a type are inclined with each other, their resultant can be determined by using triangle law of vector addition.

Question 11.
What is triangle law of vector addition?
Answer:
Triangle law of vector addition:
If two vectors describing the same physical quantity are represented in magnitude and direction, by the two sides of a triangle taken in order, then their resultant is represented in magnitude and direction by the third side of the triangle drawn in the opposite sense, i.e., from the starting point (tail) of the first vector to the end point (head) of the second vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 6
Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors of same type taken in same order as shown in figure.
∴ Resultant vector will be given by third side taken in opposite order, i.e., \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{OB}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)

Question 12.
Using triangle law of vector addition, explain the process of adding two vectors which are not lying in a straight line.
Answer:
i. Two vectors in magnitude and direction are drawn in a plane as shown in figure (a)
Let these vectors be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 7

ii. Join the tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) in the given direction. The resultant vector will be the line which is obtained by joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 8

iii. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) is the resultant vector of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then using triangle law of vector addition, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 13.
Is it possible to add two velocities using triangle law?
Answer:
Yes, it is possible to add two velocities using triangle law.

Question 14.
Explain, how two vectors are subtracted. Find their resultant by using triangle law of vector addition.
Answer:

  1. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors in a plane as shown in figure (a).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 10
  2. To subtract \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) from \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is reversed so that we get the vector –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
  3. The resultant vector is obtained by –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (c).
  4. From triangle law of vector addition, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (-\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 15.
Prove that: Vector addition is commutative.
Answer:
Commutative property of vector addition:
According to commutative property, for two
vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\)

Proof:

i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by two sides \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 11

ii. Complete a parallelogramOABC such that
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then join OB.

iii. In △OAB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (1)
In △OCB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (2)

iv. From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)
Hence, addition of two vectors obeys commutative law.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 16.
Prove that: Vector addition is associative.
Answer:
Associative property of vector addition:
According to associative property, for three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\),
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 12
Proof:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 13
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 14
On comparing, equation (2) and (4), we get,
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Hence, associative law is proved.

Question 17.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
The subtraction of given vectors is neither commutative nor associative.
Answer:
True.

Question 18.
State and prove parallelogram law of vector addition and determine magnitude and direction of resultant vector.
Answer:

i. Parallelogram law of vector add addition;
If two vectors of same type starting from the same point (tails cit the same point), are represented in magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram then, their resultant vector is given in magnitude and direction, by the diagonal of the parallelogram starting from the same point.

ii. Proof:

a. Consider two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) of the same type, with their tails at the point O’ and θ’ is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in the figure below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 15
b. Join BC and AC to complete the parallelogram OACB, with \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as the adjacent sides. We have to prove that diagonal \(\overline{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), the resultant of sum of the two given vectors.

c. By the triangle law of vector addition, we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) … (1)
As \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) is parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Substituting \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) in equation (1) we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)
Hence proved.

iii. Magnitude of resultant vector:

a. To find the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\), draw a perpendicular from C to meet OA extended at S.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 16

c. Using Pythagoras theorem in right angled triangle, OSC
(OC)2 = (OS)2 + (SC)2
= (OA + AS)2 + (SC)2
∴ (OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA).(AS) + (AS2) + (SC)2 . . . .(4)

d. From right angle trianle ASC,
(AS)2 + (SC)2 = (AC)2 …. (5)

e. From equation (4) and (5), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA) (AS) + (AC)2
… .(6)

f. Using (2) and (6), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + (AC)2 + 2(OA)(AC) cos θ
∴ R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2 PQ cos θ
∴ R = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{P}^{2}+\mathrm{Q}^{2}+2 \mathrm{PQ} \cos \theta}\) ….(7)
Equation (7) gives the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\).

iv. Direction of resultant vector:
To find the direction of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) make an angle α with \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 17
Equation (9) represents direction of resultant vector.
[Note: If β is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), it can be similarly derived that
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 18

Question 19.
Complete the table for two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) inclined at angle θ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 19
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 20

Question 20.
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides is not passing through common point of two vectors. What does it represent?
Answer:
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides not passing through common point of two vectors represents triangle law of vector addition.

Question 21.
If | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | = | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | then what can be the
angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) ?
Answer:
Let θ be the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 21

Thus, if |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) |, then vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be at right angles to each other.

Question 22.
Express vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) in terms of vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 22
Solution:
Using the triangle law of addition of vectors,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\)
∴\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\)

Question 23.
From the following figure, determine the resultant of four forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{1}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{2}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{3}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{4}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 23
Solution:
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) to complete ∆OAB as shown in figure below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 24
Now, using triangle law of vector addition,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\)
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) to complete triangle OBC as shown figure below
Similarly, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{3}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 25
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is the resultant of the four vectors.

Question 24.
Find the vector that should be added to the sum of (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) and (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) to give a unit vector along the X-axis.
Solution:
Let vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) be added to get unit vector (\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)) along X-axis.
Sum of given vectors is given as,
(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) ) + (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
According to given condition, (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) + \(\hat{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) = -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Answer:
The required vector is -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).

Question 25.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).Find
i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
Solution:
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
To find:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)

Calculation:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – k) + (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2k)
= (2 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + (3 – 5)\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + (-1 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
= 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 3(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 9\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 10\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 26

Question 26.
Find unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = 3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
The resultant of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 27
Answer:
The required unit vector is \(\frac{1}{3 \sqrt{2}}\)(4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\))

Question 27.
Two forces, F1 and F2, each of magnitude 5 N are inclined to each other at 60°. Find the magnitude and direction of their resultant force.
Solution:
Given: F1 = 5 N, F2 = 5 N, θ = 60°
To find: Magnitude of resultant force (R),
Direction of resultant force (α)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 28
Answer:
i. The magnitude of resultant force is 8.662 N.

ii. The direction of resultant force is 30° w.r.t. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{1}}\).

Question 28.
Water is flowing in a stream with velocity 5 km/hr in an easterly direction relative to the shore. Speed of a boat relative to still water is 20 km/hr. If the boat enters the stream heading north, with what velocity will the boat actually travel?
Answer:
The resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) of the boat can be obtained by adding the two velocities using ∆ OAB shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 29
The direction ot the resultant velocity is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 30
Answer: The velocity of the boat is 20.616 km/hr in a direction 14.04° east of north. .
[Note: tan-1 (0.25) ≈ 14.04° which equals 14°2]

Question 29.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m/s. Wind starts blowing at a speed of 12 m/s in east to west direction. In which direction should a boy waiting at a bus stop hold his umbrella? (NCERT)
Solution:
Let the velocity of rain and wind be \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{R}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{W}}}\), then resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) has magnitude of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 31
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) makes an angle θ with vertical then, from the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 32
Answer: The boy should hold his umbrella in vertical plane at an angle of about 19° with vertical towards the east.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 30.
What are components of a vector?
Answer:

  1. The given vector can be written as sum of two or more vectors along certain fixed directions. The vectors into which the given single vector is splitted are called components of the vector.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\mathrm{A}_{1} \hat{\alpha}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{2} \hat{\beta}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{3} \hat{\gamma}\) where, \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\) are unit vectors along chosen directions. Then, A1, A2 and A3 are known as components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) along three directions \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\).
  3. It two vectors are equal then, their corresponding components are also equal and vice-versa.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 33

[Note: The magnitude of a vector is a scalar while each component of a vector is always a vector.]

Question 31.
What is meant by resolution of vector?
Answer:

  1. The process of splitting a given vector into its components is called resolution of the vector.
  2. Resolution of vector is equal to replacing the original vector with the sum of the component vectors.

Question 32.
That are rectangular components of vectors? Explain their uses.
Answer:
i. Rectangular components of a vector:
If components of a given vector are mutually perpendicular to each other then they are called rectangular components of that vector.

ii. Consider a vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}
\) originating from the origin O’ of a rectangular co-ordinate system as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 34

iii. Draw CA ⊥ OX and CB ⊥ OY.
Let component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X-axis \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\) and component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along Y-axis = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\)
By parallelogram law of vectors,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 35
where, \(
\hat{i}
\) and \(
\hat{j}
\) are unit vectors along positive direction of X and Y axes respectively.

iv. If θ is angle made by \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) with X-axis, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 36

v. Squaring and adding equation (1) and (2) we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 37
Equation (3) gives the magnitude of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\).

vi. Direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) can be found out by dividing equation (2) by (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 38
Equation (4) gives direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\)

vii. When vectors are noncoplanar, it becomes necessary to use the third dimension. If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\), \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{z}}
\) are three rectangular components of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X, Y and Z axes of a three dimensional rectangular cartesian co-ordinate system then.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 39
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 40

Question 33.
Find a unit vector in the direction of the vector 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4\(
\hat{j}
\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 41

Question 34.
Given \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{a}}
\) = \(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{b}}
\) = 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + \(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\), what are the magnitudes of the two vectors? Are these two vectors equal?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 42
The magnitudes of \(
\vec{a}
\) and \(
\vec{b}
\) are equal. However, their corresponding components are not equal, i.e., ax ≠ bx and ay ≠ by. Hence, the two vectors are not equal.
Answer:
Magnitudes of two vectors are equal, but vectors are unequal.

Question 35.
Find the vector drawn from the point (-4, 10, 7) to the point (3, -2, 1). Also find its magnitude.
Solution:
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is a vector drawn from the point (x1, y1, z1) to the point (x2, y2, z2), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 43

Question 36.
In a cartesian co-ordinate system, the co-ordinates of two points P and Q are (2, 4, 4) and (-2, -3, 7) respectively, find \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P Q}}
\) and its magnitude.
Solution:
Given: Position vector of P = (2,4,4)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 44
∴ |\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\)| = 8.6 units
Answer: Vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\) is -4\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) – 7\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) + 3\(
\hat{\mathbf{k}}
\) and its magnitude is 8.6 units.

Question 37.
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\) = 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4[/latex] = 3\(
\hat{j}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) = 7\(
\hat{i}
\) + 24\(
\hat{j}
\), find a vector having the same magnitude as \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) and parallel to \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\).
Solution:
The magnitude of vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is | \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) |
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 45
Answer: The required vector is 15\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 20\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 38.
Complete the table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 46
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 47

Question 39.
State with reasons, whether the following algebraic operations with scalar and vector physical quantities are meaningful.
i. Adding any two scalars,
ii. Adding a scalar to a vector of the same dimensions,
iii. Multiplying any vector by any scalar,
iv. Multiplying any two scalars,
v. Adding any two vectors. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Not any two scalars can be added. To add two scalars it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.
  2. This operation is meaningless. Only a vector can be added to another vector.
  3. This operation is possible. When a vector is multiplied with a dimensional scalar, the resultant vector will have different dimensions.
    eg.: acceleration vector is multiplied with mass (a dimensional scalar), the resultant vector has the dimensions of force.
    When a vector is multiplied with non – dimensional scalar, it will be a vector having dimensions as that of the given vector.
    eg.: \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \) × 3 = 3\(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \)
  4. This operation is possible. Multiplication of non-dimensional scalars is simply algebraic multiplication. Multiplication of non dimensional scalars will result into scalar with different dimensions.
    eg.: Volume × density = mass.
  5. Not any two vectors can be added. To add two vectors it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.

Question 40.
Explain scalar product of two vectors with the help of suitable examples.
Answer:
Scalar product of two vectors:

  1. The scalar product of two non-zero vectors is defined as the product of the magnitude of the two vectors and cosine of the angle θ between the two vectors.
  2. The dot sign is used between the two vectors to be multiplied therefore scalar product is also called dot product.
  3. The scalar product of two vectors \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) is given by, \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) . \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) = PQ cos θ
    where, p = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \), Q = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
    θ = angle between \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
  4. Examples of scalar product:
    1. Power (P) is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and velocity (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \))
      ∴ P = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \) . \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \)
    2. Work is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and displacement (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)).
      ∴ W = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)

Question 41.
Discuss characteristics of scalar product of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the scalar product of two vectors:
i. The scalar product of two vectors is equivalent to the product of magnitude of one vector with component of the other in the direction of the first.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 50
vi. Scalar product of two vectors is expressed in terms of rectangular components as
\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = Ax + Bx + AyBy + AzBz

vii. For \(
\vec{a} \neq 0, \vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}=\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}
\) does not necessarily mean \(
\vec{b}
\) = \(
\vec{c}
\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 42.
Complete the table vector given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 52

Question 43.
Define and explain vector product of two vectors with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. The vector product of two vectors is a third vector whose magnitude is equal to the product of magnitude of the two vectors and sine of the smaller angle θ between the two vectors.

ii. Vector product is also called cross product of vectors because cross sign is used to represent vector product.

iii. Explanation:

a. The vector product of two vectors \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\), is a third vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) and is written as, \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) × \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = AB sin θ \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) where, \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) is unit vector in direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\), i.e., perpendicular to plane containing two vectors. It is given by right handed screw rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 53
c. Examples of vector product:

1. Force experienced by a charge q moving with velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) in uniform magnetic field of induction (strength) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is given as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = q\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

2. Moment of a force or torque (\(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\)) is the vector product of the position vector (\(\vec{r}\)) and the force (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)).
i.e., \(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)

3. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\)) of a rotating particle is equal to the cross product of its angular velocity (\(\vec{\omega}\)) and its position (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)) from axis of rotation.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) × \(\vec{\omega}\)

Question 44.
State right handed screw rule.
Answer:
Statement of Right handed screw rule: Hold a right handed screw with its axis perpendicular to the plane containing vectors and the screw rotated from first vector to second vector through a small angle, the direction in which the screw tip would advance is the direction of the vector product of two vectors.

Question 45.
State the characteristics of the vector product (cross product) of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the vector product (cross product):
i. The vector product of two vectors does not obey the commutative law of multiplication.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 54
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 55
vi. The magnitude of cross product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram whose adjacent sides represent the two vectors.

Question 46.
Derive an expression for cross product of two vectors and express it in determinant form.
Answer:
Expression for cross product of two vectors:
i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 56
ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 57
iii. Determinant form of cross product of two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 58

Question 47.
Show that magnitude of vector product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram formed by the two
vectors.
Answer:
Suppose OACB is a parallelogram of adjacent sides, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 48.
Distinguish between scalar product (dot product) and vector product (cross product).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 61

Question 49.
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 8\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – m\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) find m if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction. Solution:
Since \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction, their corresponding components must be in the same proportion, i.e.,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 62

Question 50.
Find the scalar product of the two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{1}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{2}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 63
Answer: Scalar product of two given vectors is – 4.

Question 51.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\) = \(4 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) acting on a particle produces a displacement of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{S}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) where F is expressed in newton and s in metre. Find the work done by the force.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 64
Answer: The work done by the force is 41 J.

Question 52.
Find ‘a’ if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\mathbf{a} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are perpendicular to one another.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 65

Question 53.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(5 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) determine the angle between \(\) and \(\). Solution:
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 66

Question 54.
Find the angle between the vectors
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
Let angle between the vectors be θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 67
Answer: The angle between the vectors is 60°.

Question 55.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+7 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\vec{B}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\), find the component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 68

Question 56.
\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively. What is the magnitude and direction of the vector \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}\)? What are the components of a vector
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) along the directions of \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}})\) and \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}})\)? (NCERT)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 69
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 70

Question 57.
The angular momentum \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\), where \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) is a position vector and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) is linear momentum of a body.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 71
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 72

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 58.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}+\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}=\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find \(|\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}|\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 73

Question 59.
Find unit vectors perpendicular to the plane of the vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\) and
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Let required unit vector be \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 74
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 75

Question 60.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find the unit vector parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\). Also find the vector perpendicular to P and Q of magnitude 6 units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 76

Question 61.
Find the area of a triangle formed by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}-4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\boldsymbol{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) as adjacent sides measure in metre. Solution:
Given: Two adjacent sides of triangle,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-4 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}\)
To find: Area of triangle
Formula: Area of triangle =
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 77
Answer:
Area of the triangle is 6.1 m2.

Question 62.
Find the derivatives of the functions,
i. f(x) = x8
ii. f(x) = x3 + sin x
Solution:
i. Using \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}^{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{dx}}\) = nxn-1,
\(\frac{d\left(x^{8}\right)}{d x}\) = 8x7

ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 78

Question 63.
Find derivatives of e2x – tan x
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 79

Question 64.
Find the derivatives of the functions.
f(x) = x3 sin x
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 80

Question 65.
Find derivatives of \(\frac{d}{d x}(x \times \ln x)\)
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 81

Question 66.
Evaluate the following integrals.

i. \(\int x^{8} d x\)
Solution:
Using formula \(\int x^{n} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{n+1}}{n+1}\),
\(\int x^{8} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{9}}{9}\)

ii. \(\int_{2}^{5} x^{2} d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 82

iii) \(\int(x+\sin x) d x\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 83

iv) \(\int\left(\frac{10}{x}+e^{x}\right) d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 84

v) \(\int_{1}^{4}\left(x^{3}-x\right) d x\)
Answer:
Using,
f1(x) – f2(x) = \(\int f_{1}(x)-\int f_{2}(x)\)
Here,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 85

Question 67.
A man applies a force of 10 N on a garbage crate. If another man applies a force of 8 N on the same crate at an angle of 60° with respect to previous, then what will be the resultant force and direction of the crate, if crate is stationary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 86
Answer:
A resultant force of 15.62 N is applied on a crate at an angle of 26.56°.

Question 68.
A lady dropped her wallet in the parking lot of a super market. A boy picked the wallet up and ran towards the lady. He set off at 60° to the verge, heading towards the lady with a speed of 10 m s-1, as shown in the diagram.
Find the component of velocity of boy directly across the parking strip.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 87
Answer:
The angle between velocity vector and the direction of path is 60°.
∴ Component of velocity across the parking strip
= v × cos 60°
= 10-1 × cos 60°
= 5 m s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 69.
On an open ground, a biker follows a track that turns to his left by an angle of 60° after every 600 m. Starting from a given turn, specify the displacement of the biker at the third and sixth turn. Compare the magnitude of the displacement with the total path length covered by the motorist in each case.
Answer:
The path followed by the biker will be a closed hexagonal path. Suppose the motorist starts his journey from the point O.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 88
= 1200 m
= 1.2 km
∴ Total path length = \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}|\)
= 600 + 600 + 600
= 1800 m
= 1.8 km
The ratio of the magnitude of displacement to the total path-length = \(\frac{1.2}{1.8}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.67

ii. The motorist will take the sixth turn at O.
Displacement is zero.
path-length is = 3600 m or 3.6 km.
Ration of magnitude of displacement and path-length is zero.

Question 70.
What is the resultant of vectors shown in the figure below?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 89
Answer:
If number of vectors are represented by the various sides of a closed polygon taken in one order then, their resultant is always zero.

Question 71.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) is moving away from a point and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) is moving towards a point then, can their resultant be found using parallelogram law of vector addition?
Answer:
No. Resultant cannot be found by parallelogram law of vector addition because to apply law of parallelogram of vectors the two vectors and should either act towards a point or away from a point.

Question 72.
Which of the throwing is a vector?
(A) speed
(B) displacement
(C) mass
(D) time
Answer:
(B) displacement

Question 73.
The equation \(\vec{a}+\vec{a}=\vec{a}\) is
(A) meaningless
(B) always truc
(C) may he possible for limited values of a’
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)
Answer:
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)

Question 74.
The minimum number of numerically equal vectors whose vector sum can be zero is
(A) 4
(B) 3
(C) 2
(D) 1
Answer:
(C) 2

Question 75.
If \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}=\vec{A}-\vec{B}\) then vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be
(A) zero vector
(B) unit vector
(C) Non zero vector
(D) equal to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) zero vector

Question 76.
If \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), then,
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\)
(C) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|}{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\hat{\mathrm{n}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)

Question 77.
Two quantities of 5 and 12 unit when added gives a quantity 13 unit. This quantity is
(A) time
(B) mass
(C) linear momentum
(D) speed
Answer:
(C) linear momentum

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 78.
A force of 60 N acting perpendicular to a force of 80 N, magnitude of resultant force is
(A) 20N
(B) 70N
(C) 100 N
(D) 140 N
Answer:
(C) 100 N

Question 79.
A river is flowing at the rate of 6 km h-1. A man swims across it with a velocity of 9 km h-1. The resultant velocity of the man will be
(A) \(\sqrt{15} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{45} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{225} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)

Question 80.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and magnitudes of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) are 5, 4 and 3 unit respectively, then angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) sin-1 (3/4)
(B) cos-1 (4/5)
(C) tan-1 (5/3)
(D) cos-1 (3/5)
Answer:
(B) cos-1 (4/5)

Question 81.
If \(\vec{A}=\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}+3 \hat{k}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\), then the area of parallelogram formed from these vectors as the adjacent sides will be
(A) 2\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(B) 4\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(C) 6\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
Answer:
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units

Question 82.
A person moves from a point S and walks along the path which is a square of each side 50 m. He runs east, south, then west and finally north. Then the total displacement covered is
(A) 200m
(B) 100 m
(C) 50\(\sqrt{2}\) m
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 83.
The maximum value of magnitude of \((\vec{A}-\vec{B})\) is
(A) A – B
(B) A
(C) A + B
(D) \(\sqrt{\left(A^{2}+B^{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(C) A + B

Question 84.
The magnitude of the X and Y components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) are 7 and 6. Also the magnitudes of the X and Y components of \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}\) are 11 and 9 respectively. What is the magnitude of
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 8
(D)
Answer:
(A) 5

Question 85.
What is the maximum n Limber of components into which a force can be resolved?
(A) Two
(B) Three
(C) Four
(D) Any number
Answer:
(D) Any number

Question 86.
The resultant of two vectors of magnitude \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\) is also \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\). They act at an angle
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 120°
(D) 180°
Answer:
(C) 120°

Question 87.
The vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are such that \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and A2 + B2 = C2. Angle θ between positive directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
(B) 0
(C) π
(D) \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 88.
The expression \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}})\) is a
(A) unit vector
(B) null vector
(C) vector of magnitude \(\sqrt{2}\)
(D) scalar
Answer:
(A) unit vector

Question 89.
What is the angle between \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\)?
(A) 0°
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
(D) None of the above
Answer:
(D) None of the above

Question 90.
\((\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}})\) is a unit vector along X-axis. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(C) \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 91.
The magnitude of scalar product of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) is
(A) 20
(B) 22
(C) 26
(D) 29
Answer:
(C) 26

Question 92.
Three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) satisfy the relation \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = 0 and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) = 0, then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is parallel to
(A) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)
(B) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(D) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 93.
What vector must be added to the sum of two vectors \(2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) so that the resultant is a unit vector along Z axis?
(A) \(5 \hat{\hat{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)
(C) \(3 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}\)
(D) \(-3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)

Question 94.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=5 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+3 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\), then component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{38}\)
(B) \(\frac{28}{\sqrt{38}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{48}\)
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)

Question 95.
Choose the WRONG statement
(A) The division of vector by scalar is valid.
(B) The multiplication of vector by scalar is valid.
(C) The multiplication of vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
Answer:
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.

Question 96.
The resultant of two forces of 3 N and 4 N is 5 N, the angle between the forces is
(A) 30°
(B) 60°
(C) 90°
(D) 120°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 97.
The unit vector along \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 1.
What is a measurement? How is a measured quantity expressed?
Answer:

  1. A measurement is a comparison with an internationally accepted standard measuring unit.
  2. The measured quantity (M) is expressed in terms of a number (n) followed by a corresponding unit (u) i.e., M = nu.

Example:
Length of a wire when expressed as 2 m, it means the value of length is 2 in the unit of m (metre).

Question 2.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite. Different quantities are measured in different units.
Answer: True.
[Note: Choice of unit depends upon its suitability for measuring the magnitude of a physical quantity under consideration. Hence, we choose different scales for same physical quantity.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
Describe briefly different types of systems of units.
Answer:
System of units are classified mainly into four types:

  1. C.G.S. system:
    It stands for Centimetre-Gram-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in centimetre, gram and second respectively.
  2. M.K.S. system:
    It stands for Metre-Kilogram-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in metre, kilogram and second respectively.
  3. F.P.S. system:
    It stands for Foot-Pound-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in foot, pound and second respectively.
  4. S.I. system:
    It stands for System International. This system has replaced all other systems mentioned above. It has been internationally accepted and is being used all over world. As the SI units use decimal system, conversion within the system is very simple and convenient.

Question 4.
What are fundamental quantities? State two examples of fundamental quantities. Write their S.J. and C.G.S. units.
Answer:
Fundamental quantities:
The physical quantities which do not depend on any other physical quantity for their measurements i.e., they can be directly measured are called fundamental quantities.
Examples: mass, length etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 1

Question 5.
What are fundamental units? State the S.l. units of seven fundamental quantities.
Answer:
Fundamental units:
The units used to measure fundamental quantities are called fundamental units.
S.I. Units of fundamental quantities:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 2

Question 6.
State and describe the two supplementary units.
Answer:
The two supplementary units are:
i) Plane angle (dθ):
a. The ratio of kngth of arc (ds) of an circle to the radius (r) of the circle is called as Plane angle (dθ)
i.e., dθ = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 3
b. Thus, dθ is angle subtended by the arc at the centre of the circle.
c. Unit: radian (rad)
d. Denoted as θc
e. Length of arc of circle = Circumference of circle = 2πr.
∴ plane angle subtended by entire circle at its centre is θ = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = 2πc

ii) Solid angle (dΩ):
a. solid angle is 3-dimensional analogue of plane angle.
b. Solid angle is defined as area of a portion of surface of a sphere to the square of radius of the sphere.
i.e., dΩ = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 4
c. Unit: Steradian (sr)
d. Denoted as (Ω)
e. Surface area of sphere = 4πr2
∴ solid angle subtended by entire sphere at its centre is Ω = \(\frac{4 \pi r^{2}}{r^{2}}\) = 4π sr

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 7.
Derive the relation between radian and degree. Also find out 1” and 1’ in terms of their respective values in radian. (Take π = 3.1416)
Answer:
We know that, 2 πc = 360°
∴ πc = 180°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 5

Question 8.
What are derived quantities and derived units? State two examples. State the corresponding S.L. and C.G.S. units of the examples.
Answer:

  1. Derived quantities: Physical qUantities other than fundamental quantities which depend on one or more fundamental quantities for their measurements are called derived quantities.
  2. Derived units: The units of derived quantities which are expressed in terms of fundamental units for their measurements are called derived units.
  3. Examples and units:
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 6

Question 9.
Classify the following quantities into fundamental and derived quantities: Length, Velocity, Area, Electric current, Acceleration, Time, Force, Momentum, Energy, Temperature, Mass, Pressure, Magnetic induction, Density.
Answer:
Fundamental Quantities: Length, Electric current, Time, Temperature, Mass.

Derived Quantities: Velocity, Area, Acceleration, Force, Momentum, Energy. Pressure, Magnetic induction, Density

Question 10.
Classify the following units into fundamental, supplementary and derived units:
newton, metre, candela, radian, hertz. square metre, tesla, ampere, kelvin, volt, mol, coulomb, farad, steradian.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 7

Question 11.
List the conventions followed while using SI units.
Answer:
Following conventions should be followed while writing S.I. units of physical quantities:

  1. Unit of every physical quantity should be represented by its symbol.
  2. Full name of a unit always starts with smaller letter even if it is named after a person, eg.: 1 newton, 1 joule, etc. But symbol for unit named after a person should be in capital letter, eg.: N after scientist Newton, J after scientist Joule, etc.
  3. Symbols for units do not take plural form.
  4. Symbols for units do not contain any full stops at the end of recommended letter.
  5. The units of physical quantities in numerator and denominator should be written as one ratio. For example the SI unit of acceleration is m/s2 or m s-2 but not m/s/s.
  6. Use of combination of units and symbols for units is avoided when physical quantity is expressed by combination of two. For example, The unit J/kg K is correct while joule/kg K is not correct.
  7. A prefix symbol is used before the symbol of the unit.
    • a. Prefix symbol and symbol of unit constitute a new symbol for the unit which can be raised to a positive or negative power of 10.
      For example,
      1 ms = 1 millisecond = 10-3 s
      1 μs = 1 microsecond = 10-6 s
      1 ns = 1 nanosecond = 10-9 s
    • b. Use of double prefixes is avoided when single prefix is available
      10-6 s = 1 μs and not 1 mms
      10-9 s = 1 ns and not 1 mμs
  8. Space or hyphen must be introduced while indicating multiplication of two units e.g., m/s should be written as m s-1 or m-s-1.

Solved Examples

Question 12.
What is the solid angle subtended by the moon at any point of the Earth, given the diameter of the moon is 3474 km and its distance from the Earth 3.84 × 108 m?
Solution:
Given: Diameter (D) = 3474 km
∴ Radius of moon (R) = 1737 km
= 1.737 × 106 m
Distance from Earth r = 3.84 × 108 m
To find: Solid angle (dΩ)
Formula: dΩ = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Calculation:
From formula,
dΩ = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{R}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) ……..( cross-sectional area of disc of moon = πR2)
dΩ = \(\frac{\pi \times\left(1.737 \times 10^{5}\right)^{2}}{\left(3.84 \times 10^{8}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{3.412 \times(1.737)^{2} \times 10^{10}}{(3.84)^{2} \times 10^{16}}\)
= antilog{log(3.142) + 2log(1.737) – 2log(3.84)} × 10-6
= antilog {0.4972 + 2(0.2397) – 2(0.5843)} × 10-6
= antilog{0.4972 + 0.4794 – 1.1686} × 10-6
= antilog{\(\overline{1}\) .8080} × 10-6
= 6.428 × 10-1 × 10-6
= 6.43 × 10-5 sr
Solid angle subtended by moon at Earth is 6.43 × 10-5 sr
[Note: Above answer is obtained substituting value of r as 3.142]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
Pluto has mean diameter of 2,300 km and very eccentric orbit (oval shaped) around the Sun, with a perihelion (nearest) distance of 4.4 × 109 km and an aphelion (farthest) distance of 7.3 × 109 km. What are the respective solid angles subtended by Pluto from Earth’s perspective? Assume that distance from the Sun can be neglected.
Solution:
Given: Radius of Pluto. R = \(\frac{2300}{2}\) km
= 1150km
Perihelion distance rp = 4.4 × 109 km
Aphelion distance ra = 7.3 × 109 km
To find: Solid angles (dΩp and dΩa)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 8
Solid angle at perihelion distance is 2.146 × 10-13 sr and at aphelion distance is 7.798 × 10-14 sr.

Question 14.
Define a metre.
Answer:
The metre is the length of the path travelled by light in vacuum during a time interval of 1/299, 792, 458 of a second.
Answer:

Question 15.
What ¡s parallax?
Answer:

  1. Parallax is defined as the apparent change in position of an object due to a change in position of an observer.
  2. Explanation: When a pencil is held in front of our eyes and we look at it once with our left eye closed and then with our right eye closed, pencil appears to move against the background. This effect is called parallax effect.

Question 16.
What is parallax angle?
Answer:
i) Angle between the two directions along which a star or planet is viewed at the two points of observation is called parallax angle (parallactic angle).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 9
ii) It is given by θ = \(\frac{b}{D}\)
where, b = Separation between two points of observation.
D = Distance of source from any point of observation.

Question 17.
Explain the method to determine distance of a planet from the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Parallax method is used to determine distance of different planets from the Earth.
  2. To measure the distance ‘D’ of a far distant planet S, select two different observatories (E1 and E2).
  3. The planet should be visible from E1 and E2 observatories simultaneously i.e. at the same time.
  4. E1 and E2 are separated by distance ‘b’ shown in figure.
    ∴ E1E3 = b
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 10
  5. The angle between the two directions along which the planet is viewed, can be measured. It is parallax angle, which in this case is L ∠E1E2 = θ
  6. The planet is far away from the (Earth) observers, hence
    b < <D
    ∴ \(\frac{b}{D}\) < < 1 and ‘θ’ is also very small.
    Hence, E1E2 can be considered as arc of length b of circle with S as centre and D as radius.
    :. E1S = E2S = D
    ∴ θ = \(\frac{b}{D}\) . . . .(θ is taken in radian)
    ∴ D = \(\frac{b}{\theta}\)
    Thus, the distance ‘D’ of a far away planet ‘S’ can be determined using the parallax method.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 18.
Explain how parallax method is used to measure distance of a star from Earth.
Answer:

  1. The parallax measured from two farthest distance points on Earth for stars will be too small and hence cannot be measured.
  2. Instead, parallax between two farthest points (i.e., 2 ΔU apart) along the orbit of Earth around the Sun (s) is measured.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 11

Question 19.
Explain how size of a planet or star is measured.
Answer:

  1. To determine the diameter (d) of a planet or star, two diametrically opposite points of the planet are viewed from the same observatory.
  2. If d is diameter of planet or star, angle subtended by it at any single point on the Earth is called angular diameter of planet.
  3. Let angle α be angle between these two directions.
  4. If distance between the Earth and planet or star (D) is known, α = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{D}}\)
  5. This relation gives, d = α D
    Thus, diameter (d) of planet or star can be determined.

Question 20.
Name the devices used to measure very small distances such as atomic size.
Answer:
Devices used are:
Electron microscope, tunnelling electron microscope.

Question 21.
Just as large distances are measured in AU, parsec or light year, atomic or nuclear distances are measured with the help of microscopic units. Match the units given in column A with their corresponding SI unit given in column B.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 39
Answer:
i. – (b)
ii. – (a)

Solved Examples

Question 22.
A star is 5.5 light years away from the Earth. How much parallax in arcsec will it subtend when viewed from two opposite points along the orbit of the Earth?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 12
Solution:
Two opposite points-A and B along the orbit of the Earth are 2 AU apart. The angle subtended by AB at the position of the star is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 13
= antilog{log(2.992) – log(5.5) – log(9.46)} × 10-4
= antilog {0.4761 – 0.7404 – 0.9759} × 10-4
= antilog {\(\overline{2}\).7598} × 10-4
= 5.751 × 10-2 × 10-4
= 5.75 × 10-6
= 5.75 × 10-6 rad
= 5.75 × 10-6 × 57.297 × 60 × 60 arcsec
…. (converting radian into arcsecond)
= 1.186 arcsec
Parallax is 1.186 arcsec

Question 23.
The moon is at a distance of 3.84 × 108 m from the Earth. If viewed from two diametrically opposite points on the Earth, the angle subtended at the moon is 1° 54′. What is the diameter of the Earth?
Solution:
Given
Distance (D) = 3.84 × 108 m
Subtended angle (α)
= 1° 54′ = (60’+ 54′)= 114′
= 114 × 2.91 × 10-4 rad
= 3.317 × 10-2 rad
To find: Diameter of Earth (d)
Formula: d = αD
Calculation: From formula,
d = 3.317 × 10-2 × 3.84 × 108
= 1.274 × 107 m
Diameter of Earth is 1.274 × 107 m.

Question 24.
Explain the method to measure mass.
Answer:
Method for measurement of mass:

  1. Mass, until recently, was measured with a standard mass of the international prototype of the kilogram (a platinum-iridium alloy cylinder) kept at international Bureau of Weights and Measures, at Serves, near Paris, France.
  2. As platinum – iridium piece was seen to pick up microparticles and found to be affected by atmosphere, its mass could no longer be treated as constant.
  3. Hence, a new definition of mass was introduced in terms of electric current on 20th May 2019.
  4. Now, one kilogram mass is described in terms of amount of current which has to be passed through electromagnet to pull one side of extremely sensitive balance to balance the other side which holds one standard kg mass.
  5. To measure mass of small entities such as atoms and nucleus, atomic mass unit (amu) is used.
    It is defined as (\(\frac{1}{12}\))th mass of an unexcited atom of carbon -12(C12).
    1 amu ≈ 1.66 × 10-27 kg.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 25.
That can he the reason for choosing Carbon-12 to define atomic mass unit?
Answer:

  1. Unlike oxygen and hydrogen, which exhibit various isotopes in higher proportions, carbon- 12 is the single most abundant (98% of available carbon) isotope of carbon.
  2. it is also very stable.
    Hence, it makes more accurate unit of measuring mass and is used to define atomic mass unit.

Question 26.
Define mean solar day. Explain the method for measurement of time.
Answer:

  1. A mean solar day is the average time interval from one noon to the next noon.
    Method for measurement of time:
  2. The unit of time, the second, was considered to be \(\frac{1}{86400}\) of the mean solar day, where a mean solar day = 24 hours
    = 24 × 60 × 60
    = 86400 s
  3. However, this definition proved to be unsatisfactory to define the unit of time precisely because solar day varies gradually due to gradual slowing down of the Earth’s rotation. Hence, the definition of second was replaced by one based on atomic standard of time.
  4. Atomic standard of time is now used for the measurement of time. In atomic standard of time, periodic vibrations of caesium atom is used.
  5. One second is time required for 9,192.631,770 vibrations of the radiation corresponding to transition between two hyperfine energy states of caesium-133 (Cs- 133) atom.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 27.
Define dimensions and dimensional formula of physical quantities. Give few examples of dimensional formula.
Answer:

  1. Dimensions:
    The dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to which the fundamental units must be raised in order to obtain the unit of a given physical quantity.
  2. Dimensional formula:
    When any derived quantity is represented with appropriate powers of symbols of the fundamental quantities, SUCh an expression is called dimensional formula.
    It is expressed by square bracket with no comma in between the symbols.
  3. Examples of dimensional formula:
    a. Speed = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { time }}\)
    ∴ Dimensions of speed = \(\frac{[\mathrm{L}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = [L1M0T-1]
    [Note: As power of M is zero, it can be omitted from dimensional formula. Therefore, dimensions of speed can be written as [L1T1]
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 14

Question 28.
A book with many printing errors contains four different formulae for the displacement y of a particle undergoing a certain periodic function:
i) y = a sin \(\frac{2 \pi t}{T}\)
ii) y = a sin v t
iii) y = \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathbf{T}} \sin \frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
iv) y = \(\frac{a}{\sqrt{2}}\left[\sin \frac{2 \pi t}{T}+\cos \frac{2 \pi t}{T}\right]\)
Here, a is maximum displacement of particle, y ¡s speed of particle, T is time period of motion. Rule out the wrong formulae on dimensional grounds.
Answer:
The argument of trigonometrical function, i.e., angle is dimensionless. Now,
i) The argument, \(\left[\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = 1 = [L0M0T0]
which is a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (i) is correct.

ii) The argument,
[vt] = [LT-1] [T] = [L] = [L1M0T0]
which is not a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (ii) is incorrect.

iii) The argument,
\(\left[\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{a}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{L}]}\) = [L-1M0T1]
which is not a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (iii) is incorrect.

iv) The argument,
\(\left[\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = 1 = [L0M0T0]
which is a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (iv) is correct.

Question 29.
State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
Answer:
Principle of homogeneity of dimensions: The dimensions of all the terms on the two sides of a physical equation relating different physical quantities must be same.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 30.
State the uses of dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Uses of dimensional analysis:

To check the correctness of a physical equation.
Correctness of a physical equation by dimensional analysis:

  1. A physical equation is correct only if the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of that equations are the same.
  2. For example, consider the equation of motion.
    v = u + at ……………. (1)
  3. Writing the dimensional formula of every term, we get
    Dimensions of LH.S. [v] [L1M0T-1],
    Dimensions of R.H.S. = [u] + [at]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-2] [L1M0T-1]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-1]
    ⇒ [L.HS.] = [R.H.S.]
  4. As dimensions of both side of equation is same, physical equation is dimensionally correct.

To derive the relationship between related physical quantities.
Expression for time period of a simple pendulum by dimensional analysis:

  1. Time period (T) of a simple pendulum depends upon length (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g) as follows:
    T ∝ la gb
    i.e., T = k la gb ………… (1)
    where, k = proportionality constant, which is dimensionless.
  2. The dimensions of T = [L0M0T1)
    The dimensions of l = [L1M0T0]
    The dimensions of g = [L1M0T2]
    Taking dimensions on both sides of equation (1),
    [L0M0T1] = [L1M0T0]a [L1M0T-2]b
    [L0M0T1] = [La+bM0T-2b]
  3. Equating corresponding power of L, M and T on both sides, we get
    a + b = 0 …………. (2)
    and -2b = 1
    ∴ b = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
  4. Substituting ‘b’ in equation (2), we get
    a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  5. Substituting values of a and b in equation (1),
    we have,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 15
  6. Experimentally, it ¡s found that k = 2π
    ∴ T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
    This is the required expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

To find the conversion factor between the units of the same physical quantity in two different systems of units.
Conversion factor between units of same physical quantity:

  1. let ‘n’ be the conversion factor between the units of work.
    ∴ 1 J = n erg ………….. (1)
  2. Dimensions of work in S.l. system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{\prime} \mathrm{T}_{1}^{-2}\right]\) and in CGS system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
  3. From (1),
    \(1\left[\mathrm{~L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{1}^{-2}\right]=\mathrm{n}\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 16
    n= 104 × 103 × 1 = 107
    Hence, the conversion factor, n = 107
    There fore, from equation (1), we have,
    ∴ 1 J = 107 erg.

Question 31.
Explain the use of dimensional analysis to check the correctness of a physical equation.
Answer:
Correctness of a physical equation by dimensional analysis:

  1. A physical equation is correct only if the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of that equations are the same.
  2. For example, consider the equation of motion.
    v = u + at ……………. (1)
  3. Writing the dimensional formula of every term, we get
    Dimensions of LH.S. [v] [L1M0T-1],
    Dimensions of R.H.S. = [u] + [at]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-2] [L1M0T-1]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-1]
    ⇒ [L.HS.] = [R.H.S.]
  4. As dimensions of both side of equation is same, physical equation is dimensionally correct.

Question 32.
Time period of a simple pendulum depends upon the length of pendulum (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g). Using dimensional analysis, obtain an expression for time period of a simple pendulum.
Answer:
Expression for time period of a simple pendulum by dimensional analysis:
i) Time period (T) of a simple pendulum depends upon length (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g) as follows:
T ∝ la gb
i.e., T = k la gb ………… (1)
where, k = proportionality constant, which is dimensionless.

ii) The dimensions of T = [L0M0T1)
The dimensions of l = [L1M0T0]
The dimensions of g = [L1M0T2]
Taking dimensions on both sides of equation (1),
[L0M0T1] = [L1M0T0]a [L1M0T-2]b
[L0M0T1] = [La+bM0T-2b]

iii) Equating corresponding power of L, M and T
on both sides, we get
a + b = 0 …………. (2)
and -2b = 1
∴ b = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)

iv) Substituting ‘b’ in equation (2), we get
a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

v) Substituting values of a and b in equation (1),
we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 15

vi) Experimentally, it ¡s found that k = 2π
∴ T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
This is the required expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

Question 33.
Find the conversion factor between the S.I. and the C.OES. units of work using dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Conversion factor between units of same physical quantity:

  1. let ‘n’ be the conversion factor between the units of work.
    ∴ 1 J = n erg ………….. (1)
  2. Dimensions of work in S.l. system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{\prime} \mathrm{T}_{1}^{-2}\right]\) and in CGS system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
  3. From (1),
    \(1\left[\mathrm{~L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{1}^{-2}\right]=\mathrm{n}\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 16
    n= 104 × 103 × 1 = 107
    Hence, the conversion factor, n = 107
    There fore, from equation (1), we have,
    ∴ 1 J = 107 erg.

Question 34.
State the limitations of dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Limitations of dimensional analysis:

  • The value of dimensionless constant can be obtained with the help of experiments only.
  • Dimensional analysis cannot be used to derive relations involving trigonometric (sin θ, cos θ, etc.), exponential (ex, ex2, etc.), and logarithmic functions (log x, log x3, etc) as these quantities are dimensionless.
  • This method is not useful if constant of proportionality is not a dimensionless quantity.
  • If the correct equation contains some more terms of the same dimension, it is not possible to know about their presence using dimensional equation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 35.
If two quantities have same dimensions, do they always represent the same physical content?
Answer:
When dimensions of two quantities are same, they do not always represent the same physical content.
Example:
Force and momentum both have same dimensions but they represent different physical content.

Question 36.
A dimensionally correct equation need not actually be a correct equation but dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong. Justify.
Answer:
i) To justify a dimensionally correct equation need not be actually a correct equation, consider equation, v2 = 2as
Dimensions of L.H.S. = [v2] = [L2M0T2]
Dimensions of R.H.S. = [as]= [L2M0T2]
⇒ [L.H.S.] = [R.H.S.]
This implies equation v2 = 2as is dimensionally correct.
But actual equation is, v2 = u2 + 2as
This confirms a dimensionally correct equation need not be actually a correct equation.

ii) To justify dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong, consider the formula,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv = mgh
Dimensions of L.H.S. = [mv] = [L1M1T-1]
Dimensions of R.H.S. = [mgh] = [L2M1T-2]
Since the dimensions of R.H.S. and L.H.S. are not equal, the formula given by equation must be incorrect.
This confirms dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong.

Question 37.
State, whether all constants are dimensionless or unitless.
Answer:
All constants need not be dimensionless or unitless.
Planck’s constant, gravitational constant etc., possess dimensions and units. They are dimensional constants.

Solved Examples

Question 38.
If length ‘L’, force ‘F’ and time ‘T’ are taken as fundamental quantities, what would be the dimensional equation of mass and density?
Solution:
i) Force = Mass × Acceleration Force
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 17
∴ Dimensional equation of mass
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 18
= [F1L-4T2]

i) The dimensional equation of mass is [F1L-1T2].
ii) The dimensional equation of density is [F1L-4T2].

Question 39.
A calorie is a unit of heat and it equals 4.2 J, where 1 J = kg m2 s-2. A distant civilisation employs a system of units in which the units of mass, length and time are α kg, β m and δ s. Also J’ is their unit of energy. What will be the magnitude of calorie in their units?
Solution:
1 cal = 4.2 kg m2 s-2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 19
New unit of energy is J’
Dimensional formula of energy is [L2M1T-2] According to the question,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 20

Question 40.
Assume that the speed (v) of sound in air depends upon the pressure (P) and density (ρ) of air, then use dimensional analysis to obtain an expression for the speed of sound.
Solution:
It is given that speed (v) of sound in air depends upon the pressure (P) and density (ρ) of the air.
Hence, we can write, v = k Pa ρb ……….. (1)
where, k is a dimensionless constant and a and b are powers to be determined.
Dimensions of y = [L1M0T-1]
Dimensions of P = [L-1M1T-2]
Dimensions of ρ = [L-3M1T0]
Substituting the dimensions of the quantities on both sides of equation (1),
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-1M1T-2]a [L-3M1T0]b
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-aMaT-2a] [L-3bMbT0]
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-a-3bMa+bT-2a]
Comparing the powers of L, M and T on both sides, we get,
-2a = -1
∴ a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Also, a + b = O
∴ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + b = 0 b = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Substituting values of a and b in equation (1), we get
y = k P\(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ–\(\frac{1}{2}\)
∴ v = k \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{p}}{\rho}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 41.
Density of oil is 0.8 g cm3 in C.G.S. unit. Find its value in S.I. units.
Solution:
Dimensions of density is [L-3M1T0]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 21
= 0.8 [10-3] [10-2]-3
= 0.8 [10-3] [10]6
n = 0.8 × 103
Substituting the value of ‘n’ in equation (1).
we get, 0.8 g cm3 = 0.8 × 103 kg m-3.
Density of oil in S.l unit is 0.8 × 103 kg m-3.

Question 42.
The value of G in C.G.S system is 6.67 × 10-8 dyne cm2 g-2. Calculate its value in S.l. system.
Solution:
Dimensional formula of gravitational constant
[L3M-1T-2]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 22
n = 6.67 × 10-8 × 10-6 × 103
n = 6.67 × 10-11
From equation (1),
6.67 × 10-8 dyne cm2 g-2
= 6.67 × 10-11 N-m2 kg-2
Value ofG in S.l. system is 6.67 × 10-11 N-m2 kg-2.

Question 43.
What is accuracy?
Answer:
Accuracy is how close a measurement is to the actual value of that quantity.

Question 44.
What is precision?
Answer:
Precision is a measure of how consistently a device records nearly identical values i.e., reproducible results.

Question 45.
A scale in a lab measures the mass of object consistently more by 500 g than their actual mass. How would you describe the scale in terms of accuracy and precision?
Answer:
The scale is precise but not accurate.
Explanation: Precision measures how consistently a device records the same answer; even though it displays the wrong value. Hence, the scale is precise.

Accuracy is how well a device measures something against its accepted value. As scale in the lab is always off by 500 g, it is not accurate.
[Note: The goal of the observer should be to get accurate as well as precise measurements.]

Question 46.
List reasons that may introduce possible uncertainties in an observation.
Answer:
Possible uncertainties in an observation may arise due to following reasons:

  1. Quality of instrument used,
  2. Skill of the person doing the experiment,
  3. The method used for measurement,
  4. External or internal factors affecting the result of the experiment.

Question 47.
What is systematic error? Classify errors into different categories.
Answer:

  1. Systematic errors are errors that are not determined by chance but are introduced by an inaccuracy (involving either the observation or measurement process) inherent to the system.
  2. Classification of errors:
    Errors are classified into following two groups:
  3. Systematic errors:
    • Instrumental error (constant error),
    • Error due to imperfection in experimental technique,
    • Personal error (human error).
  4. Random error (accidental error)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 48.
What is instrumental (constant) error?
Answer:
Instrumental error:

  1. It arises due to defective calibration of an instrument.
  2. Example: If a thermometer is not graduated properly, i.e., one degree on the thermometer actually corresponds to 0.99°, the temperature measured by such a thermometer will differ from its value by a constant amount.

Question 49.
What is error due to imperfection in experimental technique?
Answer:
Error due to imperfection in experimental technique:

  • The errors which occur due to defective setting of an instrument is called error due to imperfection in experimental technique.
  • For example the measured volume of a liquid in a graduated tube will be inaccurate if the tube is not held vertical.

Question 50.
What is personal error?
Answer:
Personal error (Human error):

  • The errors introduced due to fault of an observer taking readings are called personal errors.
  • For example, while measuring the length of an object with a ruler, it is necessary to look at the ruler from directly above. If the observer looks at it from an angle, the measured length will be wrong due to parallax.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 51.
What is random error (accidental)?
Answer:

  1. Random error (accidental):
    The errors which are caused due to minute change in experimental conditions like temperature, pressure change in gas or fluctuation in voltage, while the experiment is being performed are called random errors.
  2. They can be positive or negative.
  3. Random error cannot be eliminated completely but can be minimized by taking multiple observations and calculating their mean.

Question 52.
State general methods to minimise effect of systematic errors.
Answer:
Methods to minimise effect of systematic errors:

  1. By using correct instrument.
  2. Following proper experimental procedure.
  3. Removing personal error.

Question 53.
Define the term:
Arithmetic mean
Answer:
Arithmetic mean:
a. The most probable value of a large number of readings of a quantity is called the arithmetic mean value of the quantity. This value can be considered to be true value of the quantity.

b. If a1, a2, a3, …………… an are ‘n’ number of readings taken for measurement of a quantity, then their mean value is given by,
amean = \(\frac{a_{1}+a_{2}+\ldots \ldots .+a_{n}}{n}\)
∴ amean = \(\frac{1}{n} \sum_{i=1}^{n} a_{i}\)

Question 54.
What does a = amean ± ∆amean signify?
Answer:
a = amean ± ∆ amean signifies that the actual value of a lies between (amean – ∆ amean) and (amean + ∆ amean).

Question 55.
What is meant by the term combination of errors?
Answer:
Derived quantities may get errors due to individual errors of fundamental quantities, such type of errors are called as combined errors.

Question 56.
Explain errors in sum and in difference of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors in sum and in difference:
i) Suppose two physical quantities A and B have measured values A ± ∆A and B ± ∆B. respectively, where ∆A and ∆B are their mean absolute errors.

ii) Then, the absolute error ∆Z in their sum.
Z = A + B
Z ± ∆Z = (A ± ∆A) + (B ± ∆B)
= (A + B) ± ∆A ± ∆B
∴ ± ∆Z = ± ∆A ± ∆B.

iii) For difference. i.e.. if Z = A – B.
Z ± ∆Z = A ± ∆A) – (B ± ∆B)
= (A – B) ± ∆A ∓ ∆B
∴ ± ∆Z = ± ∆A ∓ ∆B,

iv) There are four possible values for ∆Z. namely (+∆A – ∆B), (+∆A + ∆B), (-∆A -∆B), (-∆A + ∆B). Hence, maximLim value of absolute error is ∆Z = (∆A+ ∆B) in both the cases.

v) Thus. when two quantities are added or subtracted, the absolute error in the final result is the sum of the absolute errors in the individual quantities.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 57.
Explain errors in product of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors in product:
i) Suppose Z = AB and measured values of A and B are (A ± ∆A) and (B ± ∆B) then,
Z ± ∆Z = (A ± ∆A) (B ± ∆B)
= AB ± A∆B ± B∆A ± ∆A∆B
Dividing L.H.S by Z and R.H.S. by AB we get
\(\left(1 \pm \frac{\Delta Z}{Z}\right)=\left[1 \pm \frac{\Delta B}{B} \pm \frac{\Delta A}{A} \pm\left(\frac{\Delta A}{A}\right)\left(\frac{\Delta B}{B}\right)\right]\)
Since ∆A/A and ∆B/B are very small, product is neglected. Hence, maximum relative error in Z is \(\frac{\Delta Z}{Z}=\frac{\Delta A}{A}+\frac{\Delta B}{B}\)

ii) Thus, when two quantities are multiplied, the maximum relative error in the result is the sum of relative errors in each quantity.

Question 58.
Explain errors due to power (index) of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors due to the power (index) of measured quantity:

  1. Suppose
    Z = A3 = A × A × A
    then, \(\)
  2. Hence the relative error in Z = A3 is three times the relative error in A.
  3. This means if Z = An
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 23
  4. This implies, the quantity in the formula which has large power is responsible for maximum error.

Question 59.
The radius of a sphere measured repeatedly yields values 5.63 m, 5.54 m, 5.44 m, 5.40 m and 5.35 m. Determine the most probable value of radius and the mean absolute, relative and percentage errors.
Solution:
Given: a1 = 5.63 m, a2 = 5.54 m, a3 = 5.44 m
a4 = 5.40 m, a5 = 5.35 m,
To find:
i) Most probable value (Mean value)
ii) Mean absolute error
iii) Relative error
iv) Percentage error
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 24
From formula (ii),
Absolute errors:
∆a1 = |amean – a1| = |5.472 – 5.63| = 0.158
∆a2 = |amean – a2| = |5.472 – 5.54| = 0.068
∆a3 = |amean – a3| = |5.472 – 5.44| = 0.032
∆a4 = |amean – a4| = |5.472 – 5.40| = 0.072
∆a5 = |amean – a5| = |5.472 – 5.35| = 0.122

From formula (ii),
∆amean = \(\frac{0.158+0.068+0.032+0.072+0.122}{5}\)
= \(\frac{0.452}{5}\)
= 0.0904 m
From formula (iii),
Relative error = \(\frac{0.0904}{5.472}\)
= 1.652 × 10-2
(after rounding off to correct significant digits)
= 1.66 × 10-2
= 0.0166
∴ Percentage error = 1.66 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.66%
i) The mean value is 5.472 m.
ii) The mean absolute error is 0.0904 m.
iii) The relative error is 0.0166.
iv) The percentage error is 1.66%
[Note: Answer to relative error is rounded off using rules of significant figures and of rounding off]

Question 60.
Lin an experiment to determine the volume of an object, mass and density are recorded as m = (5 ± 0.15) kg and p = (5 ± 0.2) kg m3 respectively. Calculate percentage error in the measurement of volume.
Solulion:
Given: M = 5kg, ∆M = 0.15 kg, ρ = 5 kg/m3,
∆ρ = 0.2 kg/m3
To find: Percentage error in volume (V)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 25
The percentage error in the determination of volume is 7%.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 61.
The acceleration due to gravity is determined by using a simple pendulum of length l = (100 ± 0.1) cm. If its time period is T = (2 ± 0.01) s, find the maximum percentage error in the measurement of g.
Solution:
Given: ∆l = 0.1 cm, l = 100 cm, ∆T = 0.01 s,
T = 2s
To find: Percentage error
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 26
Percentage error in measurement of g is 1.1 %.

Question 62.
Find the number of significant figures in the following numbers,
i. 25.42
ii. 0.004567
iii. 35.320
iv. 91.000
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 27

Solved Examples

Question 63.
Add 7.21, 12.141 and 0.0028 and express the result to an appropriate number of significant figures.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 28
In the given problem, minimum number of digits after decimal is 2.
∴ Result will be rounded off upto two places of decimal.
Corrected rounded off sum is 19.35.

Question 64.
The mass of a box measured by a grocer’s balance is 2.3 kg. Two gold pieces of masses 20.15 g and 20.17 g are added to the box. What is (i) the total mass of the box? (ii) the difference in the masses of the pieces to correct significant figures?
Solution:
i) Total mass of the box
= (2.3+ 0.02017 + 0.02015) kg
= 2.34032 kg
Since, the last number of significant figure is 2, therefore, the total mass of the box = 2.3 kg

ii) Difference of mass = (20.17 – 20.15) = 0.02g Since, there are two significant figures so the difference in masses to the correct significant figures is 0.02 g.

i) The total mass of the box to correct significant figures is 2.3 kg.
ii) The difference in the masses to correct significant figures is 0.02 g.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 65.
Write the dimensions of a and b in the relation
E = \(\frac{b-x^{2}}{a}\)
Where E is energy, x ¡s distance and t is time.
Answer:
The given relation is E = \(\frac{b-x^{2}}{a}\)
As x is subtracted from b,
∴ dimensions of b are x2;
i.e., b = [L2]
∴ We can write equation as E = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
Or a = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\left[\mathrm{~L}^{2} \mathrm{MT}^{-2}\right]}\) = [L0M-1T2]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 66.
What is the difference between 6.0 and 6.00? which Is more accurate?
Answer:
6.0 indicates the measurement is correct up to first decimal place, whereas 6.00 indicates that the measurement is correct up to second decimal place. Thus, 6.00 is a more accurate value than 6.0.

Question 67.
A child walking on a footpath notices that the width of the footpath is uneven. He reported this to his school principal and the complaint was forwarded to the municipal officer.
i. What is the possible error encountered?
ii. What is the relative error in width of footpath if width of footpath in 10 m length are noted as 5 m, 5.5 m, 5 m, 6 m and 4.5 m?
Answer:
i) The error encountered is personal error.

ii) Mean value of widths
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 29
The relative error in width of footpath is 0.084.

Question 68.
A factory owner kept five identical spheres between two wooden blocks on a ruler as shown in figure. He called all his workers and told them to take reading, to check their efficiency and knowledge.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 30
i. What is the area of central sphere?
ii. What is the absolute error in reading of diameter of second sphere?
Answer:
i) From above diagram radius of central sphere is
r = 1 cm
∴ Area = πr2 = 3.142 × (1)2= 3.142 cm2
The area of central sphere is 3.142 cm2.

ii) Mean value of all reading of diameters
dmean = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}_{1}+\mathrm{d}_{2}+\mathrm{d}_{3}+\mathrm{d}_{4}+\mathrm{d}_{5}}{5}=\frac{2+2+2+2+2}{5}\)
= \(\frac{10}{5}\) = 2 cm
Absolute error in reading of second sphere.
∆d2 = |dmean – d2| = 2 – 2 = 0
The absolute error in reading of diameter of second sphere is zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 69.
A potential difference of V = 100 ± 2 volt, when applied across a resistance R gives a current of 10 ± 0.5 ampere. Calculate percentage error in R given by R V/I.
Answer:
Here. V = 100 ± 2 volt and I = 10 ± 0.5 ampere
Expressing limits of error as percentage error,
We have
V = 100 volt ± \(\frac{2}{100}\) × 100% = 10 volt ± 2%
and I = 10 ampere ± \(\frac{0.5}{10}\) × 100%
= 10 ampere ± 5%
∴ R = \(\frac{V}{I}\)
∴ %error in R = %error in V + %error in I
= 2% + 5% = 7%

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 31
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 32

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
A physical quantity may be defined as
(A) the one having dimension.
(B) that which is immeasurable.
(C) that which has weight.
(D) that which has mass.
Answer:
(A) the one having dimension.

Question 2.
Which of the following is the fundamental unit?
(A) Length, force, time
(B) Length, mass, time
(C) Mass, volume, height
(D) Mass, velocity, pressure
Answer:
(B) Length, mass, time

Question 3.
Which of the following is NOT a fundamental quantity?
(A) Temperature
(B) Electric charge
(C) Mass
(D) Electric current
Answer:
(B) Electric charge

Question 4.
The distance of the planet from the earth is measured by __________.
(A) direct method
(B) directly by metre scale
(C) spherometer method
(D) parallax method
Answer:
(D) parallax method

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
The two stars S1 and S2 are located at distances d1 and d2 respectively. Also if d1 > d22 then following statement is true.
(A) The parallax of S1 and S2 are same.
(B) The parallax of S1 is twice as that of S2
(C) The parallax of S1 is greater than parallax of S2
(D) The parallax of S2 is greater than parallax of S1
Answer:
(D) The parallax of S2 is greater than parallax of S1

Question 6.
Which of the following is NOT a unit of time?
(A) Hour
(B) Nano second
(C) Microsecond
(D) parsec
Answer:
(D) parsec

Question 7.
An atomic clock makes use of _________.
(A) cesium-133 atom
(B) cesium-132 atom
(C) cesium-123 atom
(D) cesium-131 atom
Answer:
(A) cesium-133 atom

Question 8.
S.I. unit of energy is joule and it is equivalent to
(A) 106 erg
(B) 10-7 erg
(C) 107 erg
(D) 105 erg
Answer:
(C) 107 erg

Question 9.
[L1M1T-1] is an expression for __________.
(A) force
(B) energy
(C) pressure
(D) momentum
Answer:
(D) momentum

Question 10.
Dimensions of sin θ is
(A) [L2]
(B) [M]
(C) [ML]
(D) [M0L0T0]
Answer:
(D) [M0L0T0]

Question 11.
Accuracy of measurement is determined by
(A) absolute error
(B) percentage error
(C) human error
(D) personal error
Answer:
(B) percentage error

Question 12.
Zero error of an instrument introduces .
(A) systematic error
(B) random error
(C) personal error
(D) decimal error
Answer:
(A) systematic error

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
The diameter of the paper pin is measured accurately by using ________.
(A) Vernier callipers
(B) micrometer screw gauge
(C) metre scale
(D) a measuring tape
Answer:
(B) micrometer screw gauge

Question 14.
The number of significant figures in 11.118 × 10-6 is
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
Answer:
(C) 5

Question 15.
0.00849 contains ___________ significant figures.
(A) 6
(B) 5
(C) 3
(D) 2
Answer:
(C) 3

Question 16.
3.310 × 102 has ___________ significant figures.
(A) 6
(B) 4
(C) 2
(D) 1
Answer:
(B) 4

Question 17.
The Earth’s radius is 6371 km. The order of magnitude of the Earth’s radius is
(A) 103 m
(B) 109 m
(C) 107 m
(D) 102 m
Answer:
(C) 107 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 18.
__________ is the smallest measurement that can be made using the given instrument
(A) Significant number
(B) Least count
(C) Order of magnitude
(D) Relative error
Answer:
(B) Least count

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
In an experiment, the percentage of error occurred in the measurement of physical quantities A, B, C and D are 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respectively. Then the maximum percentage of error in the measurement X,
where X = \(\frac{A^{2} \frac{1}{B^{2}}}{C^{\frac{1}{3}} D^{3}}\), will be:
(A) -10 %
(B) 10 %
(C) \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)
(D) 16 %
Answer:
(D) 16 %
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 34
∴ Percentage error in x is given as,
\(\frac{\Delta x}{x}\) × 100 – (error contributed by A) – (error contributed by B) + (error contributed by C) + (error contributed by D)
= 2% + 1% + 1% + 12%
= 16%

Question 2.
The main scale of a vernier callipers has n divisions/cm. n divisions of the vernier scale coincide with (n – 1) divisions of main scale. The least count of the vernier callipers is,
(A) \(\frac{1}{n(n+1)}\) cm
(B) \(\frac{1}{(n+1)(n-1)}\) cm
(C) \(\frac{1}{n}\) cm
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm
Hint:
1 V.S.D. = \(\frac{(n-1)}{n}\) M.S.D.
LC. = 1 M.S.D. – 1 V.S.D.
= 1 M.S.D. – \(\frac{(n-1)}{n}\) M.S.D.
= \(\frac{1}{n}\) M.S.D.
= \(\frac{1}{n}\) × \(\frac{1}{n}\) cm
∴ L.C. = \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm

Question 3.
A student measures time for 20 oscillations of a simple pendulum as 30 s. 32 s, 35 s and 31 s. 1f the minimum division in the measuring clock is I s, then correct mean time in second is
(A) 32 ± 3
(B) 32 ± 1
(C) 32 ± 2
(D) 32 ± 5
Answer:
(C) 32 ± 2
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 35
Hence rounding off,
∆t = ± 2 s
∴ t ± ∆t = 32 ± 2 s

Question 4.
A student measured the diameter of a small steel ball using a screw gauge of least count 0.001 cm. The main scale reading is 5 mm and zero of circular scale division coincides with 25 divisions above the reference leveL If screw gauge has a zero error of— 0.004 cm, the correct diameter of the ball is
(A) 0.521 cm
(B) 0.525 cm
(C) 0.053 cm
(D) 0.29 cm
Answer:
(D) 0.29 cm

Hint:
Least count of screw gauge = 0.001 cm = 0.01mm
Main scale reading = 5 mm.
Zero error = – 0.004 cm = -0.04 mm
Zero correction = +0.04 mm
Observed reading = Mainscale reading + (Division × least count)
Observed reading = 5 + (25 × 0.01) = 5.25 mm
Corrected reading = Observed reading + Zero correction
Corrected reading = 5.25 + 0.04
= 5.29 mm = 0.529 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
The density of the material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its mass. 1f the relative errors in measuring the mass and length are respectively 1.5% and 1%, the maximum error in determining the density is:
(A) 4.5%
(B) 6%
(C) 2.5°
(D) 3.5%
Answer:
(A) 4.5%
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 36

Question 6.
Let x = \(\left[\frac{a^{2} b^{2}}{c}\right]\) be the physical quantity. If the percentage error in the measurement of physical quantities a, b and c is 2, 3 and 4 percent respectively then percentage en-or in the measurement of x is
(A) 7%
(B) 14%
(C) 21%
(D) 28%
Answer:
(B) 14%
Hint:
Given: x = \(\frac{a^{2} b^{2}}{c}\)
Percentage error is given by.
\(\frac{\Delta x}{x}=\frac{2 \Delta a}{a}+\frac{2 \Delta b}{b}+\frac{\Delta c}{c}\)
= (2 × 2) + (2 × 3) + 4
= 4 + 6 + 4 = 14
∴ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{x}} \%\) = 14%

Question 7.
A physical quantity of the dimensions of length that can be formed out of c, G and \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) is [c is velocity of light, G is universal constant of gravitation and e is charge]:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 37
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{c}^{2}}\left[\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{1 / 2}\)

Hint:
Let the physical quantity formed of the dimensions of length be given as.
[L] = [c]x [G]y \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{z}\) …………….. (i)
Now,
Dimensions of velocity of light [c]x = [LT-1]x
Dimensions of universal gravitational constant
[G]y = [L3T2M-1]y
Dimensions of \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{z}\) = [ML3T-2]z
Substitrning these in equation (i)
[L] [LT-1]x [M-1L3T-2]y [ML3T-2]z
= Lx+3y+3z M-y+z T-x-2y-2z
Solving for x, y, z
x + 3y + 3z = 1
-y + z = 0
x + 2y + 2z = O
Solving the above equation,
x = -2, y = \(\frac{1}{2}\), z = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
∴ L = \(\frac{1}{c^{2}}\left[\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{1 / 2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 8.
The following observations were taken for determining surface tension T of water by capillary method:
diameter of capillary, D = 1.25 × 10-2 m
rise of water, h = 1.45 × 10-2 m
Using g = 9.80 m/s2 and the simplified relation
T = \(\frac{\mathrm{rhg}}{2}\) × 103 N/m, the possible error in surface tension is closest to:
(A) 0.15%
(B) 1.5%
(C) 2.4%
(D) 10%
Answer:
(B) 1.5%
Hint:
D = 1.25 × 10-2 m; h = 1.45 × 10-2 m
The maximum permissible error in D
= ∆D = 0.01 × 10-2 m
The maximum permissible error in h
= ∆h = 0.01 × 10-2 m
g is given as a constant and is errorless.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 38